E 180 000 2 11 13

Accumulator Technology 30.
000
Global Presence.
Local Expertise.
www.hydac.com
Filter Technology 70.000
Electronic
Product Catalogue
Process Technology 77.000
Filter Systems 79.000
Electronic Product Catalogue

Compact Hydraulics 53.000
HYDAC Headquarters
HYDAC Companies
HYDAC Distributors and Service Partners
Accessories 61.000
HYDAC ELECTRONIC Hauptstraße 27

GMBH 66128 Saarbrücken
Deutschland
Tel.:
Electronics 180.000
+49 6897 509-01

Fax:
+49 6897 509-1726
E-Mail: electronic@hydac.com
Internet: www.hydac.com
E 180.000.2/11.13
E 180.000.2/11.13
Cooling Systems 5.700
HYDAC Electronic
HYDAC is best known for hydraulics,
systems and fluid engineering. For over
50 years, HYDAC has been developing
and manufacturing components and
system solutions for specific applications
in these fields.
Over 30 years ago, inspired by its industry
and application experience, HYDAC
expanded its portfolio to include sensors,
measuring instruments and electronic
controls.
The range of sensors includes products

for the measurement of pressure, Computer simulation
temperature, distance, position, level, flow of a HYDAC pressure transmitter.
volume, speed as well as contamination
and oil condition. In addition to
products for standard applications, the
product portfolio also covers special
applications such as potentially explosive
atmospheres or applications with
increased functional safety.
Almost all these products are

developed, manufactured and marketed
by HYDAC ELECTRONIC.
Suitability for the application is tested on
HYDAC test rigs. As a Tier 1 automotive
supplier, HYDAC ELECTRONIC is certified Production and automatic function testing.
in accordance with the rigorous quality
standard ISO/TS 16949 and therefore
fulfils the very high requirements
regarding product quality, production
processes and continuous improvement
processes.
Our international sales network provides
customers with worldwide product
availability, expert advice and support. An
extensive service package completes our
offer.
Development and manufacturing plant in Saarbrücken-Gersweiler.
HYDAC Servicenter, a complete Technical advice

package of services. and training.
on
cti
g
pe
in
Ins
ic
e
rv
nc
Se
na
nte
ai ion
M lat
tal
Ins n
atio
imiz
Opt
E 180.000.2 /11.13
2
Note Page
The information in this brochure
relates to the operating conditions 1. Introduction 2 1
and applications described. zzIndustries / Applications / Product Range 2-7
For applications or operating
conditions not described, please 2. Electronic pressure transmitters 8 - 33 2
contact the relevant technical for general applications
department. zzHDA 4800 9
zzHDA 4700 11
zzHDA 4700 Approvals for shipping 13
Subject to technical modifications.
zzHDA 4700 CANopen 15
zzHDA 4400 17
zzHDA 4300 21
zzHDA 4100 25
zzHDA 7446 29
zzHDA 7400 CANopen 31
zzHDA 3800 for Iron and Steel Works Applications 33
3. Electronic pressure switches 36 - 79 3
for general applications
zzEDS 3400 37
zzEDS 3400 Menu navigation according to VDMA 41
zzEDS 3400 IO-Link 43
zzEDS 3300 45
zzEDS 3100 53
zzEDS 300 61
zzEDS 300 Approvals for shipping 65
zzEDS 8000 67
zzEDS 601 69
zzEDS 1700 71
zzEDS 4400 Programmable 73
zzEDS 4300 Programmable 75
4. Pressure sensors with flush membrane 80 - 95 4

zzHDA 4700 81
zzHDA 4400 83
zzHDA 4300 85
zzHDA 7400 87
zzEDS 3400 89
zzEDS 3300 93
5. Electronic temperature transmitters 96 - 103 5

zzETS 7200 97
zzETS 4100 99
zzETS 4500 101
6. Electronic temperature switches 104 - 129 6

zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation 105
zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation, menu navigation to VDMA 107
zzETS 3200 pressure-resistant for inline installation, IO-Link 109
zzETS 3200 for tank installation 111
zzETS 3200 for tank installation, menu navigation to VDMA 113
zzETS 3200 for tank installation, IO-Link 115
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe 117
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, with menu navigation to VDMA 119
zzETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, IO-Link 121
zzETS 320 pressure-resistant for inline installation 123
zzTFP 100 (separate temperature probe) 129
HYDAC electronic GmbH
Hauptstraße 27,
E 180.000.2 /11.13
D-66128 Saarbrücken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
3
Page
7 7. Sensors for distance and position 130 - 145

for mobile and stationary applications
zzHLT 1000-R2 131
zzHLT 2100-R1 133
zzHLT 2500-F1 137
zzHLT 2500-L2 141
zzHLS 528 145
8 . Level sensors
8 148 - 161
zzENS 3000 149
zzENS 3000 IO-Link 153
zzHNS 3000 155
zzHNS 526 157
zzHNT 1000 161
9 9. Flow transmitters / flow switches 164 - 181

zzEVS 3110 165
zzEVS 3100 167
zzHFS 2100 169
zzHFS 2500 173
zzHFT 2100 177
zzHFT 2500 181
10 10. Speed sensors 184 - 193

zzHSS 110 185
zzHSS 120 187
zzHSS 130 189
zzHSS 210 191
zzHSS 220 193
11 11. Sensors 196 - 201

for applications with increased functional safety
zzHDA 4700 for applications with increased functional safety 197
zzHLT 1000 for applications with increased functional safety 199
12 12. Sensors 202 - 311

for potentially explosive atmospheres
zzHDA 4700 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 203
zzEDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure, programmable 207
zzETS 4500 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 211
zzHDA 4700 ATEX Intrinsically safe 215
zzEDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe programmable 231
zzHDA 4700 CSA Intrinsically safe 243
zzHDA 4700 IECEx Intrinsically safe 259
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane ATEX Intrinsically safe 275
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe 287
zzHDA 4700 with Flush Membrane ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 299
zzHFS 2100 ATEX Intrinsically safe 303
zzHFS 2500 ATEX Intrinsically safe 307
E 180.000.2 /11.13
4
Page
13. Display and monitoring units 312 - 315 13

zzHDA 5500 313
14. Service instruments 316 - 331 14

zzHMG 500 317
zzHMG 510 319
zzHMG 3010 321
zzHDA 4748-H 325
zzETS 4148-H 327
zzEVS 31X0-H 329
15. Condition monitoring products 332 - 349 15

zzCMU 1000 333
zzCSI-B-2 337
zzHLB 1300 339
zzAS 1000 341
zzAS 3000 343
zzAS 3000 IO-Link 345
zzEY 1356 347
16. OEM products for large volume production 350 - 381 16

zzHDA 8700 351
zzHDA 8400 353
zzHDA 8000 for applications with increased functional safety 355
zzHDA 7400 357
zzHDA 9300 359
zzEDS 810 361
zzEDS 710 363
zzEDS 410 365
zzECS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 367
zzEDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe 369
zzHTT 8000 375
zzHTS 8000 377
zzHLS 100 for applications with increased functional safety 379
zzSpecial products 381
- IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020
- IWE 40
- HLS 200 for applications with increased functional safety
1
7. Accessories 382 - 403 17
zzElectrical accessories 383 - 388
for electrical connection type "4" (Binder, Series 714M18)
for electrical connection type "5" (EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) /ISO 4400)
for electrical connection type "6" (M12×1, 4 pole)
for electrical connection type "7" (DIN 43561)
for electrical connection type "8" (M12×1, 5 pole)
for electrical connection type "P" (M12×1, 8 pole)
zzMechanical accessories 389 - 396
- Connection adapters for pressure sensors
- Mounting accessories for EDS 8000, HDA 8000, EDS 810
- Mounting accessories for EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000, ENS 3000, HNS 3000
- Mounting accessories for EDS 300, ETS 300
- Mounting accessories for EDS 1700, ETS 1700
- Mounting accessories for EDS 601
- Tank mounting sleeve for ETS 3000
- Connection blocks for ENS 3000
- Connection blocks for HLB 1300
- Connection blocks for AS 1000, AS 3000
zzAccessories for sensors for distance and position 397 - 400
- Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000
- Electrical accessories for HLT 2000
zzAccessories for service instruments 401 - 403
- Accessories for HMG 30X0
- Accessories for HMG 500/510
E 180.000.2 /11.13
5
Industries and applications
1
There is almost no hydraulic or Excavators
pneumatic medium or system Electronic controls and sensors
that could not be monitored and to complete the system electronics.
controlled by HYDAC measurement - Load limit control
technology - quickly, precisely and - Electro-hydraulic load sensing
safely. - Integrated operating data logging
- Controls of special equipment
It is not surprising, therefore, that the - Cut-off devices
individually designed - Safety cut-off devices
HYDAC Measuring Technology
is employed by well-known Wheel Loaders
manufacturers and operators Electronic controls and sensors
in all industries. to complete the system electronics.
These applications range from - Load limit control
analysis and diagnostics of - Electro-hydraulic load sensing
operating fluids in the laboratory - Integrated operating data logging
and on site, to controlling - Controls of special equipment
complex industrial systems and - Cut-off devices
to miniaturised systems - Safety cut-off devices
in construction and road vehicles.
Road Construction Machinery
Sensor technology and system electronics to generate
modern control concepts or ready-to-install total concepts.
- Load spectra
- Condition monitoring
- Safety systems
- Load limiting
- Function controls
- Energy management
Telescopic Cranes
Sensor technology and system electronics to generate
modern control concepts
or ready-to-install total concepts.
- Load torque limiting
- Load spectra
- Load sensing
- Load limit control
- Energy management
Municipal Machines
Sensors, system electronics
and condition monitoring.
- Working hydraulics
- Axle suspension systems
- Cab suspension systems
- Levelling systems
Tractors
Sensors, system electronics
- Cab suspension
- Central hydraulics
- Front axle suspension
- Transmission shift control
- Level control
- Anti-roll stabilisation
Agricultural Technology
Electronic controls and sensors
to complete the system electronics.
- Load limit control
- Electro-hydraulic load sensing
- Integrated operating data logging
- Controls of special equipment
- Cut-off devices
E 180.000.2 /11.13
- Safety cut-off devices
6
1
Mining Aviation and Aerospace Industry
Electronic measurement technology for Sensors, system electronics
underground applications. and condition monitoring.
- Pump station / Media supply - Rocket test rigs
- Mining of raw materials - Test rigs for aircraft hydraulics
- Heading - Satellite test rigs
- Material-handling and passenger transportation - Flight simulators
- Analysis and diagnostics
Iron - Steel - Metal Wind Turbines

Measuring technology and electronics. Sensors, system electronics
- Pump stations
- Valve stations - Condition monitoring of
- Accumulator stations hydraulic and lubrication oils
- Heat exchangers - Measurement technology
- Condition monitoring - Safety and yaw brakes
- Pitch control
- Performance testing stations for transmission systems
Machine Tools Power Plant Technology

Sensors, system electronics Sensors, system electronics
and condition monitoring. and condition monitoring.
- Hydraulic weight counter-balance - Condition monitoring of
- Hydrostatic slide bearing hydraulic and lubrication oils
- Pressure boost station - Hydraulic drive and control systems
- Central processing of cooling lubricants including electronic controls
- Tool clamping device
Pulp and Paper Industry Transformers

Sensors, system electronics Measuring technology, electronics and condition
and condition monitoring. monitoring.
- Insulating oil conditioning
- Insulating oil monitoring
- Cooling
Automotive Production Oil and Gas Industry

Measurement technology and condition monitoring Sensors, system electronics
for machine tools and presses, and condition monitoring
Cooling lubricant supply and test rigs. for offshore, subsea or
onshore applications.
Shipping Condition Monitoring

Measuring technology, electronics and condition Data logging and interpretation
monitoring for: providing information on the condition of machines,
systems and their components.
- Engines
- Control of motion sequences
- Steering gear/Propeller
- Ballast water treatment
- Deck superstructures
E 180.000.2 /11.13
7
Electronic Pressure Transmitters
The right pressure transmitter for every application! The wide ranging
product choice from HYDAC offers solutions for all industries, whether
systems or machinery manufacture, mobile technology or for laboratory
2 applications.
The pressure transmitters are available with a variety of output signals,
connectors and fluid port connection options.
Pressure transmitters for general applications:

Page
HDA 4800 9
HDA 4700 11
HDA 4700 Approvals for shipping 13
HDA 4700 CANopen 15
HDA 4400 17
HDA 4300 21
3
HDA 4100 25
HDA 7446 29
HDA 7400 CANopen 31
HDA 3800 Iron and steel works 33
Further pressure transmitters for special applications can be found in the

sections "Pressure Sensors with Flush Membrane", "Service Instruments",
"Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" and "OEM Products for
Large Volume Production" .
HDA 4800
HDA 4700
HDA 4400
HDA 4300
HDA 4100
HDA 3800
HDA 7400
HDA 8700
HDA 8400
HDA 9000
4
Electronic
Pressure Transmitters
Accuracy (max. error) 0.25 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.3 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0
5
Low pressure (up to 40 bar) ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
High pressure (from 40 bar) ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Relative pressure ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
6 Absolute pressure ü
Available as individual units ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
OEM product for large volume
production ü ü ü ü
Flush membrane ü ü ü ü
CANopen Version ü ü
ECE type authorisation
(approved for road vehicles) ü
Approval for potentially
explosive atmospheres ü ü ü ü
Approvals for Shipping ü ü ü ü
E 180.000.2 /11.13
UL Approval ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Increased functional safety ü ü
Note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data sheet.
8
Electronic 2
Pressure Transmitter
HDA 4800
3
Description: Technical data:
The pressure transmitter series Input data
HDA 4800 has a very accurate and Measuring ranges 6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
robust sensor cell with a thin-film Overload pressures 15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
strain gauge on a stainless steel Burst pressures 100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
membrane. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
Outstanding technical specifications Torque value 20 Nm
Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
and robust construction make the Seal: FPM
HDA 4800 particularly suited to
Output data
the field of test rig and diagnostic
Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
technology. It is also suitable for a RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
broad range of industrial applications. 0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
Since the accuracy of a pressure RLmin = 2 kW
0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor source
transmitter varies greatly with RLmax = (UB - 4 V) / 20 mA [kW]
the temperature of the fluid, Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.125 % FS typ.
the instrument has excellent Max. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
characteristics in this respect. The Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.06 % FS typ.
output signals 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10V (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.125 % FS max.
and 0 .. 20 mA (source) Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.005 % FS / °C typ. 4
Zero point ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C max.
are available as standard.
Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.005 % FS / °C typ.
Over range ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C max.
Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS max.
Special features: to DIN 16086
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.125 % FS typ. Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
 Highly robust sensor cell Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
 Very small temperature error Rise time ≤ 1 ms
Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year 5
 Excellent EMC Environmental conditions
characteristics Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
 Excellent long term stability Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4 6
mark2) Certificate No. E318391
Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650) and Binder 714 M18)
IP 67 (M12x1, when an
IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
Supply voltage 10 .. 30 V DC 2-conductor
12 .. 30 V DC 3 conductor
for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
Current consumption ≤ 15 mA
Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 180 g
E 18.380.1/11.13
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit
protection are provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
-25 °C with FPM seal, -40 °C on request
2)
Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No 61010-1
9
Model code: Pin connections:
HDA 4 8 4 X – X – XXX – 000
Binder series 714 M18
Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
Electrical connection
4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18
(connector not supplied)
5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(connector supplied)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
(connector not supplied) Pin HDA HDA HDA
Signal 4844-A 4844-B 4844-E
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor 1 n.c. +UB +UB
E = 0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor 2 Signal+ Signal Signal
Pressure ranges in bar 3 Signal- 0V 0V
006, 016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600 4 n.c. n.c. n.c.
3 Modification number
000 = Standard EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the
Accessories brochure.
Pin HDA HDA HDA
4845-A 4845-B 4845-E
1 Signal+ +UB +UB
2 Signal- 0V 0V
3 n.c. Signal Signal
^ Housing Housing Housing
4
Dimensions: M12x1
5 profile seal
ring
Pin HDA HDA HDA

4846-A 4846-B 4846-E
male electr. conn.
6
Binder series 714 -4p male electr. conn.
electr. conn. 1 Signal+ +UB +UB
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 pole
2 n.c n.c n.c
3 Signal- 0V 0V
4 n.c Signal Signal
Note:
hex-SW27
The information in this brochure relates to
the operating conditions and
applications described.
For applications and operating conditions
not described, please contact the relevant
elastomer
profile seal ring technical department.
DIN3869 Subject to technical modifications.
E 18.380.1/11.13

Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
10
Electronic Pressure 2
Transmitter
HDA 4700
3
HDA 4700 has a very accurate and Measurement ranges1) 6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
robust sensor cell with a thin-film Overload pressures 15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
strain gauge on a stainless steel Burst pressures 100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
membrane. Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852;
G1/2 A DIN3852
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V output Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
signals enable connection to all Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
measurement and control devices of Seal: FPM
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH as well Output data
as standard evaluation systems Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
(e.g. PLC controls). RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
The main areas of application are RLmin= 2 kW
in the mobile or industrial sectors Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
of hydraulics and pneumatics, Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
particularly in applications with Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
restricted installation space. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. 4
Special features: Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
 Highly robust sensor cell to DIN 16086
Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
 Very small temperature error
Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
 Excellent EMC characteristics Rise time ≤ 1 ms
 Very compact design Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
Environmental conditions
 Persuasive price / 5
Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
performance ratio Operating temperature range2) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
6
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 (M12x1, when an
Other data
Supply voltage 8 .. 30 V DC 2 conductor
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.306.6/11.13
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and
short circuit protection are provided.
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
11
HDA 4 7 X X – X – XXX – 000
2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (only for "1000 bar" press. range)
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole Pin HDA 47X4-A HDA 47X4-B
1 n.c. +UB
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor 2 Signal+ Signal
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor 3 Signal- 0V
Pressure ranges in bar 4 n.c. n.c.
3 006; 016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
1000 bar (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2") EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Accessories brochure. Pin HDA 47X5-A HDA 47X5-B
1 Signal+ +UB
2 Signal- 0V
Dimensions:
3 n.c. Signal
^ Housing Housing
4
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

5 Binder series 714 -4p male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.
4 pole
Pin HDA 47X6-A HDA 47X6-B

1 Signal+ +UB
6 2 n.c. n.c.
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
Note:
DIN3869 The information in this brochure relates to
the operating conditions and applications
described.
For applications or operating conditions
hex. SW27
technical department.
E 18.306.6/11.13
elastomer
profile gasket HYDAC electronic GmbH
DIN 3869 Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
optional Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
12
Electronic 2
HDA 4700
with Approvals for Shipping
3
This pressure transmitter has been Input data
specially developed for shipbuilding Measurement ranges 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
applications and is based on the Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
HDA 4000 series.
Burst pressures 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1 000; 2000; 2000 bar
With its stainless steel measurement Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
cell and thin-film strain gauge, Torque value 20 Nm
the HDA 4700 is designed to measure
Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
relative pressures in the high Seal: FPM
pressure range.
Output data
The evaluation electronics converts
the measured pressure into a Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax = (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
proportional analogue signal of
4 .. 20 mA. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
The electronic module is completely Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
potted to protect it against humidity, (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
vibrations and shock, and is enclosed Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
in a solid stainless steel housing. Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. 4
For use in the shipping industry, Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
these pressure transmitters have Range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
been approved by the following Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
organisations. to DIN 16086
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
Approvals: Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
 American Bureau Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
of Shipping Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
6
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Lloyds Register
 Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
of Shipping DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
IP 67 connector female is used)
Det Norske Veritas
 Other data
Supply voltage 10 .. 32 V DC
Germanischer Lloyd
 0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
 Bureau Veritas FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
E 18.322.2/11.13
1)
Other approvals on request

13
HDA 4 7 4 X – A – XXXX – S00
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
Pin HDA 4745-A
Pressure ranges in bar
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 1 Signal+
2 Signal-
Modification number
S00 = With approvals for shipping 3 n.c.
Note: ^ Housing
3 On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. M12x1
Accessories:
Pin HDA 4746-A

1 Signal+
2 n.c.
3 Signal-
4 n.c.
4
Dimensions:
5 profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

6 3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.
4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
E 18.322.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
14
Electronic 2
HDA 4700
CANopen
3
The HDA 4700 CAN is a digital Input data
pressure transmitter which is used Measuring ranges1) 40; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
to measure relative pressures in Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
hydraulics and pneumatics. The Burst pressures 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
measured pressure value is digitized Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 A DIN 3852
and made available to the CAN Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
field bus system via the CANopen Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
protocol. The instrument parameters
Output data
can be viewed and configured by the Output signal CANopen protocol
user via the CANopen object directory Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
using standard CAN software. Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
This pressure transmitter, which is Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
based on the HDA 4700, has a very (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
accurate and robust sensor cell with Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
a thin-film strain gauge on a stainless Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
steel membrane. Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
Due to their outstanding temperature Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
and EMC characteristics, together to DIN 16086 4
with their compact dimensions, these
instruments can be used in a wide
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
range of applications in the mobile Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
and industrial sectors. Environmental conditions
Operating temperature range2) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
Special features: Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
 CANopen interface Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C 5
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Robust thin-film cell mark3) Certificate No. E318391
 Excellent EMC characteristics DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Very compact design Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data 6
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight approx. 150 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and
excess voltage protection are provided.
Special models available on request.
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
E 18.316.3/11.13
15
HDA 4 7 X 8 – K – XXXX – 000
M12x1
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male) 4 3
5
8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole 1 2
Signal
K = CANopen
Pin Signal Description
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2") 1 Housing shield/housing
Modification number 2 +UB supply +
000 = Standard (Baud Rate: 250k Node Id: 1) 3 0V supply -
Note:
4 CAN_H bus line dominant high
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
3 the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. 5 CAN_L bus line dominant low
Accessories:
Protocol data for CANopen:

Communication profile CiA DS 301 V4.2
Device profile CiA DS 404 V1.3
Layer setting services and protocol CiA DSP 305 V2.2
Automatic bit-rate detection CiA AN 801
Baud rates 10 kbit .. 1 Mbit corresp. to DS305 V2.2
Transmission services
- PDO Measured value as 16/32 bit, float status
- Transfer synchronous, asynchronous, cyclical, measured
value change, exceeding boundaries
Node ID/Baud rate Can be set via Manufacturer Specific Profile
4
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.
5 pole
6
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869 Note:
described.
E 18.316.3/11.13
elastomer
optional Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
O-ring Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
20.35 x 1.78
16
Transmitter
HDA 4400
3
HDA 4400 has a pressure Measuring ranges1) 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
measurement cell with thin-film strain Overload pressures 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
gauge on a stainless steel membrane. Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 A DIN 3852
The 4 .. 20 V or 0 .. 10 V output
Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
signals enable connection to all
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH Seal: FPM
measurement and control devices Output data
as well as connection to standard Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
evaluation systems (e.g. PLC RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
controls). 0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
RLmin. = 2 kW
The main areas of application are Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
in the mobile or industrial sectors Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
of hydraulics and pneumatics, Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
particularly in applications with (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
restricted installation space. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ. 4
Special features: Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. to DIN 16086
 Highly robust sensor cell Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
 Very small temperature error Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
 Excellent EMC characteristics Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
 Very compact design Environmental conditions
Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C 5
 Persuasive price /
Operating temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
performance ratio
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g 6
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 (for M12x1, when an
Other data
Supply voltage 8 .. 30 V DC, 2 conductor
12 .. 30 V DC, 3 conductor
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.305.4/11.13

1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 A DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
Environmental conditions in accordance with 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No 61010-1
17
HDA 4 4 X X – X – XXX – 000
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
(connector not supplied) Pin HDA 44X4-A HDA 44X4-B
Signal 1 n.c. +UB
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor 2 Signal+ Signal
3 Signal- 0V
016; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600 4 n.c. n.c.
3 1000 bar (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Modification number EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
000 = Standard
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
1 Signal+ +UB
2 Signal- 0V
Dimensions:
3 n.c. Signal
^ Housing Housing
4
M12x1
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

5 Binder series 714 -4pole male electr. conn.
3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.
4 pole

1 Signal+ +UB
6 2 n.c. n.c.
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
Note:
DIN3869 The information in this brochure relates to
described.
hex. SW27
E 18.305.4/11.13
elastomer
Optional Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
18
Electronic 2
HDA 4400
3
specially developed for shipbuilding Measuring ranges 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
applications and is based on the Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
HDA 4000 series.
Burst pressures 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
With its stainless steel measurement
Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
cell and thin-film strain gauge,
the HDA 4400 is designed to measure Torque value 20 Nm
relative pressures in the high Parts in contact with medium Mech. connector: Stainless steel
pressure range. Seal: FPM
The evaluation electronics converts Output data
the measured pressure into a Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
proportional analogue signal of RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
4 .. 20 mA. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
The electronic module is completely Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
potted to protect it against humidity, Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
vibrations and shock, and is enclosed (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
in a solid stainless steel housing. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
For use in the shipping industry,
these pressure transmitters have Range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
been approved by the following
organisations.
to DIN 16086
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
 American Bureau Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
6
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Lloyds Register
 Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
of Shipping DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
(DIN 43650))
IP 67 (for M12x1 male when
Det Norske Veritas
 an IP 67 connector is used
Other data
Germanischer Lloyd
 Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
 Bureau Veritas short circuit protection are provided.
E 18.317.3/11.13

1)

19
HDA 4 4 4 X – A – XXXX – S00
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
Signal
Pin HDA 4445-A
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 1 Signal+
2 Signal-
Modification number
S00 = With approvals for shipping 3 n.c.
Note: ^ Housing
3 On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. M12x1
Accessories:
Pin HDA 4446-A

1 Signal+
2 n.c.
3 Signal-
4 n.c.
4
Dimensions:
5 profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 male electr.
6 (DIN 43650) conn.
4p
Note:
hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
profile seal technical department.
ring DIN3869 Subject to technical modifications.
E 18.317.3/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
20
Transmitter
HDA 4300
3
HDA 4300 has a ceramic pressure Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
measurement cell with a thick-film -1 .. 5; -1 .. 9 bar
strain gauge which has been specially Overload pressures 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
20; 32 bar
developed for measuring relative
Burst pressures 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
pressure in the low pressure range. 30; 48 bar
The output signals 4 .. 20 mA or Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
0 .. 10 V allow connection of all Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
measurement and control devices as Sensor cell: Ceramic
Seal: Copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
well as industry standard control and (as per model code)
monitoring instruments. Output data
The main areas of application Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
are low-pressure applications RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
in hydraulics and pneumatics, RLmin = 2 kW
particularly in refrigeration and air- Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
conditioning technology, the food and Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
pharmaceutical industries. 4
Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
Special features: Zero point ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
 Very small temperature error Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
 Excellent EMC characteristics to DIN 16086
 Very compact design Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS 5
 Persuasive price / Rise time ≤ 1 ms
performance ratio Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C 6
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Life expectancy > 10 million cycles, 0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.323.2/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override
and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
-25 °C with FPM or EDPM seal, -40 °C on request
2)
Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No 61010-1 21
HDA 4 3 X X – X – XXXX – 000 – X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE,
DIN EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole, Pin HDA 43X4-A HDA 43X4-B
1 n.c. +UB
Signal
3 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
0005 (-1 .. 5); 0009 (-1 .. 9) EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Modification number
000 = Standard
Seal material (in contact with fluid)
F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for refrigerants)
Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the Pin HDA 43X5-A HDA 43X5-B
1 Signal+ +UB
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found 2 Signal- 0V
in the Accessories brochure. 3 n.c. Signal
^ Housing Housing
4
Dimensions: M12x1
5 profile seal ring

1 Signal+ +UB
male electr. conn.
6
Binder series 714 -4 pole male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn. 2 n.c. n.c.
4 pole
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
Note:
hex.-SW27 hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
flat seal ring Cu
E 18.323.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
22
Electronic 2
HDA 4300
3
specially developed for shipbuilding Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
applications and is based on the -1 .. 5; -1 .. 9 bar
HDA 4000 series. Overload pressures 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
The HDA 4300 has a ceramic 20; 32 bar
measurement cell with thick-film Burst pressures 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
strain gauge for measuring relative 30; 48 bar
pressure in the low pressure range. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
The evaluation electronics converts Torque value 20 Nm
the measured pressure into a Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
proportional analogue signal of Sensor cell: Ceramic
4 .. 20 mA. Seal: FPM / EPDM
(as per model code)
The electronic module is completely
Output data
potted to protect it against humidity,
vibrations and shock, and is enclosed Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
in a solid stainless steel housing.
Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
For use in the shipping industry, Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max. 4
these pressure transmitters have Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
been approved by the following (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
organisations. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
to DIN 16086
Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max. 5
Approvals: Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
 American Bureau
Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
of Shipping
Operating temperature range1) -30 .. +85°C / -25 .. +85 °C
Lloyds Register

of Shipping
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Det Norske Veritas
 DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
(DIN 43650))
IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an IP 67
connector is used)
Germanischer Lloyd
 Other data
 Bureau Veritas
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.324.2/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
Other approvals on request B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
-25 °C with FPM or EPDM seal, -30 °C on request
23
HDA 4 3 4 X – A – XXXX – S00 – X 1
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Pin HDA 4345-A
Pressure ranges in bar 1 Signal+

01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040 2 Signal-
0005 (-1 .. 5); 0009 (-1 .. 9) 3 n.c.
Modification number ^ Housing
3 S00 = With approvals for shipping
Seal material (in contact with fluid) M12x1
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories: Pin HDA 4346-A

Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found 1 Signal+
in the Accessories brochure. 2 n.c.
3 Signal-
4 n.c.
4
Dimensions:
5 profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

6 3pole +PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.
4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
E 18.324.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
24
Transmitter
HDA 4100
3
HDA 4100 has a ceramic pressure Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
measurement cell with thick-film Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
strain gauge which has been specially Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
developed for measuring absolute Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852; G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
pressure in the low-pressure range. Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4); 45 Nm (G1/2)
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V output Sensor cell: Ceramic
signals enable connection to all Seal: Copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH (as per model code)
measurement and control devices Output data
as well as standard control and Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
evaluation systems. 0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
The main areas of application RLmin. = 2 kW
are low-pressure applications Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
in hydraulics and pneumatics, Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
particularly in refrigeration and air- Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
conditioning technology, the food and Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
pharmaceutical industries. 4
Special features: Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. to DIN 16086
 Excellent EMC characteristics Rise time ≤ 1 ms
 Very compact design Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Environmental conditions 5
 Persuasive price /
performance ratio Operating temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
mark2) Certificate No. E318391 6
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.314.3/11.13
1)
2)
25
HDA 4 1 X X – X – XXXX – 000 – X 1
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole Pin HDA 41X4-A HDA 41X4-B
1 n.c. +UB
Signal
3 01.0; 02.5
Modification number EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. Pin HDA 41X5-A HDA 41X5-B
Accessories: 1 Signal+ +UB
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found
in the Accessories brochure. 2 Signal- 0V
3 n.c. Signal
^ Housing Housing
4
Dimensions: M12x1
5 profile seal ring

1 Signal+ +UB
male electr. conn.
6
Binder series 714 -4 pole male electr. conn.
3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn. 2 n.c. n.c.
4 pole
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
Note:
hex.-SW27 hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
flat seal ring Cu
E 18.314.3/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
26
Electronic 2
HDA 4100
3
specially developed for shipbuilding Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
applications and is based on the Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
HDA 4000 series. Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
The HDA 4100 has a ceramic Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
measurement cell with thick-film Torque value 20 Nm
strain gauge for measuring absolute Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
pressure in the low pressure range. Sensor cell: Ceramic
The evaluation electronics converts Seal: FPM / EPDM
the measured pressure into a (as per model code)
proportional analogue signal of Output data
4 .. 20 mA. Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
The electronic module is completely
potted to protect it against humidity, Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
vibrations and shock, and is enclosed
in a solid stainless steel housing. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
For use in the shipping industry, Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ. 4
these pressure transmitters have Zero point ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
been approved by the following Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
organisations. Over range ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
to DIN 16086
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
5
Approvals: Environmental conditions
 American Bureau Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
of Shipping Operating temperature range1) -30 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
Fluid temperature range1) -30 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C 6
Lloyds Register
 mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
of Shipping Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
(DIN 43650))
Det Norske Veritas
 IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
Other data
Germanischer Lloyd
 Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
 Bureau Veritas Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and
E 18.325.2/11.13

1)

27
HDA 4 1 4 X – A – XXXX – S00 – X 1
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Pin HDA 4145-A
Pressure ranges in bar 1 Signal+

01.0; 02.5 2 Signal-
Modification number 3 n.c.
S00 = With approvals for shipping ^ Housing
3 Seal material (in contact with fluid)
F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils) M12x1
1 = Stainless steel
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found Pin HDA 4146-A
in the Accessories brochure. 1 Signal+
2 n.c.
3 Signal-
4 n.c.
4
Dimensions:
5 profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

6 3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn.
4 pole
Note:
hex.-SW27
described.
elastomer
E 18.325.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
28
Transmitter
HDA 7446
3
HDA 7400 combines excellent Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
technical specifications with a highly Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
compact design. Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
The HDA 7446 was specifically Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
developed for OEM applications e.g. Torque value 20 Nm
in mobile applications. Seal: FPM
A strain gauge sensor cell is the
Output data
basis for a robust, long-life pressure
transmitter. RLmax. = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
Various pressure ranges between 0 ..10 V, 3 conductor
0 .. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar provide RLmin. = 2 kW
versatility when adapting to particular Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
applications. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
For integration into modern controls (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
(e.g. with PLC), the analogue output Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
signals 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10V are also Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
available on the standard version.
Other output signals are available on Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
request. to DIN 16086
Special features: Rise time ≤ 2 ms
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
 Highly robust sensor cell Environmental conditions
 Very compact design
Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C /-25 ... +85 °C
 Very small temperature error Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
 Excellent EMC characteristics Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Excellent durability -mark2) Certificate No. E318391
Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g 6
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (for M12x1, when an IP 67
connector is used)
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 60 g
E 18.326.2/11.13

1)
2)
29
HDA 7 4 4 6 – X – XXX – 000
M12x1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2
Signal
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
Pressure ranges in bar Pin HDA 7446-A HDA 7446-B
040; 060; 100; 250; 400; 600
1 Signal+ +UB
Modification number 2 n.c. n.c.
000 = Standard
3 Signal- 0V
Note: 4 n.c. Signal

3 On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
Accessories:
4
Dimensions:
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
described.
E 18.326.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
30
Electronic 2
HDA 7400
CANopen
3
The HDA 7400 CAN is a digital Input data
pressure transmitter which is used Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
to measure relative pressures in Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
hydraulics and pneumatics. The Burst pressures 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
measured pressure value is digitized Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
and made available to the CAN Torque value 20 Nm
field bus system via the CANopen Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
protocol. The instrument parameters Seal: FPM
can be viewed and configured by the Output data
user via the CANopen object directory Output signal CANopen protocol
using standard CAN software. Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
This pressure transmitter, which is Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
based on the HDA 7400, has a very (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
accurate and robust sensor cell with Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
a thin-film strain gauge on a stainless Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
steel membrane. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
Due to their outstanding temperature Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
and EMC characteristics, together to DIN 16086
4
with their compact dimensions, these Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
instruments can be used in a wide Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
range of applications in the mobile Rise time ≤ 2 ms
and industrial sectors. Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Special features: Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
 CANopen interface Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C 5
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Robust thin-film cell mark2) Certificate No. E318391
 Excellent EMC characteristics Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Very compact design Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
6
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 60 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and excess voltage protection
are provided.
1)
2)
E 18.367.2/11.13
31
HDA 7 4 4 8 – K – XXXX – 000
M12x1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2 4 3
Electrical connection 5
(connector not supplied) 1 2
Signal
K = CANopen
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 Pin Signal Description
Modification number 1 Housing shield/housing
000 = Standard (Baud Rate: 250k Node Id: 1) 2 +UB supply +
Note: 3 0V supply -
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or 4 CAN_H bus line dominant high
the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
3 5 CAN_L bus line dominant low
Accessories: Configuration corresp. to CIA-DR-303-1
Protocol data for CANopen:

Communication profile CiA DS 301 V4.2
Device profile CiA DS 404 V1.3
Layer setting services and protocol CiA DSP 305 V2.2
Automatic bit-rate detection CiA AN 801
Baud rates 10 kbit .. 1 Mbit corresp. to DS305 V2.2
Transmission services
- PDO Measured value as 16/32 bit, float status
- Transfer synchronous, asynchronous, cyclical, measured
4 value change, exceeding boundaries
Node ID/Baud rate Can be set via Manufacturer Specific Profile
Dimensions:
Note:
hex.-SW27 The information in this brochure relates to
elastomer
profile seal ring described.
DIN3869 For applications or operating conditions
E 18.367.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
32
Electronic 2
HDA 3800
for Iron & Steel Works Applications
3
This high-precision pressure Input data
transmitter was specially developed Measurement ranges1) 16; 60; 100; 150; 250; 300; 350;
and adapted for the sophisticated 400; 500; 600 bar
measurement demands of steelworks Overload pressures 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900; 900;
technology. 900; 900; 1000 bar
The instrument has a very robust Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 2000;
sensor cell with a thin-film strain 2000; 2000; 2000 bar
gauge on a stainless steel membrane. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
Its outstanding specifications G1/2 A DIN 3852
in respect of temperature effect Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4 A)
(temperature drift for zero point and 45 Nm (G1/2 A)
range are in each case max. Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C) and accuracy Seal: FPM (G1/4 A)
NBR O-ring (G1/2 A)
(≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.) make it ideally
suited for use in the environmental Output data
conditions found in steelworks. Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
The excellent EMC characteristics 0 .. 20 mA, (3 conductor rising)
guarantee signal stability during the 4
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
harshest high-frequency, electro- Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
magnetic interference. Max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.15 % FS max.
Special features: Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.005 % FS / °C typ.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ. Zero point ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C max.
 Specially designed for use in Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.005 % FS / °C typ.
steelworks and rolling mills Over range ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C max. 5
 Highly robust sensor cell Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.
to DIN 16086 (from 100 bar ≤ ± 0.15 % FS max.)
 Excellent EMC characteristics Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
 Excellent long term stability Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
6
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 68
Other data
Supply voltage 2 conductor 10 .. 30 V DC
Supply voltage 3 conductor 12 .. 30 V DC
Current consumption 3 conductor approx. 25 mA
E 18.304.5/11.13

Weight ~ 210 g
1)
Other measuring ranges on request
2)
-25 °C with FPM seal, -40 °C on request 33
Model code: Cable assignment:
HDA 3 8 X 0 – X – XXX – 124 (XXM) Core HDA HDA
38X0-A 38X0-E
0 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male) black n.c. +UB
2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male) brown Signal+ Signal
Electrical connection blue Signal- 0V
0 = Flying lead
Signal Cable type:
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Ölflon cable 3 x 0.75 mm2 shielded.
E = 0 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor Outer sheath FEP black
Outer diameter 5.9 ± 0.15mm
016; 060; 100; 150; 250; 300; 350; 400; 500; 600
Modification number
124 = Iron & steel works
Cable length in metres
06; 10; 15
3
Note:
4
Dimensions:
length as per
model code
cable gland
PG 7
hex.-SW27
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 described.
hex.- For applications or operating conditions
SW27 not described, please contact the relevant
E 18.304.5/11.13

elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
34
E 18.304.5/11.13
35
6
5
4
3
2
Electronic Pressure Switches
Electronic pressure switches for general applications: Electronic pressure switches offer a
Page multitude of advantages in comparison
EDS 3400 37 to mechanical pressure switches and
EDS 3400 Menu navigation according to VDMA 41 contact pressure gauges.
EDS 3400 IO-Link 43 Their superiority is shown through
EDS 3300 45 greater accuracy, freedom from wear,
EDS 3300 Menu navigation according to VDMA 49 long-term stability, simpler operation and
EDS 3300 IO-Link 51 the high number of switching cycles,
EDS 3100 53 among other things.
EDS 3100 Menu navigation according to VDMA 57
EDS 3100 IO-Link 59
EDS 300 61
EDS 300 Approvals for shipping 65
EDS 8000 67
EDS 601 69
EDS 1700 71
EDS 4400 Programmable 73
3 EDS 4300 Programmable 75
EDS 820 IO-Link 77
Further electronic pressure switches for special applications can be found in the Sections
"Pressure Sensors with Flush Membrane", "Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmosphe-
res" and "OEM Products for Large Volume Production" .
EDS 3400
EDS 3300
EDS 3100
EDS 8000
EDS 1700
EDS 4400
EDS 4300
EDS 4100
EDS 300
EDS 601
EDS 820
EDS 810
EDS 710
EDS 410
Electronic
Pressure Switches
Accuracy (max. error) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Low pressure (up to 40 bar) ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
High pressure (from 40 bar) ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Relative pressure ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Absolute pressure ü ü
Number of switching outputs 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
Analogue output ü ü ü ü ü ü
Digital display ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Programmable ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Factory-set
(not field-adjustable) ü ü ü ü ü ü
DESINA-compliant ü ü ü
VDMA Menu Navigation ü ü ü ü
Available as individual units ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
OEM product for large
volume production ü ü ü ü ü ü
Flush membrane ü ü
IO Link Interface ü ü ü ü
ECE type authorisation
(approved for road vehicles) ü
Approval for potentially
explosive atmospheres ü ü ü
E 180.000.2 /11.13
Approvals for Shipping ü

UL Approval ü ü ü ü ü
Note: Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data sheet.
36
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
3
The EDS 3400 is a compact electronic Input data
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
digital display for relative pressure Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000; bar
measurement in the high-pressure Burst pressures 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
range. The instrument has a stainless Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
steel measurement cell with thin-film Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
strain gauge. The instrument can have Torque value 20 Nm
one or two switching outputs and there Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
is the option of an additional switchable Seal: FPM (G1/4 A DIN 3852)
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA Output data
or 0 .. 10 V). Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
A special design feature of the Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
(display, analogue output)
EDS 3400 is that the display can be
Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
moved in two planes. The device can be
Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
installed in almost any position and the ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
display can be turned to the optimum Analogue output (optional)
position without the usual additional Signal selectable:
expense of a mechanical adapter. The 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 W
4-digit display can indicate the pressure 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
in bar, psi or MPa. Switch outputs
The user can select the particular Type PNP transistor output
unit of measurement. When changing Switching current max. 1.2 A
to a different measurement unit, the Switching cycles > 100 million
instrument automatically converts all Reaction time < 10 ms
the switching settings to the new unit of Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
measurement. In addition, the DESINA® diagnostic signal (Pin 2)
EDS 3400 is also available in a Function OK: HIGH level / not OK: LOW level
DESINA®-compliant version. Level HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
The main applications of the Environmental conditions
EDS 3400 are primarily in hydraulics Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
and pneumatics, as well as in Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
refrigeration and air conditioning Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
technology. Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Special features: mark1) Certificate No. E318391
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Optional switchable analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
 4-digit digital display Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
 Optimum alignment - can be 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
rotated in two planes (axes) for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
 Measured value can be displayed in UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
bar, psi or MPa Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
 User-friendly due to key max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
programming max. 55 mA with inactive switching outputs
and analogue output
 Switching points and switch-back
hystereses can be adjusted Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
height of digits 7 mm
E 18.060.3/11.13
independently
Weight ~ 120 g
 Many useful additional functions
Note: Excess voltage, override protection and short circuit protection are provided.
 Optional Desina®-compliant pin FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measurement range
configuration with diagnostic 1)
function
37
Setting options: Model code:
All settings available on the EDS 3400 are
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 4 X X – X – XXXX – 000
In order to prevent unauthorised
adjustment of the device, a programming Mechanical connection
lock can be set. 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
Setting ranges for the switch

outputs: 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Switching point function only possible on output models "1", "2" and "3"
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
range point ment* only possible on output model "5"
in bar in bar in bar in bar
0 .. 40 0.6 .. 40 0.2 .. 39.6 0.1
Output
0 .. 100 1.6 .. 100 0.6 .. 99.0 0.2 1 = 1 switching output
0 .. 250 4.0 .. 250 1.5 .. 247.5 0.5 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
2 = 2 switching outputs
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 400 2.0 .. 396 1
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
0 .. 600 9.0 .. 600 3.0 .. 594 1 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
3 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
Window function 5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
Meas. Lower Upper Incre-
range switch switch ment*
value value Pressure ranges in bar
in bar in bar in bar in bar 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
0 .. 40 0.6 .. 39.2 0.9 .. 39.6 0.1
0 .. 100 1.6 .. 98.2 2.4 .. 99 0.2 Modification number
0 .. 250 4.0 .. 245.5 6.0 .. 247.5 0.5 000 = Standard
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 392 9.0 .. 396 1
0 .. 600 9.0 .. 589 14 .. 594 1
* All ranges given in the table Model code:
are adjustable by the increments DESINA®-compliant or
shown. can be connected to DESINA®:
Additional functions:
 Switching mode of the switching outputs EDS 3 4 X 8 – X – XXXX – D00
adjustable (switching point function or
window function) Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
 Switching direction of the switching
outputs adjustable (N/C or 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
N/O function)
 Switch-on and switch-off delay Electrical connection
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
 Choice of display (actual pressure,
peak value, switch point 1, Output
switch point 2, display off)
1 = 1 switching output
 Display filter for smoothing the display 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
value during pressure pulsations
 Optional analogue output signal
selectable 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V Pressure ranges in bar
 Pressure can be displayed in 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
the measurement units bar, psi, MPa.
The scaling can also be adapted to
indicate force, weight, etc. Modification number
D00 = DESINA®-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics
EDS 3400 for self diagnostics:
The DESINA®-compliant pressure

switch has been specially developed
for customers in the machine tool and
mechanical engineering sectors and Note:
complies with the DESINA® specification. For instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
detected and an "ERROR" message also
E 18.060.3/11.13
appears in the display. The electrical

connection is a round 5-pole M12x1 Accessories:
to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA® Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
requirements. guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
38
Dimensions: Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270°
Pin EDS EDS EDS

34X6-1 34X6-2 34X6-3
housing 1 +UB +UB +UB
turns thru
340° 2 n.c. SP 2 Analogue
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1 3
hex. SW27
M12x1, 5 pole
Elastomer profile gasket 4 3

5
DIN 3869
1 2
Pin EDS
male electr. conn. M12x1
4 pole/5 pole 34X8-5
1 +UB
2 Analogue
3 0V
4 SP 1
5 SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
DESINA®- Can be
compliant connected to
DESINA®
Pin EDS EDS
34X8-1 34X8-3
1 +UB +UB
2 Diagnostics Diagnostics
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
5 n.c. Analogue
Note:
E 18.060.3/11.13
applications described. HYDAC electronic GmbH

For applications or operating conditions Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
not described, please contact the relevant Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
technical department. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Subject to technical modifications. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
39
3
40
E 18.060.3/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with Menu Navigation to VDMA
3
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
digital display for relative pressure Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
measurement in the high-pressure Burst pressure 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
range. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
The device has a stainless steel Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
measurement cell with thin-film strain Torque value 20 Nm
gauge. Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
The device can have one or two Sensor cell: Stainless steel
switching outputs, and there is the Seal: FPM
option of an additional switchable Output data
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
or 0 .. 10 V). Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
A special design feature of the (display, analogue output)
EDS 3400 is that the display can be
moved in two planes. The unit can ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
be installed in almost any mounting Analogue output (optional)
position and the display can be turned
Signal selectable:
to the optimum position without 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 W
the usual additional expense of a 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
mechanical adapter. The 4-digit display Switch outputs
can indicate the pressure in bar, psi or Type PNP transistor output
MPa. The user can select the individual Switching current max. 1.2 A
measurement unit. When changing to a Switching cycles > 100 million
different measurement unit, the Reaction time < 10 ms
EDS 3400 automatically converts all Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
the switching settings to the new unit of
measurement.
The main applications of the Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
EDS 3400 are primarily in hydraulics Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
and pneumatics, as well as in Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
refrigeration and air conditioning mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
technology. mark1) Certificate No. E318391
Special features: Vibration resistance to
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
≤ 10 g
 Menu navigation according to VDMA
Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Other data
 Optional analogue output selectable Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
 4-digit digital display 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
 Rotation in two planes (axes) UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
for optimum alignment Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
 Measured value can be displayed in max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
max. 55 mA with inactive switching outputs
bar, psi or MPa and analogue output
 User-friendly due to key programming Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
 Switching points and switch-back height of digits 7 mm
hystereses can be adjusted
E 18.368.1/11.13
Weight ~ 120 g
independently
 Many useful additional functions FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
41
All terms and symbols used for setting the
EDS 3400 as well as the menu structure EDS 3 4 X 6 – X – XXXX – V00
comply with the specifications in the
VDMA Standard (VDMA 24574-1) for Mechanical connection
pressure switches. 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
The EDS 3400 can easily be adjusted via Electrical connection
three buttons. 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Output
Setting ranges for the switch 1 = 1 switching output
outputs: 2 = 2 switching outputs
3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
Measuring Lower Upper limit of Pressure ranges in bar
range limit of SP / FH 040;100; 250; 400; 600
RP / FL
Modification number
in bar in bar in bar
V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard Sheet 24574)
0 .. 40 0.4 40.0
0 .. 100 1.0 100.0
Notes:
0 .. 250 2.5 250.0
0 .. 400 4 400
3 technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
0 .. 600 6 600
Accessories:
Measuring Min. difference Incre- Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
range betw. ment* guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
RP and SP
in bar & FL and FH in bar
0 .. 40 0.4 0.1
0 .. 100 1.0 0.2
0 .. 250 2.5 0.5
0 .. 400 4 1
0 .. 600 6 1 Dimensions:
* All ranges given in the table
are adjustable by the increments
shown.
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point
FL = pressure window lower value display
turns thru
FH = pressure window upper value 270°
 Switching mode of the switching outputs
window function)
housing
 Switching direction of the switching turns thru
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) 340°
 Switch-on and switch-off delay

adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds
 Analogue output signal selectable
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
 Pressure can be displayed in hex-SW27
measurement units bar, psi, MPa.
indicate force, weight, etc.
elastomer profile gasket
Pin connections: DIN 3869
M12x1, 4 pole

4 pole
Pin EDS EDS EDS

34X6-1 34X6-2 34X6-3
Note:
1 +UB +UB +UB
E 18.368.1/11.13
2 n.c. SP 2 Analogue HYDAC electronic GmbH

applications described. Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
3 0V 0V 0V For applications and operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1
technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
42
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with IO-Link Interface
3
The EDS 3400 with IO-Link Input data
communication interface is a compact Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
electronic pressure switch with Overload range 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
integrated digital display for relative Burst pressures 200; 500; 1000; 2000, 2000 bar
pressure measurement in the high- Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
pressure range. Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
The device is equipped with a switching Torque value 20 Nm
output and additional output that can be Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
configured as switching or analogue Sensor cell: Stainless steel
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Seal: FPM
Compared with the standard version, Output data
the IO-Link interface enables Output signals Output 1: PNP Transistor switching output
bidirectional communication between Output 2: can be configured as PNP transistor
the device and the control. switching output or analogue output
Parameterisation and cyclical Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
transmission of process and service Max. setting (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
data is therefore possible. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
The pressure switch series EDS 3400 Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
with communication interface IO-Link
Analogue output
according to specification V1.1 has
been specially designed for connecting Signal selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 Ω
0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kΩ
sensors in automation systems.
Switch outputs
Typical fields of application are
machine tools, handling and assembly Type PNP transistor switching output
automation, intralogistics or the Switching current max. 250 mA per output
packaging industry. Switching cycles > 100 million
Reaction time < 10 ms
Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Special features: Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
 1 PNP transistor switching output programming device HPG 3000 or push
 1 universal output, configurable buttons on the EDS 3400
as PNP transistor switching output or Environmental conditions
analogue output Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 4-digit digital display
Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Optimum alignment: can be rotated in - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
two axes Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
Current consumption ≤ 0.535 A with active switching outputs
≤ 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
≤ 55 mA with inactive switching output
and analogue output
E 18.368.1.0/11.13
Display 4-digit, LED, 7-segment, red,

Weight ~ 120 g
43
Setting options: IO-Link-specific data:
EDS 3400 as well as the menu structure Baud rate 38.4 kBaud *
comply with the specifications in the Cycle time 2.5 ms
VDMA Standard for pressure switches. Process data width 16 Bit
Frame type 2.2
Setting ranges for the switch Specification V1.1
outputs: *C
onnection with unshielded standard sensor line possible
up to a max. line length of 20 m.
Measuring Lower limit of Upper limit of Download the IO Device Description (IODD) from:
range RP / FL SP / FH http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
0 .. 40 0.4 40.0
0 .. 100 1.0 100.0 Model code:
0 .. 250 2.5 250.0
0 .. 400 4 400
EDS 3 4 X 6 – L – XXXX – 000
0 .. 600 6 600 Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Measuring Min. difference Incre-
range betw. ment* Electrical connection
3 RP and SP 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
in bar & FL and FH in bar (connector not supplied)
0 .. 40 0.4 0.1 Output
0 .. 100 1.0 0.2 L = IO Link Interface
0 .. 250 2.5 0.5 Pressure ranges in bar
0 .. 400 4 1 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
0 .. 600 6 1 Modification number
000 = Standard
* All ranges given in the table are
adjustable by the increments shown.
SP = switch point Notes:
RP = switch-back point On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
FL = pressure window lower value technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
FH = pressure window upper value Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
Additional functions: guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) Dimensions: Ø 42
25.5 40.4
M12x1 11
 Analogue output signal selectable: display turns
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V thru 270°
 Pressure can be displayed in

16.1
bar, psi, MPa.

91.5
Pin connections:
64
75
housing turns
thru 340°
2 +0.1
M12x1, 4 pole
12
L+ hex. SW27
IO-Link G1/4 A DIN 3852-E
Ø 18.9 -0.2 16.1
1 C/Q
2 4 Ø 29.5
3
Elastomer profile gasket
DIN 3869
L- Standard IO Ø 53.5
I/Q

1 L+ Supply voltage male elect. conn. M12x1
4 pole
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) /
analogue output
3 L- Gnd
4 C/Q IO-Link communication /
Note:
switching output (SP1) The information in this brochure relates to
E 18.368.1.0/11.13

For applications or operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
44
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300
3
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges -1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
digital display for relative pressure Overload pressures 3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
measurement in the low-pressure Burst pressures 5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
range. It has a ceramic measuring Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
cell with thick-film strain gauge. The G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
instrument can have one or two
Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4)
switching outputs, and there is the 45 Nm (G1/2)
option of an additional switchable Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA or Sensor cell: Ceramic
0 .. 10 V). A special design feature of Seal: copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
the EDS 3300 is that the display can (as per model code)
be moved in two planes (axes). The Output data
instrument can be installed in almost Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
any mounting position and the display (display, analogue output)
can be turned to the optimum position Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
without the usual additional expense Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
of a mechanical adapter. The 4-digit ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
display can indicate the pressure in bar, Analogue output (optional)
psi or MPa. The user can select the Signal selectable:
particular unit of measurement. When 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 W
changing to a different measurement 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
unit, the instrument automatically Switch outputs
converts all the switching settings to the Type PNP transistor output
new unit of measurement. In addition, Switching current max. 1.2 A
the EDS 3300 is also available in a Switching cycles > 100 million
DESINA®-compliant version.
The main applications of the EDS 3300 are
DESINA® diagnostic signal (Pin 2)
primarily in hydraulics and pneumatics,
Function OK: HIGH level / not OK: LOW level
as well as in refrigeration and air Level HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
conditioning technology. Environmental conditions
Special features: Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
outputs, up to 1.2 A load Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
per output Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS
 Optional switchable Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 4-digit digital display Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Optimum alignment - can be rotated Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
in two axes Other data
 Measured value can be displayed in Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
bar, psi or MPa 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
 User-friendly due to key for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
programming UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
 Switching points and switch-back Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
hystereses can be adjusted max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
independently max. 55 mA with inactive switching outputs
E 18.068.2/11.13
and analogue output

Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
 Optional Desina®-compliant height of digits 7 mm
pin configuration with Weight ~ 120 g
diagnostic function
Note: Excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
All settings offered by the EDS 3300 are
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 3 X X – X – XXXX – 000 – X 1
lock can be set. 1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Setting ranges for the switch 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
outputs: Electrical connection
Switching point function 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
only possible on output models "1", "2" and "3"
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre-
range point ment* 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
in bar in bar in bar in bar only possible on output model "5"
Output
-1 .. 1 -0.97 .. 1 -0.99 .. 0.98 0.01 1 = 1 switching output
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.5 0.015 .. 2.475 0.005
0 .. 6 0.09 .. 6 0.3 .. 5.94 0.01 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
3 5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
0 .. 16 0.25 .. 16 0.1 .. 15.8 0.05
Window function Pressure ranges in bar

0001 (-1 .. 1); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
range switch value switch value ment* Modification number
in bar in bar in bar in bar 000 = Standard
-1 .. 1 -0.97 .. 0.96 -0.95 .. 0.98 0.01 Seal material (in contact with fluid)
0 .. 1 0.016 .. 0.982 0.024.. 0.99 0.002 F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water, refrigerants)
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.455 0.06 .. 2.475 0.005
0 .. 6 0.09 .. 5.89 0.14 .. 5.94 0.01 Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
1 = Stainless steel
0 .. 10 0.16 .. 9.82 0.24 .. 9.9 0.02
0 .. 16 0.25 .. 15.7 0.4 .. 15.8 0.05
* All ranges given in the table are adjustable by
the increments shown.
Model code:
Additional functions: DESINA®-compliant or
adjustable (switching point function or can be connected to DESINA®:
window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O EDS 3 3 X X – X – XXXX – D00 – X 1
function)
 Switch-on and switch-off delay Mechanical connection
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds 1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
 Choice of display (actual pressure, 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
peak value, switch point 1, switch point 2, 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
display off) Electrical connection
 Display filter for smoothing the display 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
 Analogue output signal selectable Output
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V 1 = 1 switching output
the measurement units bar, psi, MPa. Pressure ranges in bar
The scaling can also be adapted to 0001 (-1 .. 1); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
Modification number
EDS 3300 for self diagnostics: D00 = DESINA®-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics
E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water, refrigerants)
switch has been specially developed Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
for customers in the machine tool and 1 = Stainless steel
mechanical engineering sectors and
complies with the DESINA® specification.
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be Note:
detected and an "ERROR" message also On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
appears in the display. The electrical technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
E 18.068.2/11.13
connection is a round 5-pole M12x1 Accessories:

to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA® Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
requirements. guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
46
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270°
Pin EDS EDS EDS

33X6-1 33X6-2 33X6-3
turns thru
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1 3
hex. SW27
G1/2 B M12x1, 5 pole

DIN EN 837
flat seal ring Cu
Elastomer profile gasket 4 3
5
DIN 3869
1 2
Pin EDS
1 +UB
2 Analogue
3 0V
4 SP 1
5 SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
DESINA®- Can be
DESINA®
Pin EDS EDS
33X8-1 33X8-3
1 +UB +UB
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
5 n.c. Analogue
Note:
E 18.068.2/11.13

47
3
48
E 18.068.2/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300
3
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges -1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
digital display for relative pressure Overload pressures 3; 3; 8, 18, 30, 48 bar
measurement in the low-pressure Burst pressures 5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
It has a ceramic measuring cell with Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
thick-film strain gauge. The instrument Torque value 20 Nm
can have one or two switching outputs, Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
and there is the option of an additional Sensor cell: Ceramic
switchable analogue output signal Seal: FPM / EPDM
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). (as per model code)
A special design feature of the Output data
EDS 3300 is that the display can be Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
rotated in two planes. The unit can Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
be installed in almost any mounting (display, analogue output)
position and the display can be turned Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
to the optimum position without Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
the usual additional expense of a ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
mechanical adapter. The 4-digit display Analogue output (optional)
can indicate the pressure in bar, psi or Signal selectable:
MPa. The user can select the particular 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 W
measurement unit. When changing to a 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
different measurement unit, the Switch outputs
EDS 3300 automatically converts all Type PNP transistor output
the switching settings to the new unit of Switching current max. 1.2 A
measurement. Switching cycles > 100 million
The main applications of the Reaction time < 10 ms
EDS 3300 are primarily in hydraulics Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
and pneumatics, as well as in Environmental conditions
refrigeration and air conditioning Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
technology. Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 ... +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
Special features: Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching mark1) Certificate No. E318391
outputs, up to 1.2 A load
per output DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Optional analogue output selectable DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
 4-digit digital display Other data
 Optimum alignment - can be Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
rotated in two planes (axes) 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
 Measured value can be displayed in 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
bar, psi or MPa UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
 User-friendly due to Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
key programming max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
 Switching points and switch-back max. 55 mA with inactive switching outputs
hystereses can be adjusted and analogue output
E 18.369.2/11.13
independently Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,

 Many useful additional functions height of digits 7 mm
Weight ~ 120 g
1)
EDS 3300 as well as the menu structure EDS 3 3 X 6 – X – XXXX – V00 – X 1
The EDS 3300 can easily be adjusted via 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
three buttons. Electrical connection
Output
outputs: 1 = 1 switching output
Measuring Lower Upper limit of 2 = 2 switching outputs
range limit of SP / FH 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
RP / FL Pressure ranges in bar
0001 (-1 .. 1 bar); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
-1.. 1 -0.9 8 1. 00
Modification number
0 .. 1 0.0 10 1. 000 V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard Sheet 24574)
0 .. 2.5 0.0 25 2. 500
0 .. 6 0.0 6 6. 00 F = FPM seal (e.g. for hydraulic oils)
0 .. 10 0.1 0 10. 00 E = EPDM seal (e.g. for water, refrigerants)
0 .. 16 0.2 0 16. 00 Connection material (in contact with fluid)
3
1 = Stainless steel
Measuring Min. difference Incre- Notes:
range betw. ment* On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
RP and SP technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
- 1 .. 1 0.02 0.01
0 .. 1 0.010 0.002
guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
0 .. 2.5 0.025 0.005
0 .. 6 0.06 0.01
0 .. 10 0.10 0.02
0 .. 16 0.20 0.05 Dimensions:
shown.
SP = switch point
FL = pressure window lower value display
FH = pressure window upper value turns thru
270°
window function)
housing

4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
hex-SW27
DIN 3869
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole

4 pole
Pin EDS EDS EDS Note:

33X6-1 33X6-2 33X6-3 The information in this brochure relates to
E 18.369.2/11.13
1 +UB +UB +UB HYDAC electronic GmbH

2 n.c. SP 2 Analogue For applications and operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
3 0V 0V 0V not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1 Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
50
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300
3
communication interface is a compact Measuring ranges -1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
electronic pressure switch with Overload range 3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
integrated digital display for relative Burst pressures 5; 5; 12; 30; 50; 80 bar
pressure measurement in the low- Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
The device is equipped with a switching Torque value 20 Nm
output and additional output that can be Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
configured as switching or analogue Sensor cell: Ceramic
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Seal: FPM / EPDM (as per model code)
the IO-Link interface enables Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
Analogue output
Switch outputs
 IO Link Interface programming device HPG 3000 or push
 1 PNP transistor switching output buttons on the EDS 3300
 Additional signal output,
can be configured as PNP transistor
switching output or analogue output Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 4-digit digital display - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Display can be rotated in two axes for Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
optimal alignment DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
and analogue output
E 18.369.1.0/11.13

Weight ~ 120 g
51
All terms and symbols used for setting the Baud rate 38.4 kBaud *
EDS 3300 as well as the menu structure Cycle time 2.5 ms
comply with the specifications in the Process data width 16 Bit
VDMA Standard for pressure switches. Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
Setting ranges for the switch *C
outputs: up to a max. line length of 20 m.
Download the IO Device Description (IODD) from:
Measuring Lower limit of Upper limit of http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
range RP / FL SP / FH
in bar in bar in bar Model code:
- 1 .. 1 -0.98 1.00
0 .. 1 0.010 1.000 EDS 3 3 X 6 – L – XXXX – 000 – X 1
0 .. 2.5 0.025 2.500
0 .. 6 0.06 6.00
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
0 .. 10 0.10 10.00 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
0 .. 16 0.20 16.00
Measuring Min. difference Incre- (connector not supplied)
3 range betw. ment* Output
RP and SP
L = IO Link Interface
- 1 .. 1 0.02 0.01 Pressure ranges in bar
0 .. 1 0.010 0.002 0001 (-1 .. 1 bar); 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0 .. 2.5 0.025 0.005 Modification number
0 .. 6 0.06 0.01 000 = Standard
0 .. 10 0.10 0.02 Seal material (in contact with fluid)
0 .. 16 0.20 0.05 F = FPM seal (e.g. for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g. for water, refrigerants)
adjustable by the increments shown. Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
SP = switch point 1 = Stainless steel
RP = switch-back point Notes:
FL = pressure window lower value On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
FH = pressure window upper value technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Additional functions: Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
 Switching mode of the switching outputs guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) Dimensions: Ø 42
25.5 40.4
M12x1 11
 Analogue output signal selectable to display turns
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V thru 270°
13
13
 Pressure can be displayed in bar, psi, G1/4 DIN 3852

16.1
Ø 20
MPa.
91.5
Pin connections:
75
64
housing turns
thru 340°
2 +0.1
M12x1, 4 pole
12
L+ hex. SW27
IO-Link
G1/4 A DIN 3852-E
1 C/Q Ø 18.9 -0.2 16.1
2 4 Ø 29.5
3
Elastomer profile gasket
L- Standard IO DIN 3869
Ø 53.5
I/Q

1 L+ Supply voltage male elect. conn. M12x1
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / 4 pole
analogue output
3 L- Gnd Note:
4 C/Q IO-Link communication / The information in this brochure relates to
E 18.369.1.0/11.13
switching output (SP1) the operating conditions and

52
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100
3
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
digital display for absolute pressure Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
measurement in the low-pressure Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
range. It has a ceramic measuring Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
cell with thick-film strain gauge. The G1/2 B DIN-EN 837
instrument can have one or two Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
switching outputs, and there is the Torque value 20 Nm (G1/4)
45 Nm (G1/2)
option of an additional switchable
analogue output signal (4 .. 20 mA or Sensor cell: Ceramic
0 .. 10 V). Seal: copper (G1/2) / FPM / EPDM
A special design feature of the (as per model code)
EDS 3100 is that the display can be Output data
rotated in two planes. The instrument Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
can be installed in almost any mounting Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
position and the display can be turned (display, analogue output)
to the optimum position without
unit of measurement. When changing 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
to a different measurement unit, the Switch outputs
instrument automatically converts all Type PNP transistor output
measurement. In addition, the EDS 3100 is Switching cycles > 100 million
also available in a DESINA® -compliant Reaction time < 10 ms
version. Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
The main applications of the DESINA® diagnostic signal (Pin 2)
EDS 3100 are primarily in hydraulics Function OK: HIGH level / not OK: LOW level
and pneumatics, as well as in Level HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
refrigeration and air conditioning Environmental conditions
technology. Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS mark1) Certificate No. E318391
 Optional switchable Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 4-digit digital display DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Optimum alignment - can be rotated Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
in two axes Other data
 User-friendly due to key programming 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
 Switching points and switch- UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
back hystereses can be adjusted Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
independently max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
E 18.069.1/11.13
 Many useful additional functions and analogue output

 Optional Desina®-compliant pin Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
configuration with diagnostic height of digits 7 mm
function Weight ~ 120 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measurement range
1)
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 1 X X – X – XXXX – 000 – X 1
lock can be set. 1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Setting ranges for the switch 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
outputs: Electrical connection
Switching point function only possible on output models "1", "2" and "3"
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
in bar in bar in bar in bar Output
0 .. 1 0.016 .. 1 0.006 .. 0.99 0.002 1 = 1 switching output
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.5 0.015 .. 2.475 0.005 2 = 2 switching outputs
Window function 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
range switch value switch value ment*
5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
3 in bar in bar in bar in bar only in conjunction with electrical connection type "8"
0 .. 1 0.016 .. 0.982 0.024 .. 0.99 0.002
01.0; 02.5
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.455 0.06 .. 2.475 0.005
Modification number
* All ranges given in the table 000 = Standard
are adjustable by the increments Seal material (in contact with fluid)
shown. F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
Additional functions: E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water, refrigerants)
 Switching mode of the switching outputs Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
adjustable (switching point function or 1 = Stainless steel
window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function)
Model code:
 Choice of display (actual pressure, DESINA®-compliant or
peak value, switch point 1, can be connected to DESINA®:
 Display filter for smoothing the display
value during pressure pulsations EDS 3 1 X 8 – X – XXXX – D00 – X 1
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V Mechanical connection
1 = G1/2 B DIN-EN 837 (male)
 Pressure can be displayed in 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
measurement units bar, psi, MPa. 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
indicate force, weight, etc. Electrical connection
Output
EDS 3100 for self diagnostics: 1 = 1 switching output
01.0; 02.5
switch has been specially developed Modification number
for customers in the machine tool and D00 = DESINA®-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics
mechanical engineering sectors and Seal material (in contact with fluid)
complies with the DESINA® specification. F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water, refrigerants)
detected and an "ERROR" message also Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
appears in the display. The electrical 1 = Stainless steel
connection is a round 5-pole M12x1
to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA®
requirements.
Note:
For instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
Accessories:
E 18.069.1/11.13

54
M12x1, 4 pole
display
turns thru
270°
Pin EDS EDS EDS

31X6-1 31X6-2 31X6-3
turns thru
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1 3
hex. SW27
M12x1, 5 pole
G1/2 B
DIN EN 837
flat seal ring Cu
4 3
Elastomer profile gasket 5
DIN 3869
1 2
Pin EDS
1 +UB
2 Analogue
3 0V
4 SP 1
5 SP 2
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
DESINA®- Can be
DESINA®
Pin EDS EDS
31X8-1 31X8-3
1 +UB +UB
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
5 n.c. Analogue
Note:
E 18.069.1/11.13

55
3
56
E 18.069.1/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100
3
pressure switch with integrated Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
digital display for absolute pressure Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
measurement in the low-pressure Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
It has a ceramic measuring cell with Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
thick-film strain gauge. The instrument Torque value 20 Nm
can have one or two switching outputs, Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
and there is the option of an additional Sensor cell: Ceramic
switchable analogue output signal Seal: FPM / EPDM
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). (as per model code)
A special design feature of the Output data
EDS 3100 is that the display can be Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
rotated in two planes. The unit can Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
be installed in almost any mounting (display, analogue output)
position and the display can be turned Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
to the optimum position without Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
measurement unit. When changing to a 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
different measurement unit, the Switch outputs
EDS 3100 automatically converts all Type PNP transistor output
measurement. Switching cycles > 100 million
The main applications of the Reaction time < 10 ms
EDS 3100 are primarily in hydraulics Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
and pneumatics, as well as in Environmental conditions
refrigeration and air conditioning Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
technology. Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching mark1) Certificate No. E318391
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Optional analogue output selectable Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 4-digit digital display Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
 Optimum alignment - can be
rotated in two planes (axes) Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
 Measured value can be displayed in for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
bar, psi or MPa 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
 User-friendly due to UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
key programming Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
 Switching points and switch-back max. 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
hystereses can be adjusted max. 55 mA with inactive switching outputs
independently and analogue output
E 18.370.1/11.13
 Many useful additional functions Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,

Weight ~ 120 g
1)
EDS 3100 as well as the menu structure EDS 3 1 X 6 – X – XXXX – V00 – X 1
The EDS 3100 can easily be adjusted via Electrical connection
three buttons. 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Output
Setting ranges for the switch 1 = 1 switching output
outputs: 2 = 2 switching outputs
Measuring Lower Upper limit of Pressure ranges in bar
range limit of SP / FH 01.0; 02.5
RP / FL Modification number
in bar in bar in bar V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard Sheet 24574)
0 .. 1 0.010 1.000 Seal material (in contact with fluid)
0 .. 2.5 0.025 2.500 F = FPM seal (e.g. for hydraulic oils)
E = EPDM seal (e.g. for water, refrigerants)
3 Connection material (in contact with fluid)
Measuring Min. difference Incre- 1 = Stainless steel
range betw. ment*
RP and SP
in bar & FL and FH in bar Notes:
0 .. 1 0.010 0.002 On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
0 .. 2.5 0.025 0.005 Accessories:
* All ranges given in the table Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
are adjustable by the increments shown. guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
SP = switch point
FL = pressure window lower value Dimensions:
FH = pressure window upper value
window function)
display

4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
housing
 Pressure can be displayed in turns thru
340°
Pin connections:
hex-SW27
M12x1, 4 pole

DIN 3869
Pin EDS EDS EDS

31X6-1 31X6-2 31X6-3 4 pole
1 +UB +UB +UB
2 n.c. SP 2 Analogue
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1
Note:
E 18.370.1/11.13

For applications and operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
58
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3100
3
communication interface is a compact Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
electronic pressure switch with Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
integrated digital display for absolute Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
pressure measurement in the low- Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
The instrument is equipped with a Torque value 20 Nm
switching output and additional output Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
that can be configured as switching or Sensor cell: Ceramic
analogue (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Seal: FPM / EPDM (as per model code)
the IO-Link interface enables Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
Analogue output
Switch outputs
 IO Link Interface programming device HPG 3000 or push
 1 PNP transistor switching output buttons on the EDS 3100
 Additional signal output,
switching output or analogue output Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 4-digit digital display - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Can be rotated in two axes for optimal Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
alignment DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Other data
and analogue output
E 18.370.1.0/11.13

Weight ~ 120 g
59
EDS 3100 as well as the menu structure Cycle time 2.5 ms
VDMA Standard for pressure switches. Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
in bar in bar in bar Model code:
0 .. 1 0.010 1.000
0 .. 2.5 0.025 2.500 EDS 3 1 X 6 – L – XXXX – 000 – X 1
Measuring Min. difference Incre- 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
range betw. ment* 9 = Threaded port DIN 3852-G1/4
RP and SP
in bar & FL and FH in bar Electrical connection
0 .. 1 0.010 0.002
0 .. 2.5 0.025 0.005
3 Output
* All ranges given in the table are L = IO Link Interface
adjustable by the increments shown. Pressure ranges in bar
SP = switch point
01.0; 02.5
FL = pressure window lower value Modification number
FH = pressure window upper value 000 = Standard
Additional functions: F = FPM seal (e.g. for hydraulic oils)
 Switching mode of the switching outputs E = EPDM seal (e.g. for water, refrigerants)
adjustable (switching point function or Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
window function) 1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
 Switch-on and switch-off delay technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
 Analogue output signal selectable: Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Pressure can be displayed in bar, psi,
MPa.
Pin connections: Dimensions: Ø 42

25.5 40.4
M12x1 11
M12x1, 4 pole display turns

thru 270°
13
13
L+
G1/4 DIN 3852
IO-Link
16
Ø 20
91.5
1 C/Q
2 4
3
64
75
housing turns
thru 340°
L- Standard IO
2 +0.1
I/Q
12
hex. SW27
G1/4 A DIN 3852-E
Pin Signal Description Ø 18.9 -0.2 16.1
1 L+ Supply voltage Ø 29.5
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / Elastomer profile gasket

analogue output DIN 3869
Ø 53.5
3 L- Gnd
switching output (SP1)

4 pole
Note:
E 18.370.1.0/11.13

60
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 300
3
The EDS 300 is a compact, electronic Input data
pressure switch with integral digital Measuring ranges 16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
display. Overload pressures 32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Four different output models are
Burst pressures 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
available: with one switching point, with
two switching points and both models Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
can also have an additional analogue Torque value 20 Nm
output signal 4 .. 20 mA. Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
The switching points and the associated
Output data
hystereses can be adjusted using the
keypad. For optimum adaptation to a Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
particular application, the instrument Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
has many additional adjustment
parameters, e.g. switching delay times, Repeatability ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
N/O / N/C function of the outputs. Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
The main applications of the
Analogue output (optional)
EDS 300 are to indicate pressures and
Signal 4 .. 20 mA load resistance ≤ 400 W
limits in hydraulics and pneumatics
and anywhere where high switching Switch outputs
frequency or constant switching Type PNP transistor output
accuracy would overburden a Switching current max. 1.2 A per switch output
mechanical pressure switch. The unit is Switching cycles > 100 million
ideal for building accumulator charging Reaction time approx. 10 ms
circuits or pump and compressor Environmental conditions
controls. Compensation temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
 Integrated pressure sensor
with thin-film strain gauge on mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
stainless steel membrane Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
 Compact, robust construction DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 3-digit digital display Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
 Easy to operate thanks to Other data
key programming Supply voltage 20 .. 32 V DC
 Switching points and switch-back Current consumption approx. 100 mA (inactive switch output)
hystereses can be adjusted
height of digits 9.2 mm
 Window function
Weight ~ 300 g
E 18.056.6/11.13
61
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 4 X – X – XXX – 000
Setting ranges for the switch Electrical connection

4 = Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18
outputs: only possible on output models "2" and "3"
Switching point function (connector not supplied)
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- 5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
in bar in bar in bar in bar (connector supplied)
0 .. 16 0.3 .. 16 0.1 .. 15.8 0.1 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
0 .. 40 0.6 .. 40 0.2 .. 39.6 0.2 (connector not supplied)
0 .. 100 1.5 .. 100 0.5 .. 99.0 0.5 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
0 .. 250 3.0 .. 250 1.0 .. 248 1.0 only possible on output model "5"
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 400 2.0 .. 396 2.0
3 0 .. 600 15.0 .. 600 5.0 .. 590 5.0 Output
Window function only in conjunction with electrical connection type "5" or "6"
Meas. Lower Upper Incre- only in conjunction with electrical connection "4" or "6"
range switch value switch ment*
value 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
in bar in bar in bar in bar only in conjunction with electrical connection type "4" or "6"
0 .. 16 0.2 .. 15.9 0.3 .. 16 0.1
0 .. 40 0.4 .. 39.8 0.6 .. 40 0.2
0 .. 100 1.0 .. 99.5 1.5 .. 100 0.5 Pressure ranges in bar
016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
0 .. 250 2.0 .. 249.0 3.0 .. 250 1.0
0 .. 400 4.0 .. 398.0 6.0 .. 400 2.0 Modification number
0 .. 600 10.0 .. 595.0 15.0 .. 600 5.0 000 = Standard
are adjustable by the increments Notes:
shown. Special models on request.
Additional functions: the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
window function)
 Switching direction of the switching Accessories:
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
function) guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Choice of display (actual pressure,
peak value, switch point 1,
4 .. 20 mA
 Subsequent correction of zero point in
the range ± 3 % FS possible
E 18.056.6/11.13
62
male electrical connection

Binder series 714 -4p
profile
gasket
Pin EDS 344-2 EDS 344-3

1 +UB +UB
2 0V 0V
3 SP 1 SP 1
4 SP 2 Analogue
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 3
hex-SW27
Pin EDS 345-1

elastomer 1 +UB
profile gasket
DIN 3869 2 0V
3 SP 1
^ Housing
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin EDS EDS EDS

346-1 346-2 346-3
1 +UB +UB +UB
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
Note: Pin EDS 348-5

The information in this brochure relates to 1 +UB
HYDAC electronic GmbH 2 Analogue
E 18.056.6/11.13
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01 3 0V
technical department. 4 SP 1
Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com 5 SP 2
63
3
64
E 18.056.6/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 300
3
The EDS 300 is a compact, electronic Input data
pressure switch with digital display. The Measuring ranges -1..5; 6; 16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
pressure measurement is based on a
strain gauge sensor cell in stainless Overload pressures 15; 15; 32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
steel. All parts in contact with the Burst pressures 100; 100; 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
medium are in stainless steel, and are Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
welded together. Since no seals are Torque value 20 Nm
required in the sensor interior, leakage Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
is eliminated. Seal: FPM
Two relay switch outputs with N/O Output data
function and an additional analogue
output signal (4 .. 20 mA) enable the
pressure switch to be incorporated into
modern controls.
The switch points and the Repeatability ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
corresponding hystereses can easily be Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
adjusted via the keypad. ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
For optimum adaptation to a particular Analogue output
application, the instrument has many Signal 4 .. 20 mA load resistance ≤ 400 W
additional setting parameters, e.g. Switch outputs
switching direction of the relays or Type relay contacts (N/O)
switching delay times.
Switching voltage max. 60 V AC / DC
Areas of application are pressure or limit Switching current max. 1 A per switch output
monitoring on marine transmissions,
Switching capacity max. 30 W / 30 VA
diesel engines, pumps and general
(for inductive load, use varistors)
hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
Switching cycles 20 million at minimum load
0.5 million at maximum load
Reaction time approx. 10 ms
 American Bureau Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Lloyds Register
 Vibration resistance to 5 .. 25 Hz: 3.2 mm
of Shipping DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz 25 .. 500 Hz: 4 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
Det Norske Veritas
 Other data
Current consumption approx. 100 mA (inactive switch output)
Germanischer Lloyd
 height of digits 9.2 mm
Weight ~ 300 g
 Bureau Veritas FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
E 18.058.5/11.13

65
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 4 7 – 4 – XXX – SXX

7 = Male 6 pole + PE, DIN 43651
outputs: (connector ZBE 10 not supplied)
Switching point function
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- Output
range point ment* 4 = 2 switch outputs and 1 analogue output
-1 .. 5 -0.85 .. 5 -0.95 .. 4.9 0.05 Pressure ranges in bar
006; 016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
0 .. 6 0.15 .. 6 0.05 .. 5.9 0.05
0 .. 16 0.3 .. 16 0.1 .. 15.8 0.1 Modification number
S00 = Version in bar (except -1 .. 5)
0 .. 40 0.6 .. 40 0.2 .. 39.6 0.2
S13 = Vacuum version -1 .. 5 bar (in conjunction with pressure range 006)
0 .. 100 1.5 .. 100 0.5 .. 99.0 0.5
3
0 .. 250 3.0 .. 250 1.0 .. 248 1.0 Notes:
Special models on request.
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 400 2.0 .. 396 2.0
0 .. 600 15.0 .. 600 5.0 .. 590 5.0 the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
are adjustable by the increments Accessories:
shown. Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, clamps
Additional functions: for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Scale of the display range
adjustable (bar or psi)
 Switching direction of the relays
adjustable (N/C or N/O function) Dimensions:
adjustable from 0.0 .. 75.0 seconds Male connection
 Choice of display (actual pressure, DIN 43651
6p +PE
 Subsequent correction of zero point in
the range ± 3 % FS possible
Pin connections:
DIN 43651
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
Pin EDS 347-4
1 +UB
2 Centre relay 1 and 2
3 Relay contact 1 (SP 1)
4 0V
5 Analogue
6 Relay contact 2 (SP 2)
^ Housing
Note:
E 18.058.5/11.13

66
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 8000
3
EDS 8000 is an electronic pressure Input data
switch in compact design which is Measurement range 25; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
simple to adjust.
Models with one or two transistor switch Overload pressures 80; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
outputs (PNP or NPN) are available. Burst pressures 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
The switch points are set using the Mechanical connection G¼ A DIN 3852; Form E
two keys and a four-digit display. Torque value 20 Nm
During operation the switch position Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
is indicated by either a red or a green Sensor cell: Thin-film strain gauge
backlight in the display. Seal: FPM
For optimum adaptation to a particular Output data
application, the instrument has many Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
additional adjustment parameters, Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
e.g. switching delay times, N/O / N/C (display)
function of the outputs. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
EDS 8000 is available in various Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
pressure ranges between 0 .. 25 bar ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
and 0 .. 600 bar. Long-term stability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS / year max.
The main applications of the EDS 8000 Switch outputs
are to indicate pressures and limits Type 1 or 2 transistor switching outputs
in hydraulics and pneumatics, or any PNP or NPN
application where high switching Switching current max. 250 mA per output
frequency or consistent switching Switching cycles > 100 million
accuracy would overburden a Reaction time < 10 ms
mechanical pressure switch.
Compensated temperature range -25 .. + 85 °C
Special features: Ambient temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 °C +100 °C
 Menu navigation according to VDMA Storage temperature range -40 .. + 85 °C
 1 or 2 PNP transistor
Nominal temperature range of display -15 .. 70 °C
switching outputs
(read-out)
 Robust stainless steel measurement mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
cell -mark2) Certificate No. E318391
 Accuracy class ≤ ± 1 % FS Vibration resistance to approx. 10 g
 4-digit display DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
 Multi-colour switch display Shock resistance to approx. 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Protection class IP 67 Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector is used)
 Simple operation with key Other data
programming Supply voltage 9.6 .. 32 V DC
 Many useful additional functions for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption max. 0.535 A total
max. 35 mA (with inactive switch output)
Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment,
Life expectancy > 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 %)
Weight ~ 70 g
E 18.365.2/11.13
1)
2)
67
All the terms and symbols used for setting
the EDS 8000 as well as menu structure EDS 8 4 4 6 - X - XXXX – X00
comply with the specifications of the
German Engineering Federation Standard Mechanical connection
(VDMA 24574-1) for pressure switches. 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
The EDS 8000 is easy and convenient to set Electrical connection
up using the two buttons. 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Output
outputs: 1 = 1 switching output
Meas. Lower Upper 2 = 2 switching outputs
range limit of limit of
RP / FL SP / FH
in bar in bar in bar 0025; 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Modification number
0 .. 25 0.25 25.00
000 = Standard
0 .. 40 0.4 40.0 N00 = Version with NPN switching outputs
0 .. 100 1.0 100.0
0 .. 250 2.5 250.0 Note:
3 0 .. 400 4 400 or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
0 .. 600 6 600
Accessories:
Meas. Min. difference Incre- Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, etc, can
range betw. RP & SP ment* be found in the Accessories brochure.
in bar and FL & FH in bar
0 .. 25 0.25 0.05
0 .. 40 0.4 0.1
0 .. 100 1.0 0.2
0 .. 250 2.5 0.5
0 .. 400 4 1
0 .. 600 6 1
* All ranges given in the table are Dimensions:
SP = Switching point
RP = Switch-back point
FL = Pressure window lower value
FH = Pressure window upper value
male electr. conn. M12x1,
Additional functions: 4 pole
window function)
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O
function)
 Pressure can be displayed in orifice
bar, psi, MPa
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Note:
Pin EDS 8446-1 EDS 8446-2 The information in this brochure relates to
1 +UB +UB the operating conditions and
E 18.365.2/11.13

2 n.c. SP 2 For applications or operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
3 0V 0V not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
4 SP 1 SP 1 Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
68
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 601
3
The EDS 601 is an electronic two- Input data
way pressure switch with display and Measuring ranges 16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
analogue output. Overload pressures 24; 60; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Its digitally adjustable switching points Burst pressures 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
and switching hystereses, make it Mechanical connection Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
ideally suited to applications which Torque value 20 Nm
require frequent change-overs or Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
accurate switch point setting.
Output data
The variety of setting parameters
ensures versatility for use in all control Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
and monitoring tasks in hydraulics, (display, analogue output)
pneumatics, process control and Repeatability ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
general test and control technology. Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.05 % FS / °C max. zero point
≤ ± 0.05 % FS / °C max. range
Special features: Analogue output (optional)
Signal selectable:
 Two-channel pressure switch with 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance ≤ 400 W
change-over contacts 0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance ≥ 2 kW
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Switch outputs
 4-digit LED display Type 2 relay outputs with change-over contacts
 Signal output 4 .. 20 mA or Switching voltage max. 250 V
0 .. 10 V selectable Switching current max. 2 A per switch output
 Can be installed as a pressure gauge Switching capacity max. 50 W / 400 VA
or as a front panel mounted unit Switching cycles 10 million without load
1 million with load
 Digitally adjustable parameters
Reaction time approx. 10 ms including electronics
 Optional permanent display of the Environmental conditions
switching point or of the pressure Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
peak value Operating temperature range -25 .. +70 °C
 Can be set to display values in Storage temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
any unit of measurement e.g.: kN, kg, Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
psi, ...
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
Other data
Current consumption approx. 120 mA
Switch-on current approx. 1.5 A (100 ms)
Connection supply voltage / EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400
analogue output (3 pole + PE)
Connection relay outputs DIN 43651
(6 pole + PE)
E 18.052.6/11.13
Housing material aluminium, anodised

Weight ~ 300 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
69
Setting options: Pin connections: Model code:
The EDS 601 combines a multitude of
functions with easy operation so that EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) EDS 6 0 1 – XXX – 000
frequently-used parameters can be (voltage supply / analogue output)
changed quickly. Pressure ranges in bar
016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
Switch point settings:
 Switching point relay 1 and 2 Modification number
(1 % .. 100 % FS) 000 = Standard
 Switching hysteresis 1 and 2
(0.5 % .. 99 % FS) Note:
Basic settings: Pin Special models on request.
 Switching direction relay 1 and 2 On instruments with a different
1 +UB
(pull-in/release) modification number, please read the
2 0V label or the technical amendment details
 Switching delay relay 1 and 2 supplied with the instrument.
(0.00 .. 90 seconds) 3 Analogue
 Switch-off delay relay 1 and 2 ^ Housing

(0.00 .. 90 seconds) Accessories:
 Primary display Female electrical connectors
DIN 43651 (relay outputs)
(pressure / switch point / peak value) EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) and
3 DIN 43651 are supplied with the unit.
 Display filter (slow / medium / fast) Additional accessories, such as
 Output signal (current / voltage) mechanical adapters, installation kits,
Measuring range setting: etc. can be found in the Accessories
 Number of decimal places brochure.
(0 .. 3; 4 digits in total)
 Lower measuring range limit
(-995 .. 9995) Pin
 Upper measuring range limit
1 Relay 1 N/C
(-995 .. 9995)
2 Relay 1 N/O
Calibration options:
 Zero point of internal sensor 3 Centre relay 1
 Final value of internal sensor 4 Relay 2 N/C
 Zero point voltage output 5 Relay 2 N/O
(approx. 0 .. 3 V) 6 Centre relay 2
 Final value voltage output
PE Housing
(approx. 3.5 .. 10 V)
 Zero point current output
(approx. 0 .. 7 mA)
 Final value current output
Dimensions:
(approx. 7.5 .. 24 mA)
G1/4 DIN 3852 female

connector DIN 43650 3 pole+PE/ PG 9
connector DIN 43651 7 pole+PE/ PG 11
(without 7 pole female connector)
Note:
E 18.052.6/11.13

70
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 1700
3
With its integrated pressure Input data
measurement cell, 4-digit display and Measuring ranges 16; 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
4 switching outputs, the EDS 1700
offers the user all the advantages of a Overload pressures 32; 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
modern electronic pressure switch. Burst pressures 200; 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
4 switching points and switch-back Mechanical connection Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
points can be adjusted very simply and Torque value 20 Nm
independently of one another using the Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
keypad. Output data
For optimum integration in monitoring
Accuracy to DIN 16086, EDS 1700-P: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
systems (e.g. with PLC), an analogue
Max. setting EDS 1700-N: ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10V) is also
available.
The main areas of application of the Repeatability EDS 1700-P: ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
EDS 1700 are in hydraulics and EDS 1700-N: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
pneumatics. The instrument is ideal for Temperature drift EDS 1700-P ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C max. zero point & range
use where frequent switching cycles Temperature drift EDS 1700-N ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point & range
(several million), stable switching Analogue output
point accuracy or simple and precise Signal (selectable) 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance ≤ 400W
adjustability are required. 0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance ≥ 2 kW
Switch outputs
Type 4 relays with change-over contacts
Special features: (2 groups, common supply of each group
 Integrated pressure sensor with connected)
strain gauge on stainless steel Switching voltage 0.1 .. 250 V AC / DC
membrane Switching current 0.009 .. 2 A per switch output
 Accuracy 0.5 % or 1 % FS Switching capacity max. 50 W / 400 VA
 4-digit digital display (for inductive load, use varistors)
Switching cycles 20 million at minimum load
 Simple operation via key 1 million at maximum load
programming
 4 limit relays, switching points and Environmental conditions
switch back points can be adjusted Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C
independently
 Analogue output signal selectable Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 Many useful additional functions Fluid temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Optional mounting position mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
(pressure connection on the top/ Vibration resistance to ≤5g
bottom, keypad and display can be DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
turned through 180°) Shock resistance to ≤ 10 g
 Can be set to display values in DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
any unit of measurement e.g.: kN, kg, Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
psi, ... Other data
Current consumption approx. 200 mA
Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 10 %
Electrical connection 14-pole, terminal block
Housing material aluminium, anodised
E 18.055.5/11.13
Weight ~ 800 g
71
The core of the unit is a microprocessor
which provides many useful extra functions EDS 1 7 9 X – X – XXX – 000
in addition to normal pressure switch
operation. It is possible, for example, to Mechanical connection
activate switching delay times to prevent 9 = Threaded port G1/4 DIN 3852
fast pressure peaks from triggering an
Display
unwanted switching cycle. All settings are
1 = 4-digit bar
made using the keypad.
2 = 4-digit psi
Setting ranges of the Accuracy
switching points: P = 0.5 %
 Switching point relay 1 to 4: N = 1 %
1.5 % .. 100 % FS Pressure ranges in bar
 Switch-back relay 1 to 4: 016; 040; 100; 250; 400; 600
1 % .. 99 % FS
Modification number
or alternatively
000 = Standard
switch-back hysteresis 1 to 4:
1 % .. 99 % FS
Note: FS (Full Scale) = Note:
3
relative to the full measurement range
Additional setting options: technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
 Switching direction of the relays 1 to 4
(N/C or N/O)
 Switch-on delay relays 1 to 4 in the Accessories:
range 0.00 .. 90 seconds Appropriate accessories, such as mechanical adapters etc. can be found in the
 Switch-off delay relays 1 to 4 in the Accessories brochure.
range 0.00 .. 90 seconds
 Switch-back mode (either switch-back
point or switch-back hysteresis)
 Display of the actual pressure, a
switching point or of the peak value
 Display filter (slow / medium / fast)
 Display range scale individually
adaptable (bar, psi, user-selectable)
 Measurement unit (bar, psi) is displayed
 Analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
 Programming disable Dimensions:
Cable gland PG 11
Terminal assignment:
Pin
1 +UB
2 0V
3 Analogue output Signal +
4 Analogue output Signal - (0 V)
5 Relay 1 N/C
6 Relay 1 N/O
8 Relay 2 N/C
9 Relay 2 N/O
10 Relay 3 N/C G1/4 DIN3852 female
11 Relay 3 N/O countersink to DIN 74-KM5

13 Relay 4 N/C
14 Relay 4 N/O
Note:
E 18.055.5/11.13

72
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400
Programmable
3
The programmable electronic pressure Input data
switch in the series EDS 4400 has been Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
specially developed to combine the Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
advantages of a compact, robust and Burst pressures 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
cost-effective device with the benefits of Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
a programmable pressure switch. Torque value 20 Nm
The EDS 4400 can be easily Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
programmed using the HPG 3000 Seal: FPM
programming unit. Output data
Once the programming unit is Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
disconnected from the EDS 4400, the Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
pressure switch retains all the settings. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
This prevents unauthorised or incorrect Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
adjustment of the settings. ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
The following parameters can be Switch output 1 or 2 transistor switch outputs
changed: PNP or NPN
N/C or N/O
 Switching point Output load PNP:
 Hysteresis max. 1.2 A with 1 switching output
max. 1 A each with 2 switching outputs
 Switching direction (N/O / N/C) NPN:
 Switching delay times max. 0.5 A with 1 switching output
max. 0.3 A each with 2 switching outputs
The EDS 4400 is suitable for high-
Switching points / Hysteresis user-programmable with HYDAC
pressure applications (starting at Programming Unit HPG 3000
40 bar) and has a pressure Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms;
measurement cell with thin-film strain User-programmable with
gauge on a stainless steel membrane. HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
In contrast to pressure switches Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
which are factory-set according to Environmental conditions
customer requirements and are not Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
field-adjustable, the programmable Operating temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
EDS 4400 is highly versatile and Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
replaces a wide range of models. This
Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C/ -25 .. +100 °C
is advantageous in respect of stock
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
management.
Special features: DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Option of 1 or 2 switching outputs DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
 Option of PNP or NPN switching Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 ( M12x1, when an
outputs IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
 High switching output capacity
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
 Flexible user-programming 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
 Compact and robust design
Current consumption ≤ 25 mA with inactive switching outputs
 Also available in ATEX version for ≤ 1.225 A with 1 switching output
potentially explosive locations ≤ 2.025 A with 2 switching outputs
E 18.067.2/11.13
Weight ~ 145 g
1)
2)
73
In conjunction with the HYDAC
Programming Unit HPG 3000, all the EDS 4 4 4 8 – XXXX – X – P X – 000
settings are combined in an easy-to-follow
menu. Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Measuring range Increment Pressure ranges in bar
in bar in bar 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
0 .. 40 0.1 Number of switching outputs
0 .. 100 0.2 1 = 1 switching output
0 .. 250 0.5 Output technology
0 .. 400 1 P = Programmable switching output
0 .. 600 1 Output technology 2
P = PNP switching output
The switch point (upper switch value) N = NPN switching output
on all instruments is between
Modification number
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range
000 = Standard
3 and the switch-back point (lower
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 %
of the measuring range. Note:
Minimum Maximum the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
value value
in ms in ms Accessories:
Switch-on Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the
delay 8 2040 Accessories brochure.
Ton1/Ton2
Switch-off
delay 8 2040
ToF1/ToF2
The increment for all instruments is
8 ms.
Pin connections: Dimensions: Programming Unit:

M12x1, 5 pole (must be ordered separately)
male electr. conn.
5 pole
4 3 HPG 3000 – 000
5 Portable Programming Unit
Part. No. 909422
1 2
Pin Process HPG

connection connection
1 +UB +UB
2 Out 2 n.c.
hex. SW27
3 0V 0V
4 Out 1 n.c.
5 n.c. Comport
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869 female electr. conn.
5 pole
Note:
E 18.067.2/11.13

74
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4300
Programmable
3
switch in the series EDS 4300 was Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
specially developed to combine the -1 .. 1; -1 .. 9 bar
advantages of a compact, robust and Overload pressures 3; 8; 20; 32; 50 bar
cost-effective instrument with the 3; 32 bar
benefits of a programmable pressure Burst pressures 5; 12; 30; 48; 75 bar
switch. 5, 48 bar
The EDS 4300 can be easily
Torque value 20 Nm
programmed using the HPG 3000
programming unit. Sensor cell: Ceramic
Once the programming unit is Seal: FPM / EPDM (as per model code)
disconnected from the EDS 4300, the Output data
pressure switch retains all the settings. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
This prevents unauthorised or incorrect Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
adjustment of the settings. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
The following parameters can be Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
changed: ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
Switch output 1 or 2 transistor switch outputs
 Switching point PNP or NPN
 Hysteresis N/C or N/O
Output load PNP:
 Switching direction (N/O / N/C) max. 1.2 A with 1 switching output
 Switching delay times max. 1 A each with 2 switching outputs
NPN:
The EDS 4300 is suitable for low max. 0.5 A on version with 1 switching output
pressure applications (up to 16 bar) and max. 0.3 A each on version with 2 switching outputs
has a pressure measurement cell with Switching points / Hysteresis user-programmable with HYDAC
thick-film strain gauge on a ceramic Programming Unit HPG 3000
membrane. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms;
Freely programmable with
In contrast to pressure switches which HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
are factory-set according to customer Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
requirements and not field-adjustable, Environmental conditions
the programmable EDS 4300 is highly Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
versatile and replaces a wide range of Operating temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
models. This is advantageous in respect Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
of stock management. Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Special features: Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
 Option of 1 or 2 switching outputs DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Option of PNP or NPN switching Shock resistance to ≤ 100 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
outputs
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 ( M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is
 High switching output capacity used)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Other data
 Flexible user-programming Supply voltage 8 .. 32 V DC

 Compact and robust design 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
 Also available in ATEX version for
potentially explosive locations Current consumption ≤ 25 mA with inactive switching outputs
≤ 1.225 A with 1 switching output
≤ 2.025 A with 2 switching outputs
E 18.070.0/11.13

Weight ~ 145 g
1)
2)
In conjunction with the HYDAC
Programming Unit HPG 3000, all the EDS 4 3 4 8 – XXXX – X – P X – 000 – X 1
settings are combined in an easy-to-follow
menu. Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Measuring Increment Pressure ranges in bar
range in bar in bar 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0001(-1 .. 1); 0009(-1 .. 9)
-1 .. 1 0.01
Number of switching outputs
0 .. 1 0.002
0 .. 2.5 0.005 2 = 2 switching outputs
0 .. 6 0.01 Output technology
P = Programmable switching output
-1 .. 9 0.02
Output technology 2
0 .. 10 0.02
P = PNP switching output
0 .. 16 0.05 N = NPN switching output
The switch point (upper switch value) Modification number
3 on all instruments is between 000 = Standard
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range Seal material (in contact with fluid)
and the switch-back point (lower F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 % E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for water or refrigerants)
of the measuring range. Material of connection (in contact with fluid)
Minimum value Maximum value
1 = Stainless steel
in ms in ms
Switch-on
delay 8 2040 Note:
Ton1/Ton2
Switch-off technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
delay 8 2040
ToF1/ToF2
Accessories:
The increment for all instruments is
8 ms. Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the
Pin connections: Dimensions: Programming Unit:

M12x1, 5 pole (must be ordered separately)
male electr. conn.
5 pole
4 3 HPG 3000 – 000
5
Portable Programming Unit
Part. No. 909422
1 2
Pin Process HPG

1 +UB +UB
2 Out 2 n.c. hex. SW27
3 0V 0V
4 Out 1 n.c.
5 n.c. Comport
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869 female electr. conn.
5 pole
Note:
E 18.070.0/11.13

76
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 820
3
EDS 820 with IO-Link communication Input data
interface is a compact electronic Measuring ranges 25; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
pressure switch for relative pressure Overload range 50; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
measurement in the high-pressure Burst pressures 100; 200; 300; 500; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
range. Mechanical connection G¼ A DIN 3852 with 0.5 mm orifice
The device has two PNP transistor
Torque value 20 Nm
switch outputs, one of which can serve
as the IO communication output. Seal: FPM
the IO-Link interface enables Output signals Pin 4: IO Link interface or
bidirectional communication between user-configurable switching output
the device and the control. Pin 2: user-configurable switching output
Parameterisation and cyclical Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
transmission of process and service Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
with communication interface IO-Link ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
according to specification V1.1 has Switch outputs
been specially designed for connecting Type PNP transistor output
sensors in automation systems. Switching current max. 250 mA per output
Typical fields of application are Switching cycles > 100 million
machine tools, handling and assembly Reaction time < 10 ms
automation, intralogistics or the Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
packaging industry. Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
programming device HPG 3000
 IO-Link interface or PNP transistor Operating temperature range 1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
switch output Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
 1 additional PNP transistor switching Fluid temperature range 1) -40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
output - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.0 % FS Vibration resistance acc. to ≤ 25 g
 Highly robust sensor cell DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 0 .. 500 Hz
 Status LED display for active switch Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
outputs
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (M12x1 male connection, for use with
an IP 67 connector)
Other data
≤ 0.275 A with 1 active switching output
≤ 0.525 A with 2 active switching outputs
Weight ~ 65 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage,
override and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
-25 °C for EPM seal, -40 °C on request
E 18.070.1.0/11.13
77
Pin connections: IO-Link-specific data:
Baud rate 38.4 kBaud *
M12x1, 4 pole Cycle time 2.5 ms
Process data width 16 Bit
L+
IO-Link
Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
1 C/Q
2 4 *C
3 up to a max. line length of 20 m.
L- Standard IO http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
I/Q
Model code:
Pin Signal Description EDS 8 2 4 – XXXX – L – 000
1 L+ Supply voltage
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / Mechanical connection
analogue output 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
3 L- Gnd Pressure ranges in bar
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
switching output (SP1) Output
3 L = IO Link Interface
Modification number
Status LEDs: 000 = Standard
The pressure switch has 3 status LEDs on
the electrical connection: Notes:
2 LEDs (yellow) for the switching statuses On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
of SP1 and SP2 and 1 LED (green) for the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
operating status Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found
in the Accessories brochure.
M12x1
connection
Dimensions:
SP 2 SP 1 Ø 25.9 ±0.30
male elect. conn. M12x1, 4 pole
Com 11.4
(max. 45 +0.3)
LED 1 Yellow Switching output 1 active

(SP 1) (high)
29.5
LED 2 Yellow Switching output 2 active

(SP 2) (high)
LED 3 Green, Supply voltage OK
2.5
4.1
(Com) permanent switch in SIO mode

Green, Supply voltage OK
flashing switch in IO-Link mode
12
seal ring DIN3869-14-FPM
hex. SW27
G1/4 A
orifice Ø 0.5
18.9 -0.2
Ø 23.5 -0.1
Ø 29.4 -0.1
Note:
E 18.070.1.0/11.13

78
E 18.070.1.0/11.13
79
3
Pressure sensors with flush membranes
Depending on the application and the medium used, it is not always
possible to use standard pressure connections.
This is the case, for example, with media which can cause the standard
pressure connection to become blocked, clogged or frozen, or for
applications where the medium changes frequently and residues can
result in mixing or contamination of the media.
For such applications, HYDAC ELECTRONIC provides pressure sensors

with flush membranes. On these, the pressure connection is closed off at
the end with a flush-fitting, fully-welded stainless steel membrane and is
filled internally with a special pressure transfer fluid. The process pressure
being measured is transmitted hydrostatically to the sensor cell via the
transfer pressure fluid.
Electronic pressure transmitters with flush membrane:

Page
HDA 4700 81
HDA 4400 83
HDA 4300 85
HDA 7400 87
Electronic pressure switches with flush membrane:

Page
EDS 3400 89
EDS 3300 93
You can find more sensors with flush membranes for special applications
in the Section on "Sensors for potentially explosive atmospheres".
4
E 180.000.2/11.13
80
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane

Pressure transmitter HDA 4700 with Input data
a flush membrane was designed Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
specifically for applications in which a Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
standard pressure connection could Burst pressures 1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
become blocked, clogged or frozen by Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
the particular medium used. Further G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
applications include processes where G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
the medium changes regularly and and cooling section
any residues could cause mixing or Pressure transfer fluid Silicone-free oil
contamination of the media. Torque value 45 Nm
Parts in contact with medium 2) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Like the standard model, the HDA 4700 Seal: FPM
with flush membrane has a stainless O-ring: FPM
steel measurement cell with a thin Output data
film strain gauge for relative pressure Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
measurement in the high pressure RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
range. 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
The pressure connection is achieved RLmin.= 2 kΩ
with a fully-sealed stainless steel Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
front membrane filled internally with 4
a pressure transfer fluid. The process (B.F.S.L) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
to the measurement cell via the Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
pressure transfer fluid. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V enable Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
connection to all HYDAC measurement Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
and control devices as well as to DIN 16086
connection to standard evaluation Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
systems (e.g PLC controls). Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS max.
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
Special features: Compensated temperature range
Operating temperature range 3)
-25 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
 Pressure connection has a flush Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
membrane Fluid temperature range 3) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Accuracy ≤ 0.25 % FS typ. -40 .. +150 °C / -25 .. +150 °C for G1/2
with cooling section
 Highly robust sensor cell mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Very small temperature error mark 4) Certificate No. E318391
 Small, compact design Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
IP 67 female connector is used)
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
E 18.374.1/11.13
Life expectancy > 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 % FS)

Weight ~ 150 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range, B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
1)
G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal max. 1500 bar
2)
Other seal materials on request
3)
4)
Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 No. 61010-1
81
HDA 4 7 Z X – X – XXXX – XXX – 000 EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Mechanical process connection

Z = Flush membrane
(female connector supplied)
(female connector not supplied)
Signal Pin HDA 47Z5-A HDA 47Z5-B

A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor 1 Signal+ +UB
2 Signal- 0V
Pressure ranges in bar 3 n.c. Signal
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
^ Housing Housing
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852 M12x1
G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
G12 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal and cooling section
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Pin HDA 47Z6-A HDA 47Z6-B
1 Signal+ +UB
Accessories:
2 n.c. n.c.
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found in the
Accessories brochure. 3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
Dimensions:
4
profile seal ring
male electr. conn. male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 4p / 5p
(DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer profile
seal ring
[G01] DIN 3869
hex-SW27 Note:
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869 not described, please contact the relevant
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5 seal ring DIN 3869 technical department.
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
O-ring 15 x 2
E 18.374.1/11.13

[G02] [G12] Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
82
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane

a flush membrane was designed Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
specifically for applications in which a Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
standard pressure connection could Burst pressures 1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
the particular medium used. Further G1/2 with addit. front O-ring seal
applications include processes where G1/4 with addit. front O-ring seal
the medium changes frequently and G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
contamination of the media. 20 Nm for G1/4
Like the standard model, the HDA 4400 Parts in contact with medium 2) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
with flush membrane has a stainless Seal: FPM
steel measurement cell with a thin O-ring: FPM
film strain gauge for relative pressure Output data
measurement in the high pressure Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
range. RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
The pressure connection is achieved RLmin.= 2 kW
front membrane filled internally with Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
4
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically (B.F.S.L) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
to the measurement cell via the Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
pressure transfer fluid.
The output signals 4 .. 20 mA or Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
0 .. 10 V enable connection to all Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
HYDAC measurement and control to DIN 16086
devices as well as connection to Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
standard evaluation systems (e.g PLC Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
controls). Rise time ≤ 1 ms
Compensation temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
Special features: Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
-25 .. +85° C
-40 .. +100 °C
 Pressure connection has a flush Fluid temperature range 3) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
membrane -40 .. +150 °C / -25 .. +150 °C for G1/2
 Accuracy ≤ 0.5 % FS typ. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Highly robust sensor cell mark 4) Certificate No. E318391
 Very small temperature error Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Excellent EMC characteristics Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
 Small, compact design IP 67 (for M12x1, providing an
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
E 18.375.1/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
1)
2)
3)
4)
83

Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Pin HDA 44Z5-A HDA 44Z5-B
1 Signal+ +UB
2 Signal- 0V
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Mechanical connection 3 n.c. Signal
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852 ^ Housing Housing
G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found Pin HDA 44Z6-A HDA 44Z6-B
1 Signal+ +UB
2 n.c. n.c.
Dimensions: 3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
profile seal
4 ring

3p+PE EN175301-803 4p / 5p
(DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN 3869
[G01]
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN 3869
hex-SW27 Note:
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
[G02] the operating conditions and
O-ring 15 x 2
hex-SW27
hex-SW27 not described, please contact the relevant
seal ring DIN 3869 seal ring DIN 3869 technical department.
2
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5 18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5

19.5
O-ring 15 x 2
8
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

E 18.375.1/11.13
Ø 10.9 HYDAC electronic GmbH

G1/4A Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Ø 18.9 [G12]
[G04] Ø 29.5
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
84
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane

a flush membrane was designed Measuring ranges -1..1; -1..9; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar
specifically for applications in which a Overload pressures 3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
standard pressure connection could Burst pressures 5; 48; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
the particular medium used. Further G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
applications include processes where G1/4 with add. front O-ring seal
the medium changes regularly and G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
contamination of the media. 20 Nm for G1/4
Like the standard model, the Parts in contact with medium 1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
HDA 4300 with a flush membrane has a Seal: FPM
ceramic measurement cell with a thick O-ring: FPM
measurement in the low pressure Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
range. RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
The pressure connection is achieved RLmin.= 2 kW
front membrane filled internally with Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
4
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically (B.F.S.L) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
pressure transfer fluid.
The 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V enable Over range ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
connection to all HYDAC measurement Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
and control devices as well as to DIN 16086
connection to standard evaluation Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
systems (e.g PLC controls). Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
Rise time ≤ 1 ms
Special features: Compensated temperature range
Operating temperature range
-25 .. +85 °C
-25 .. +85°C
membrane Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Accuracy ≤ 0.5 % FS typ. -40 .. +150 °C / -25 .. +150 °C for G1/2
 Highly robust sensor cell mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Very small temperature error mark3) Certificate No. E318391
 Very compact design Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
IP 67 (for M12x1, providing an
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
E 18.376.1/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
1)
2)
3)
85

Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor Pin HDA 43Z5-A HDA 43Z5-B
Pressure ranges in bar 1 Signal+ +UB
01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025;
0001 (-1..1); 0009 (-1..9) 2 Signal- 0V
Mechanical connection 3 n.c. Signal
G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
^ Housing Housing
G12 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal and cooling section M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories such as female electrical connectors can be found
Pin HDA 43Z6-A HDA 43Z6-B
Dimensions: 1 Signal+ +UB
2 n.c. n.c.
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
Profile seal ring
4
male electr. conn male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4p / 5p
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
[G01]
hex-SW27
3
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
20.5
Note:
10
O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 18.1 hex-SW27
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14 the operating conditions and
[G02] Ø 29.5 applications described.
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5 seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
E 18.376.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
[G04] [G12] Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
86
Electronic
HDA 7400
with Flush Membrane

a flush membrane was designed Measuring ranges 25; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
specifically for applications in which a Overload pressures 50; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
standard pressure connection could Burst pressures 125; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
the particular medium used. Further G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
applications include processes where Pressure transfer fluid Silicone-free oil
the medium changes regularly and Torque value 20 Nm
any residues could cause mixing or Parts in contact with fluid1) Connection part: Stainless steel
contamination of the media. Seal: FPM
Like the standard model, the HDA 7400 O-ring: FPM
with flush membrane has a stainless Output data
steel measurement cell with a thin- Output signals, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
film strain gauge for relative pressure RLmax = (UB – 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
measurement in the high pressure RLmin = 2 kΩ
range. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
The pressure connection is achieved max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
with a fully-sealed stainless steel Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
front membrane filled internally with (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max. 4
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
pressure transfer fluid. over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
The output signals 4 .. 20 mA or Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
0 .. 10 V permit connection
to all HYDAC measuring and control Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
devices, as well as connection to Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
standard evaluation systems Rise time ≤ 2 ms
(e.g. PLC controls). Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS / year typ.
Special features: Operating temperature range - 25 .. +85 °C
membrane Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Accuracy ≤ 0.5 % FS typ. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Highly robust sensor cell mark3) Certificate No.: E318391
 Very compact design Vibration resistance according to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Very small temperature error Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when an IP 67 female connector is used)
 Excellent EMC characteristics Other data
when applied according to UL specifications – limited energy – according to 9.3 UL 61010;
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Weight ~ 80 g
E 18.376.1.0/11.13
B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
1)
2)
3)
87
HDA 7 4 Z 6 – X XXXX – XXX – 000 M12x1

Z = Flush membrane
Signal
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 Pin HDA 74Z6-A HDA 74Z6-B
Mechanical connection 1 Signal+ +UB
G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal 2 n.c. n.c.
G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 3 Signal- 0V
Modification number 4 n.c. Signal
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found
Dimensions:

Ø 18.5 M12x1 4 pole Ø 18.5 M12x1 4 pole
4
52.6
52.6
37.5
37.5
2 +0.3
2
hex. SW19 hex. SW19

12
19.5
seal ring DIN 3869 seal ring DIN 3869

11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5 11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
8
G1/4 A
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78
Ø 10.9 Ø 18.9
[G05] Ø 21
G1/4 A
Ø 18.9
[G04] Ø 21
Note:
E 18.376.1.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
88
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3400
with Flush Membrane

The electronic pressure switch Input data
EDS 3400 with a flush membrane was Measuring ranges 40; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
designed specifically for applications in Overload pressures 80; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
which a standard pressure connection Burst pressures1) 200; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
could become blocked, clogged or Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
frozen by the particular medium used. G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
Further applications include processes G1/4 A DIN 3852
where the medium changes frequently G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
and any residues could cause mixing or and cooling section
contamination of the media. Pressure transfer fluid Silicone-free oil
Like the standard model, the EDS 3400 20 Nm for G1/4
with flush membrane has a stainless Parts in contact with medium2) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
steel measurement cell with a thin Seal: FPM
film strain gauge for relative pressure O-ring: FPM
measurement in the high pressure Output data
range. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
The pressure connection is achieved Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
with a fully-sealed stainless steel Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
front membrane filled internally with ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
4
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Analogue output (optional)
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically Output signal (selectable) 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 Ω
to the measurement cell via the 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kΩ
pressure transfer fluid. Switch outputs
Type PNP transistor output
Depending on the type, the instrument Switching current max. 1.2 A per output
can have up to 2 switching outputs and Switching cycles > 100 million
a switchable analogue output Reaction time < 10 ms
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Level HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
Special features: Environmental conditions
Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C, -10 .. +60 °C for UL spec.
 Pressure connection has a flush Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C, -25 .. +60 °C for UL spec.
membrane Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching Fluid temperature range3) -40 .. +80 °C / -25 .. +80 °C
-40 .. +150 °C / -25 .. +150 °C for G1/2 with cooling section
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Accuracy ≤ 1 % FS mark4) Certificate No. E318391
 Optional analogue output selectable DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
 4-digit digital display DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Rotation in two planes (axes) Other data
for optimum alignment Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
 Measured value can be displayed in 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
bar, psi or MPa 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
 Simple operation with key UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
programming Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
max. 35 mA with inactive switching output
 Switching points and switch-back max. 55 mA with inactive switching output
hystereses can be adjusted and analogue output
E 18.377.1/11.13
 Many useful additional functions Weight ~ 120 g
 Option of Desina®-compliant Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.
pin configuration with diagnostic FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
1)
function 2)
3)
4)
89
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 4 Z X – X – XXXX – XXX – 000
In order to prevent unauthorised Mechanical process connection
adjustment of the device, a programming Z = Flush membrane
lock can be set. Electrical connection
outputs: only possible on output model "5"
Switching point function Output
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- 1 = 1 switching output
range point ment* only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
in bar in bar in bar in bar 2 = 2 switching outputs
0 .. 250 4.0 .. 250 1.5 .. 247.5 0.5 5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 400 2.0 .. 396 1 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "8"
0 .. 600 9.0 .. 600 3.0 .. 594 1
0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Window function G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
Meas. Lower Upper Incre- G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
range switch switch ment* G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
value value G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
in bar in bar in bar in bar G12 = G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
0 .. 40 0.6 .. 39.2 0.9 .. 39.6 0.1 Modification number
0 .. 100 1.6 .. 98.2 2.4 .. 99 0.2 000 = Standard
0 .. 250 4.0 .. 245.5 6.0 .. 247.5 0.5
0 .. 400 6.0 .. 392 9.0 .. 396 1
0 .. 600 9.0 .. 589 14 .. 594 1 Model code:
* All ranges given in the table DESINA®-compliant or
are adjustable by the increments can be connected to DESINA®:
shown.
Additional functions: EDS 3 4 Z 8 – X – XXXX – XXX – D00

4  Switching mode of the switching outputs
adjustable (switching point function or Mechanical process connection
window function) Z = flush membrane
 Switching direction of the switching Electrical connection
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) 8 = M12x1, 5 pole, male
Output
 Choice of display (current pressure, 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
switch point 2, display off) Pressure ranges in bar
 Display filter for smoothing the display 0040; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
value during pressure pulsations Mechanical connection
 Analogue output signal selectable G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
 Pressure can be displayed in G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
the measurement units bar, psi, MPa. G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
The scaling can also be adapted to G12 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal and cooling section
Modification number
D00 = DESINA®-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics
EDS 3400 for self diagnostics:

for customers in the machine tool and Note:
mechanical engineering sectors and Special models on request.
complies with the DESINA® specification. For instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
detected and an "ERROR" message also
E 18.377.1/11.13
appears in the display. The electrical Accessories:

to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA® Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters,
requirements. splash guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
90
installation dimension Ø 53.5
M12x1, 4 pole
male, electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
Pin EDS EDS EDS

34Z6-1 34Z6-2 34Z6-3
1 +UB +UB +UB
display
turns thru
270°
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1
housing
turns thru M12x1, 5 pole
340°
4 3
5
hex-SW27
1 2
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
[G01]
Pin EDS
34Z8-5
1 +UB
2 Analogue
3 0V
4 SP 1 4
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869 seal ring DIN3869 5 SP 2
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5 11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

M12x1, 5 pole
O-ring 15 x 2
4 3
5
[G02] [G04]
1 2
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869 DESINA®- Can be
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5 compliant connected to
DESINA®
Pin EDS EDS
hex-SW27 34Z8-1 34Z8-3
[G05]
seal ring DIN3869 1 +UB +UB
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 15 x 2
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
5 n.c. Analogue
[G12]
Note:
E 18.377.1/11.13

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
applications described. For applications and operating conditions not described, please Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
contact the relevant technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
91
4
92
E 18.377.1/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 3300
with Flush Membrane

EDS 3300 with a flush membrane was Measuring ranges -1..1; 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16 bar
designed specifically for applications in Overload pressures 3; 3; 8; 18; 30; 48 bar
which a standard pressure connection Burst pressures 5; 5; 15; 30; 50; 80 bar
could become blocked, clogged or Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
frozen by the particular medium used. G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
Further applications include processes G1/4 A DIN 3852
where the medium changes frequently G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal and cooling section
and any residues could cause mixing or Pressure transfer fluid Silicone-free oil
contamination of the media. Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
Like the standard model, the Parts in contact with medium1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
EDS 3300 with flush membrane has a Seal: FPM
ceramic measurement cell with a thick O-ring: FPM
measurement in a low pressure range. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
Max. setting (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
The pressure connection is achieved Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
with a fully-sealed stainless steel Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. zero point
front membrane filled internally with ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. range
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Analogue output (optional) 4
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically Output signal (selectable) 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 Ω
to the measurement cell via the 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kΩ
pressure transfer fluid. Switch outputs
Depending on the type, the instrument Type PNP transistor output
Switching current max. 1.2 A per output
can have up to 2 switching outputs and Switching cycles > 100 million
a switchable analogue output Reaction time < 10 ms
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Level HIGH: approx. +UB / LOW: < +0.3 V
 Pressure connection has a flush Compensated temperature range -10 .. +70 °C, -10 .. +60 °C for UL spec.
Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C, -25 .. +60 °C for UL spec.
membrane
 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +80 °C / -25 .. +80 °C
outputs, up to 1.2 A load per output -40 .. +150 °C / -25 .. +150 °C for G1/2
 Accuracy ≤ 1% FS mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Optional analogue output selectable mark
3)
Certificate No. E318391
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 4-digit digital display Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Rotation in two planes (axes) Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
for optimum alignment Other data
 Simple operation with key 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
programming UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption max. 2,455 A total
 Switching points and switch-back max. 35 mA with inactive switching output
hystereses can be adjusted max. 55 mA with inactive switching output
independently and analogue output
E 18.378.1/11.13
 Optional Desina®-compliant pin confi- Weight ~ 120 g
guration with diagnostic function Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
2)
3)
93
grouped in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. EDS 3 3 Z X – X – XXXX – XXX – 000
adjustment of the device, a programming Mechanical process connection
lock can be set. Z = Flush membrane
Setting ranges for the switch 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
outputs: only possible on output models "1", "2" and "3"
Switching point function only possible on output model "5"
Meas. Switch Hysteresis Incre- Output
range point ment* 1 = 1 switching output
-1 .. 1 -0.97 .. 1 -0.99 .. 0.98 0.01 2 = 2 switching outputs
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.5 0.015 .. 2.475 0.005 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
0 .. 6 0.09 .. 6 0.3 .. 5.94 0.01 5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
0 .. 10 0.16 .. 10 0.06 .. 9.9 0.02
0 .. 16 0.25 .. 16 0.1 .. 15.8 0.05
01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
0001 (-1..1)
Window function Mechanical connection
Meas. Lower Upper Incre- G01 = G1/2 A DIN 3852
range switch value switch value ment* G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
in bar in bar in bar in bar G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
-1 .. 1 -0.97 .. 0.96 -0.95 .. 0.98 0.01 G05 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
0 .. 1 0.016 .. 0.982 0.024.. 0.99 0.002
Modification number
0 .. 2.5 0.04 .. 2.455 0.06 .. 2.475 0.005 000 = Standard
0 .. 6 0.09 .. 5.89 0.14 .. 5.94 0.01
0 .. 10 0.16 .. 9.82 0.24 .. 9.9 0.02
Model code:
0 .. 16 0.25 .. 15.7 0.4 .. 15.8 0.05
DESINA®-compliant or
are adjustable by the increments can be connected to DESINA®:
shown.
Additional functions: EDS 3 3 Z 8 – X – XXXX – XXX – D00

4  Switching mode of the switching outputs
adjustable (switching point function or Mechanical process connection
window function) Z = Flush membrane
 Switching direction of the switching Electrical connection
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
Output
 Choice of display (actual pressure, 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
switch point 2, display off) Pressure ranges in bar
 Display filter for smoothing the display 01.0; 02.5; 06.0; 0010; 0016
value during pressure pulsations 0001 (-1 .. 1)
 Analogue output signal selectable Mechanical connection
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
 Pressure can be displayed in G02 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
measurement units bar, psi or MPa. G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
The scaling can also be adapted to G05 = G1/4A DIN 3852
indicate force, weight, etc. G12 = G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal and cooling section
Modification number
EDS 3300 for self diagnostics: D00 = DESINA®-compliant pin configuration for self-diagnostics

for customers in the machine tool and
mechanical engineering sectors and Note:
complies with the DESINA® specification.
A diagnostic signal enables errors to be Special models on request.
detected and an "ERROR" message also For instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
appears in the display. The electrical the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
E 18.378.1/11.13

to IP 67 in accordance with DESINA® Accessories:
requirements.
94
M12x1, 4 pole
male, electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
Pin EDS EDS EDS

33Z6-1 33Z6-2 33Z6-3
1 +UB +UB +UB
display
turns thru 2 n.c. SP 2 Analogue
270°
3 0V 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 SP 1
housing
turns thru M12x1, 5 pole
340°
4 3
5
1 2
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
[G01]
Pin EDS
33Z8-5
1 +UB
2 Analogue
3 0V
4 SP 1 4
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869

seal ring DIN3869 5 SP 2
11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

M12x1, 5 pole
O-ring 15 x 2
4 3
5
[G02] [G04]
1 2
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
seal ring DIN3869 DESINA® Can be

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
DESINA®
Pin EDS EDS
[G05]
hex-SW27 33Z8-1 33Z8-3
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
1 +UB +UB
O-ring 15 x 2 2 Diagnostics Diagnostics
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
5 n.c. Analogue
[G12]
E 18.378.1/11.13
Note: HYDAC electronic GmbH

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
applications described. For applications and operating conditions not described, please Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
contact the relevant technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
95
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
As with the pressure transmitters, HYDAC ELECTRONIC also has
temperature transmitters appropriate for every application.
The transmitters are available with a variety of output signals, connectors and
fluid port connection options.
Electronic temperature transmitters for general applications:

Page
ETS 7200 97
ETS 4100 99
ETS 4500 101
Other temperature transmitters for special applications can be found in the sections
"Service Instruments" and "OEM Products for Large Volume Production".
5
E 180.000.2 /11.13
96
Electronic
Temperature Transmitter
ETS 7200

The ETS 7200 is an electronic Input data
temperature transmitter which, because Measuring principle Silicon semiconductor device
of its compact design, is particularly Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
suited to measuring temperature in Probe length 10 mm
hydraulic applications in the industrial Probe diameter 6.7 mm
and mobile sectors. Based on a Pressure resistance 600 bar
silicon semiconductor device and Overload pressure 900 bar
corresponding evaluation electronics,
the temperature sensor is designed
Torque value 20 Nm
to measure temperatures in the range
-25°C to +100°C. Seal: FPM
The sensor has various analogue Output data
output signals as standard, Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
e.g. 4 .. 20 mA or 0 ... 10V to enable RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
integration into modern control systems 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
through an M12x1 connector. RLmin.= 2 kΩ
The pressure resistance up to Accuracy (at room temperature) ≤ ± 1.0 % FS typ.
600 bar and excellent EMC ≤ ± 2.0 % FS max.
characteristics make the ETS 7200 Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C
ideal for use in harsh conditions. Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 4 s
t90: 8 s
Special features: Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
 Ideal for OEM applications Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4 5
 Very compact design
 Excellent EMC characteristics Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
 Long-term stability DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Standard protection class IP 67 Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Weight ~ 50 g
1)
2)
E 18.315.3/11.13
97
ETS 7 2 4 6 – X – 010 – 000 M12x1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Signal
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor Pin ETS 7246-A ETS 7246-B
Probe length 1 Signal+ +UB
010 = 10 mm
2 n.c. n.c.
Modification number
3 Signal- 0V
000 = Standard
4 n.c. Signal
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

4 pole
hex.-SW19
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
described.
E 18.315.3/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
98
Electronic
ETS 4100

The ETS 4100 is a robust electronic Input data
temperature transmitter which is Measuring principle PT 1000
particularly suited to measuring Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
temperature in hydraulic applications in
Probe length 6; 50; 100; 250; 350 mm
industry.
Probe diameter 4.5; 8; 8; 8; 8 mm
The temperature sensor, based on a Pressure resistance 600 bar (probe length 6 mm)
PT 1000 and corresponding evaluation 125 bar (probe length 50 mm)
electronics, is capable of measuring 125 bar (probe length 100 mm)
temperatures in the range -25 °C to 125 bar (probe length 250 mm)
+100 °C. 125 bar (probe length 350 mm)
The sensor has analogue output Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
signals of 4 .. 20 mA and 0 ..10 V Torque value 20 Nm
available as standard for integration into Parts in contact with medium1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
modern control systems. The pressure Seal: FPM
resistance up to 600 bar and excellent Output data
EMC characteristics make the Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
ETS 4100 ideal for use in harsh RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
conditions. 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
RLmin.= 2 kΩ
Accuracy (at room temperature) ≤ ± 0.4 % FS typ.
Special features: ≤ ± 0.8 % FS max.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.8 % FS Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C
 Ideal for industrial applications Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: ~ 4 s
 Robust design t90: ~ 8 s
 Excellent EMC characteristics
 Excellent long term stability Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C 5
 Standard protection class Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
IP 65 / IP 67 mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 ( for male M12x1, when an
Other data
Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole,
Binder Series 714 M18, 4 pole,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Current consumption 3 conductor ~ 25 mA
Weight ~ 200 g (probe length 6 mm)
~ 215 g (probe length 50 mm)
E 18.302.1.0/11.13
1)
2)
99
ETS 4 1 4 X – X – XXX – 000 Binder series 714 M18
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(connector supplied) Pin ETS 4144-A ETS 4144-B
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole 1 n.c. +UB
2 Signal+ Signal
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor 3 Signal - 0V
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor 4 n.c. n.c.
Probe length
006 = 6 mm EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
050 = 50 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm
350 = 350 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the Pin ETS 4145-A ETS 4145-B
technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. 1 Signal+ +UB
2 Signal- 0V
Accessories: 3 n.c. Signal
^ Housing Housing
M12x1
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

Binder series 714 -4pole male electr. conn.3pole+PE male electr. conn.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
5
Pin ETS 4146-A ETS 4146-B
1 Signal+ +UB
2 n.c. n.c.
3 Signal- 0V
hex.-SW27 4 n.c. Signal
elastomer
profile seal ring
Note:
DIN3869

hex.-SW27 the operating conditions and applications
Probe length Probe diameter described.
(Z)
[mm] [mm]
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 6 4.5 technical department.
50 8 Subject to technical modifications.
100 8
E 18.302.1.0/11.13
250 8 HYDAC electronic GmbH

350 8 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
100
Electronic
ETS 4500

The ETS 4500 is a robust electronic Input data
temperature transmitter which is Measuring principle Silicon semiconductor device
particularly suited to measuring Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
temperature in hydraulic applications in
Probe length 10.7; 50; 100; 250; 350 mm
industry.
Probe diameter 8 mm
Based on a silicon semiconductor Pressure resistance 600 bar (probe length 10.7 mm)
device and corresponding evaluation 125 bar (probe length 50 mm)
electronics, the temperature sensor is 125 bar (probe length 100 mm)
designed to measure temperatures in 125 bar (probe length 250 mm)
the range -25 to +100 °C. 125 bar (probe length 350 mm)
The sensor has analogue output signals Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
of 4 .. 20 mA and 0 ..10 V available Torque value 20 Nm
as standard for integration in modern Parts in contact with medium1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
control systems. Seal: FPM
The pressure resistance up to 600 bar Output data
and excellent EMC characteristics make Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
the ETS 4500 ideal for use in harsh RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
conditions. 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
RLmin.= 2 kW
≤ ± 2.0 % FS max.
Special features: Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: ~ 4 s
 Ideal for industrial applications t90: ~ 8 s
 Robust design
 Excellent EMC characteristics Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C 5
 Excellent long term stability Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
 Standard protection class mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
IP 65 / IP 67 Vibration resistance to ≤ 25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
(DIN 43650))
IP 67 (for male M12x1 male, when an
Other data
Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Current consumption 3 conductor ~ 25 mA
Weight ~ 200 g (probe length 10.7 mm)
E 18.302.2.0/11.13
1)
2)
101
ETS 4 5 4 X – X – XXX – 000 EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor 1 Signal+ +UB
Probe length 3 n.c. Signal
010 = 10 mm ^ Housing Housing
050 = 50 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm M12x1
350 = 350 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:

Accessories:
1 Signal+ +UB
in the Accessories brochure. 2 n.c. n.c.
3 Signal- 0V
4 n.c. Signal
Dimensions:

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
Probe length Probe diameter
Probe length Probe diameter described.
(Z) (Z) [mm]
[mm] [mm] [mm]
10.7 10.7 8 8 technical department.
50 50 8 8 Subject to technical modifications.
100 100 8 8
E 18.302.2.0/11.13
250 250 8 8 HYDAC electronic GmbH

350 350 8 8 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
102
E 18.302.2.0/11.13
5
103
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
For measuring and monitoring the temperature of the medium, HYDAC
offers a wide variety of electronic temperature switches with an integrated
or separate temperature probe.
Page
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation 105
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation, 107
menu navigation to VDMA
ETS 3200 Pressure-resistant for inline installation, IO-Link 109
ETS 3200 for tank installation 111
ETS 3200 for tank installation, menu navigation to VDMA 113
ETS 3200 for tank installation, IO-Link 115
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe 117
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, 119
menu navigation to VDMA
ETS 3800 for separate temperature probe, IO-Link 121
ETS 320 Pressure-resistant for inline installation 123
TFP 100 (separate temperature probe) 129
Other electronic temperature switches for special applications can be found in

the sections "Sensors for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" and
"OEM Products for Large Volume Production"
HTS 8000
ETS 3200
ETS 3800
ETS 1700
ETS 320
ETS 380
Electronic
Temperature Switches
Accuracy (max. error) 1 °C 1 °C 1 °C 1 °C 1 °C 3%

Pressure resistant to 600 bar ü ü
Integrated probe ü ü ü
Separate probe ü ü ü
Number of switching outputs 2 2 2 2 4 2
6 Analogue output ü ü ü ü ü
Digital display ü ü ü ü ü
Programmable ü ü ü ü ü
In-Tank ü
Factory-set
(not field-adjustable) ü
VDMA Menu Navigation ü ü
Available as individual unit ü ü ü ü ü
OEM product for large volume
production ü
IO Link Interface ü ü
E 180.000.2/11.13
UL Approval ü ü
Note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant
data sheet.
104
Electronic Temperature
Switch
ETS 3200 Pressure Resistant
for Inline Mounting

The ETS 3200 is a compact electronic Input data
temperature switch with a 4-digit Measuring range -25 .. 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
display. Probe length 18 mm
Pressure resistant to 600 bar, this
Pressure resistance 600 bar
model has an integrated 18 mm
temperature probe and can be screwed Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
directly inline or into a hydraulic block. Torque value 45 Nm
Different output models with one or two Seal: FPM
switching outputs, optionally with an
additional analogue output signal, offer Output data
a variety of application possibilities. Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
The switching points and the associated Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
hystereses can be adjusted very quickly ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
and easily using the keypad. Analogue output (optional)
For optimum adaptation to the particular Signal selectable:
4 .. 20 mA ohmic resist. max. 500 W
application, the unit has many additional
0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance min. 1 kW
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching corresponds in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
delay times, N/C / N/O function, etc.).
Switch outputs
Type PNP transistor switching outputs
Special features: Switching current max. 1.2 A per output
Switching cycles > 100 million
 2 switching outputs,
Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 3 s
up to 1.2 A load per output
t90: 9 s
 Optional analogue output signal Environmental conditions
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 4-digit display (-25 ... +60°C acc. to UL spec.)
 Optimum alignment - display can be Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
rotated in two planes (axes) Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Switching / switch-back points and
-mark2) Certificate No. E318391
many useful additional functions can
be set using the keypad DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
 Display of temperature and Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
unit of measurement in °C or °F DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms) 6
Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
and analogue output
Weight ~ 135 g
E 18.327.2/11.13
1)
2)
105
All the settings available on the ETS 3200
are combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. ETS 3 2 2 X – X – 018 – 000
To prevent unauthorised adjustment of the
instrument, a programming lock can be Mechanical connection
set. 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
Setting ranges of the 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
switching points and only possible on output models "2" and "3"
switch-back hystereses: 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
Unit Switching Hysteresis Incre- Output
point ment* 2 = 2 switching outputs
°C -23.0 .. 100.0 1.0 .. 123.5 0.5
°F -9 .. 212 2 .. 222 1 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
Window function only in conjunction with electrical connection type "8"
Unit Lower Upper Incre- Probe length in mm
switch value switch value ment* 018
°C -23.0 .. 97.5 -22.0 .. 98.5 0.5 Modification number
°F -9 .. 208 -7 .. 209 1 000 = Standard
adjustable by the increments shown. Note:
Additional functions: or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
window function) Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, etc. can be
 Switching direction of the switching outputs found in the Accessories brochure.
adjustable (N/C or N/O)
 Choice of display (actual temperature,
peak temperature, switching point 1,
Dimensions:
switching point 2, display off)
display turns thru 270°

Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
housing turns thru 340°
Pin ETS 3226-2 ETS 3226-3

hex. SW27
1 +UB +UB
O-ring 20.35x1.78-NBR
2 SP 2 Analogue
6
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole installation dimension ∅ 53.5
4 3
5
1 2
electr. conn. male M12x1 4 pole/5 pole
Pin ETS 3228-5

Note:
1 +UB The information in this brochure relates to
2 Analogue the operating conditions and applications
E 18.327.2/11.13

described. Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
3 0V For applications or operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
4 SP 1 not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
5 SP 2 Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
106
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 Pressure Resistant
for Inline Installation

temperature switch with a 4-digit Measuring range -25 .. 100 °C (-13 .. 212 °F)
display. Sensor length 18 mm
Pressure resistant to 600 bar this model Pressure resistance 600 bar
has an integrated 18 mm temperature Hydraulic connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
probe and can be installed directly inline
Torque value 45 Nm
or on the hydraulic block.
Different output versions with one or two Seal: FPM
switching outputs, and with the possible
Output data
option of an additional analogue output
Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
signal, offer a variety of application
Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
possibilities.
≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
switch-back points can be adjusted very
Signal selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load ≤ 500 Ω
quickly and easily using the keypad.
0 .. 10 V load min. 1 kΩ
For optimum adaptation to the particular corresp. in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
application, the unit has many additional Switch outputs
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching
Type PNP transistor switching output
Special features: Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 3 s
 Menu navigation according to VDMA t90: 9 s
up to 1.2 A load per output Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
(-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
 Optional analogue output signal Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V)
Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100°C / -25 .. +100°C
 4-digit display mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
 Display can be rotated in two axes for - mark2) Certificate No.: E318391
optimal alignment Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
 Switching / switch-back points and DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
many useful additional functions can Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
be set using keypad DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms) 6
 Display of measured value and Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
units of measurement in °C or °F Other data
Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC (without analogue output)
18 .. 35 V DC (with analogue output)
for use acc. to UL specifications – limited energy – according to 9.3 UL 61010;
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption ≤ 2.455 A total
≤ 55 mA with analogue output and inactive
switching outputs
Weight (complete unit including probe) ~ 135 g
E 18.327.1.0/11.13

1)
2)
107
ETS 3200 as well as the menu structure ETS 3 2 2 6 – X – 018 – V00
VDMA Standard (VDMA 24574-2) for Type
temperature switches. 2 = With integrated temperature sensor
The ETS 3200 can easily be adjusted via Mechanical connection
three push-buttons. 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
outputs: Output
Measuring Lower limit of Upper limit of 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
Probe length in mm
-25 .. +100 °C -23.8 °C 100.0 °C
018
-13 .. +212 °F -11 °F 212 °F
Modification number
V00 = Menu navigation in accordance with VDMA (Standard 24574-2)
Measuring Min. difference Increment* Notes:
range betw.
RP and SP On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
& FL and FH technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
-25 .. +100 °C 1.2 °C 0.2 °C Accessories:
-13 .. + 212 °F 2 °F 1 °F Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
shown.
SP = switch point Dimensions:
FL = temperature window lower value Ø 42
40.4
25.2
FH = temperature window upper value M12x1 11
display turns thru

270°
window function)
16.1
92.5
housing turns thru

76
65

3 +0.2
340°
 Choice of display (current temperature,
hex. SW27
14

18
5
Pin connections: Ø6
Ø 7.5
16.1
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
M12x1, 4 pole
6 male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole
Pin ETS 3226-2 ETS 3226-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP2 Analogue
3 0V 0V
4 SP1 SP1
Note:
E 18.327.1.0/11.13

108
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 – Pressure-Resistant

The ETS 3200 with IO-Link Input data
communication interface is a compact, Measuring range -25 .. 100 °C (-13 .. 212 °F)
electronic temperature switch with Sensor length 18 mm
4-digit display. Pressure-resistant up Pressure resistance 600 bar
to 600 bar with an integrated 18 mm Hydraulic connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
temperature probe, this model can
Torque value 45 Nm
be mounted directly inline or on the
hydraulic block. Seal: FPM
The device has a switching output and
Output data
additional output that can be configured
Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
as switching or analogue (4 .. 20 mA or
Output 2: c an be configured as PNP transistor
0 .. 10 V). switching output or analogue output
Compared with the standard Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
version, the IO-Link interface Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
enables bidirectional communication ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
between the device and the control. Analogue output
Parameterisation and cyclical Signal selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load resist. ≤ 500 Ω
transmission of process and service 0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 kΩ
data is therefore possible. corresp. in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
The temperature switch series ETS 3200 Switch outputs
with communication interface IO-Link Type PNP transistor switching output
according to specification V1.1 was Switching current max. 250 mA per output
specially designed to connect sensors in Switching cycles > 100 million
automation systems. Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 3 s
Typical fields of application are t90: 9 s
machine tools, handling and assembly Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
automation, intralogistics or the programming device HPG 3000 or push-
packaging industry. buttons on the ETS 3200
Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 IO-Link interface Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100°C / -25 .. +100°C
 1 PNP transistor switching output mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4 6
 Additional signal output can be Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
configured as PNP transistor DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
switching output or analogue output Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
 4-digit display DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Display can be rotated in two axes for
Other data
optimal alignment
and analogue output
Weight (complete unit including probe) ~ 135 g
E 18.327.2.0/11.13
1)
109
ETS 3200 as well as the menu structure Cycle time 2.5 ms
VDMA Standard for temperature switches. Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
-25 .. +100 °C
-13 .. +212 °F
-23.8 °C
-11 °F
100.0 °C
212 °F
Model code:
ETS 3 2 2 6 – L – 018 – 000
Measuring Min. difference Increment* Type
range betw. 2 = With integrated temperature sensor
RP and SP
& FL and FH Mechanical connection
-25 .. +100 °C 1.2 °C 0.2 °C 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
-13 .. + 212 °F 2 °F 1 °F Electrical connection
* All ranges given in the table are (connector not supplied)
Output
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point L = IO Link interface
FL = temperature window lower value Probe length in mm
FH = temperature window upper value 018
Modification number
Additional functions: 000 = Standard
 Switching mode of the switching outputs Notes:
adjustable (switching point function or On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
window function) technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
 Switching direction of the switching Accessories:
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
 Switch-on and switch-off delay guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
switching point 2, display off) Dimensions:
Ø 42
Pin connections: 25.2
M12x1 11
40.4
display turns thru
M12x1, 4 pole
270°
L+
IO-Link
16.1
housing turns thru

92.5
1 C/Q
2 4
76
65
3
340°
L- Standard IO
3 +0.2
I/Q
14
hex. SW27
18
5
6 Pin Signal Description Ø6

16.1
1 L+ Supply voltage Ø 7.5
G1/2 A
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
analogue output
3 L- Gnd
male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole
Note:
E 18.327.2.0/11.13

110
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200
for Tank Installation

temperature switch with digital display. Measuring range -25 .. 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
With its integrated temperature probe, Probe lengths 100; 250; 350 mm
the ETS 3200 is particularly suitable for Pressure resistance 50 bar
direct tank installation and is available Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
in various lengths. Torque value 45 Nm
Different output models with one or two Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
switching outputs, optionally with an Seal: FPM
additional analogue output signal, offer Output data
a variety of application possibilities. Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
The switching points and the associated ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
hystereses can be adjusted very quickly Analogue output (optional)
and easily using the keypad. Signal selectable:
For optimum adaptation to the particular 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resist. max. 500 W
application, the instrument has many 0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance min. 1 kW
corresponds in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
additional adjustment parameters
Switch outputs
(e.g. switching delay times, N/C / N/O
function, etc.).
Special features: Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 8 s
t90: 15 s
 2 switching outputs, Environmental conditions
up to 1.2 A load per output Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Optional analogue output signal (-25 ... +60°C acc. to UL spec.)
selectable (4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10 V) Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 4-digit display Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Optimum alignment - display can be mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
rotated in two planes (axes) -mark2) Certificate No. E318391
 Switching / switch-back points and DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
many useful additional functions can Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
be set using the keypad. DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms) 6
 Display of temperature and Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
unit of measurement in °C or °F Other data
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
and analogue output
Weight ~ 150 g (probe length 100 mm)
E 18.319.3/11.13

1)
2)
111
All the settings available on the
ETS 3200 are combined in 2 easy-to- ETS 3 2 2 X – X – XXX – 000
navigate menus.
To prevent unauthorised adjustment of the Mechanical connection
instrument, a programming lock can be 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
set. Electrical connection
Setting ranges of the only possible on output models "2" and "3"
switching points and 8 = Male M12x1, 5 pole
switch-back hystereses: only possible on output model "5"
Switching point function Output
Unit Switching Hysteresis Incre- 2 = 2 switching outputs
point ment* only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
°C -23.0 .. 100.0 1.0 .. 123.5 0.5 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
°F -9 .. 212 2 .. 222 1
Window function
Probe length in mm
Unit Lower Upper Incre- 100; 250; 350
switch value switch value ment*
Modification number
°C -23.0 .. 97.5 -22.0 .. 98.5 0.5 000 = Standard
°F -9 .. 208 -7 .. 209 1
Additional functions: On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
adjustable (switching point function or Accessories:
window function) Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, protective sleeves for tank
mounting, splash guards, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Switching direction of the switching outputs
Dimensions:
display turns thru 270°

Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin ETS 3226-2 ETS 3226-3

hex. SW27
Probe
1 +UB +UB length

(dim. Z)
2 SP 2 Analogue 100
6
3 0V 0V 250
4 SP 1 SP 1 300
installation dimension ∅ 53.5

M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole/5 pole
Pin ETS 3228-5

Note:
E 18.319.3/11.13

112
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 for Tank Installation

display. Probe length 100; 250; 350 mm
With its integrated temperature probe, Pressure resistance 50 bar
the ETS 3200 is particularly suitable for Hydraulic connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
direct tank installation and is available
Torque value 45 Nm
in various lengths. Different output
models with one or two switching Seal: FPM
outputs, optionally with an additional
Output data
analogue output signal, offer a variety of
application possibilities.
≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
switch-back points can be adjusted very
quickly and easily using the keypad.
For optimum adaptation to the particular
0 .. 10 V load min. 1 kΩ
application, the unit has many additional corresp. in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching Switch outputs
Type PNP transistor switching output
Special features: Switching cycles > 100 million
 Menu navigation according to VDMA Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 8 s
t90: 15 s
up to 1.2 A load per output
 Optional analogue output signal (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 4-digit display Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100°C / -25 °C .. +100 °C
 Display can be rotated in two axes for mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
optimal alignment mark2) Certificate No.: E318391
 Switching / switch-back points and Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
many useful additional functions can DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
be set using keypad Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
 Display of measured value and DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms) 6
unit of measurement in °C or °F Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
1
for use acc. to UL specifications – limited energy – according to 9.3 UL 61010;
Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption ≤ 2.455 A total
≤ 55 mA with analogue output and inactive
switching outputs
Weight (complete unit including probe) ~ 150 g (probe length 100 mm)
E 18.319.1.0/11.13

1)
2)
113
ETS 3200 as well as the menu structure ETS 3 2 2 6 – X – XXX – V00
temperature switches. 2 = With integrated temperature sensor
three push-buttons. 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
Setting ranges for the 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
switching outputs: Output
Measuring Lower limit of Upper limit of 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
-25 .. +100 °C -23.8 °C 100.0 °C Probe length in mm
-13 .. +212 °F -11 °F 212 °F
100; 250; 350
Modification number
Measuring Min. difference Increment*
range betw. Notes:
-25 .. +100 °C 1.2 °C 0.2 °C Accessories:
-13 .. + 212 °F 2 °F 1 °F Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical adapters, splash
* All ranges given in the table guards, clamps for wall-mounting etc can be found in the Accessories brochure.
shown.
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point Dimensions:
Ø 42
FL = temperature window lower value 25.2 40.4
display turns thru

FH = temperature window upper value M12 11
270°
16.1
window function)
housing turns thru

 Switching direction of the switching 92.5
76

65
340°
+0.2
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds Probe length

3
 Choice of display (current temperature, (dim. Z)

hex. SW27
14

2
100
switching point 2, display off) 250 Ø 9.4

Z
300
Pin connections: Ø8 16.1
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
M12x1, 4 pole
6 male electr. conn. M12x1

4 pole/5 pole
Pin ETS 3226-2 ETS 3226-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP2 Analogue
3 0V 0V
4 SP1 SP1
Note:
E 18.319.1.0/11.13

114
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3200 for Tank Installation

communication interface is a compact, Measuring range -25 .. 100 °C (-13 .. 212 °F)
electronic temperature switch with Probe length 100; 250; 350 mm
4-digit display. Pressure resistance 50 bar
With its integrated temperature probe, Hydraulic connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
the ETS 3200 is particularly suitable for
Torque value 45 Nm
direct tank installation and is available
in various lengths. Seal: FPM
The instrument has a switching output
Output data
and additional output that can be
Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
configured as switching or analogue
Output 2: c an be configured as PNP transistor
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). switching output or analogue output
Compared with the standard Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
version, the IO-Link interface Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
enables bidirectional communication ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
between the device and the control. Analogue output
Parameterisation and cyclical selectable:
transmission of process and service Signal
4 .. 20 mA load ≤ 500 Ω
data is therefore possible. 0 .. 10 V ohmic resist. min. 1 kΩ
The temperature switch series corresp. in each case to -25 .. +100 °C
ETS 3200 with communication interface Switch outputs
IO-Link according to specification V1.1 Type PNP transistor switching output
was specially designed to connect Switching current max. 250 mA per output
sensors in automation systems. Switching cycles > 100 million
Typical fields of application are Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 8 s
machine tools, handling and assembly t90: 15 s
automation, intralogistics or the Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
packaging industry. programming device HPG 3000 or push
buttons on the ETS 3200
Special features: Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 IO-Link interface Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 1 PNP transistor switching output Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100°C / -25°C .. 100 °C 6
 Additional signal output, mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
can be configured as PNP transistor Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
switching output or analogue output DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
 4-digit display Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 Display can be rotated in two axes for Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
optimum alignment Other data
and analogue output
E 18.319.2.0/11.13
Weight (complete unit including probe) ~ 150 g (probe length 100 mm)
1)
115
Specification V1.1
-25 .. +100 °C
-13 .. +212 °F
-23.8 °C
-11 °F
100.0 °C
212 °F
Model code:
ETS 3 2 2 6 – L – XXX – 000
Measuring Min. difference Increment* Type
range betw. 2 = With integrated temperature probe
RP and SP
& FL and FH Mechanical connection
-25 .. +100 °C 1.2 °C 0.2 °C 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852, (male)
-13 .. + 212 °F 2 °F 1 °F Electrical connection
* All ranges given in the table are (connector not supplied)
Output
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point L = IO Link interface
FL = temperature window lower value Probe length in mm
FH = temperature window upper value 100; 250; 350
Modification number
Additional functions: 000 = Standard
 Switching mode of the switching outputs Notes:
window function) On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the
outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function) Accessories:
Dimensions:
Ø 42
Pin connections: 25.2 40.4
display turns thru

M12 11
M12x1, 4 pole 270°
L+
16.1
IO-Link
housing turns thru
92.5
1 C/Q
2 4
76
65
3
340°
+0.2
L- Standard IO Probe length

3
I/Q (dim. Z)
hex. SW27
14
2
100
Ø 9.4
250
Z
Pin Signal Description 300

6
1 L+ Supply voltage Ø8 16.1
G1/2 A
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
analogue output
3 L- Gnd installation dimension Ø 53.5
Note:
E 18.319.2.0/11.13

116
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800
for Separate Temperature Probe

temperature switch with a 4-digit Measuring range1) -30 .. +150 °C (-22 .. 302 °F)
display.
Connection, separate temperature probe Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
The version for a separate temperature Output data
probe has a measuring range of Accuracy (display, analogue output) ± 1.0 °C (+ PT100 error)
-30 ... +150°C and is used primarily
with the TFP 100 temperature probe
≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
which was specially developed for tank
installation.
Signal selectable:
It is also possible, however, to 4 .. 20 mA load resist. max. 500 W
evaluate commonly-available PT 100 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 1 kW
temperature probes. corresponds in each case to -30 .. +150 °C
Different output versions with one or two Switch outputs
signal, offer a variety of application Switching current max. 1.2 A per output
possibilities. Switching cycles > 100 million
The switching points and the associated Environmental conditions
hystereses can be adjusted very quickly Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
and easily using the keypad. (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
application, the instrument has many mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
additional adjustment parameters -mark2) Certificate No. E318391
(e.g. switching delay times, Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
N/C / N/O function, etc.). DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
 2 switching outputs, Other data
up to 1.2 A load per output Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
 Optional analogue output signal 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output 6
selectable (4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) for use acc. to UL spec. - limited energy - according to
 4-digit digital display 9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
 Optimum alignment - display can be
rotated in two planes (axes) Current consumption max. 2.455 A total
 Switching / switch-back points and max. 35 mA with inactive switch outputs
many useful additional functions can max. 55 mA with inactive switch outputs
be set using keypad and analogue output
 Display of temperature and Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 5%
unit of measurement in °C or °F Display 4-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
Weight ~ 87 g
1)
Depending on the temperature range of the connected temperature sensor, the indication
E 18.328.2/11.13
range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.

2)
117
are combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. ETS 3 8 6 X – X – 000 – 000
set. 6 = Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
°C -27.0 .. 150.0 1.0 .. 178.0 0.5
°F -17 .. 302 2 .. 320 1 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
Unit Lower Upper Incre- Probe length in mm
switch value switch value ment* 000 = Separate temperature probe
°F -17 .. 296 -14 .. 298 1 000 = Standard
* All ranges given in the table are Note:
adjustable by the increments shown. On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
Additional functions: Accessories:
 Switching mode of the switching outputs A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe
adjustable (switching point function or and a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm² are supplied with the instrument.
window function) Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, clamps for wall-
 Switching direction of the switching outputs mounting, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Switch-on and switch-off delay Separate temperature probe:
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds (not supplied with the instrument)
 Choice of display (actual temperature,  TFP 106 - 000 with electr. conn. 4-pol. M12x1 Part No.: 921330
peak temperature, switching point 1, (connector not supplied)
switching point 2, display off)  Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 Part No.: 906170
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Dimensions: display turns thru 270°
Pin ETS 3866-2 ETS 3866-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP 2 Analogue
6
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 female electr. conn. 4 pole
installation dimension ∅ 53.5

M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
Pin ETS 3868-5

Note:
E 18.328.2/11.13

118
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800

temperature switch with a 4-digit Measuring range1) -30 .. 150 °C (-22 .. 302 °F)
display. Connection, separate temperature probe Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
The model for separate temperature Output data
probe has a measuring range of Accuracy (display, analogue output) ± 1.0 % FS ( + PT100 error)
-30 .. +150°C and is used primarily
with the TFP 100 temperature probe ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
which was specially developed for tank Analogue output (optional)
installation.
It is also possible, however, to use 0 .. 10 V load min. 1 kΩ
commercially available PT 100 corresp. in each case to -30 .. +150 °C
temperature probes. Different output Switch outputs
models with one or two switching Type PNP transistor switching output
outputs, and with the possible option Switching current max. 1.2 A per output
of an additional analogue output Switching cycles > 100 million
signal, offer a variety of application Environmental conditions
possibilities. Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
The switching points and the associated (-25 .. +60 °C acc. to UL spec.)
switch-back points can be adjusted very Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
quickly and easily using the keypad. mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
For optimum adaptation to the particular - mark2) Certificate No.: E318391
application, the unit has many additional Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
delay times, N/C / N/O function, etc.). Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
Special features: Other data
 2 switching outputs, 18 .. 35 V DC (with analogue output)
up to 1.2 A load per output for use acc. to UL specifications – limited energy – according to 9.3 UL 61010;
 Optional analogue output signal Class 2; UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
selectable Current consumption ≤ 2.455 A total
(4 .. 20 mA / 0 .. 10 V) ≤ 35 mA with inactive switching outputs
≤ 55 mA with analogue output and inactive 6
 4-digit display
switching outputs
 Display can be rotated in two axes for Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
optimal alignment Display 4-digit, LED, 7-segment, red,
 Switching / switch-back points and height of digits 7 mm
many useful additional functions can Weight ~ 87 g (excluding connector and probe)
be set using keypad
 Display of temperature and protection are provided.
unit of measurement in °C or °F FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
Depending on the temperature range of the connected
temperature sensor, the measurement range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.
2)
Environmental conditions according to 1.4.2 UL 61010-1; C22.2 no. 61010-1
E 18.328.1.0/11.13
119
ETS 3800 as well as the menu structure ETS 3 8 6 6 – X – 000 – V00
temperature switches. 8 = For separate temperature probe
three push-buttons. 6 = Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
outputs: Output
Measurement Lower limit of Upper limit of 3 = 1 switching output and 1 analogue output
-30 .. +150 °C -28.0 °C 150.0 °C Probe length in mm
-22 .. +302 °F -19 °F 302 °F
000 = Separate temperature sensor
Modification number
Measurement Min. difference Increment*
range betw. Notes:
-30 .. +150 °C 2.0 °C 0.5 °C Accessories:
-22 .. + 302 °F 3 °F 1 °F A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe, and
* All ranges given in the table are a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm² are supplied with the instrument.
adjustable by the increments shown. Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, clamps for wall-
SP = switch point mounting, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
FL = temperature window lower value Separate temperature probe:
FH = temperature window upper value
(not supplied with the instrument)
 TFP 106 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole M12x1 Part No.: 921330
Additional functions: (connector not supplied)
adjustable (switching point function or  Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 Part No.: 906170
window function)
Dimensions:
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds Ø 42
 Choice of display (current temperature, 25.2 40.4
M12x1 11
display turns thru

Pin connections: 270°

16.1
93.2
housing turns thru
M12x1, 4 pole
76.7
65.7
340°
M12x1
electr. conn. female 4 pole 16.1
Ø 22

6
Pin ETS 3866-2 ETS 3866-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP2 Analogue
3 0V 0V
4 SP1 SP1
Note:
E 18.328.1.0/11.13

120
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 3800

communication interface is a compact, Measuring range1) -30 .. 150 °C (-22 .. 302 °F)
electronic temperature switch with Connection, separate temperature probe Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
4-digit display. The version for a Output data
separate temperature probe has a Accuracy (display, analogue output) ± 1.0 % FS ( + PT100 error)
measuring range of -30 ... +150 °C
and is used primarily with the TFP 100 ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
temperature probe which was specially Analogue output (optional)
developed for tank installation.
Signal selectable:
It is also possible, however, to 4 .. 20 mA load resist. ≤ 500 Ω
evaluate commonly-available PT 100 0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 kΩ
temperature probes. The instrument has corresp. in each case to -30 .. +150 °C
one switching output and an additional Switch outputs
output that can be configured as either Type PNP transistor switching output
switching or analogue (4 .. 20 mA or Switching current max. 250 mA per output
0 .. 10 V). Switching cycles > 100 million
Compared with the standard Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
version, the IO-Link interface programming device HPG 3000 or push
enables bidirectional communication buttons on the ETS 3800
between the device and the control. Environmental conditions
Parameterisation and cyclical Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
transmission of process and service Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
data is therefore possible. mark EN 61000-6-1 / -2 / -3 / -4
The temperature switch series Vibration resistance according to ≤ 10 g
ETS 3800 with communication interface DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
IO-Link according to specification V1.1 Shock resistance according to ≤ 50 g
was specially designed to connect DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
sensors in automation systems. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Typical fields of application are Other data
machine tools, handling and assembly Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC (without analogue output)
automation, intralogistics or the 18 .. 35 V DC (with analogue output)
packaging industry. Current consumption ≤ 0.535 A with active switching outputs
≤ 55 mA with inactive switching output 6
Special features: and analogue output
 IO-Link interface Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
 1 PNP transistor switching output Display 4-digit, LED, 7-segment, red,
 Additional signal output, Weight ~ 87 g (excluding connector and probe)
switching output or analogue output Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and
 4-digit digital display FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
 Optimum alignment of the display − 1)
Depending on the temperature range of the connected temperature sensor, the
can be rotated in two axes measurement range of the ETS 3800 may be reduced.
E 18.328.2.0/11.13
121
Specification V1.1
Measurement Lower limit of Upper limit of http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
-30 .. +150 °C -28.0 °C 150.0 °C
-22 .. +302 °F -19 °F 302 °F Model code:
ETS 3 8 6 6 – L – 000 – 000
range betw. Type
RP and SP 8 = For separate temperature probe
& FL and FH
-30 .. +150 °C 2.0 °C 0.5 °C
6 = Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
-22 .. + 302 °F 3 °F 1 °F
* All ranges given in the table are 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
adjustable by the increments shown. (connector not supplied)
SP = switch point Output
L = IO Link interface
FL = temperature window lower value
FH = temperature window upper value Sensor length in mm
000 = Separate temperature probe
Additional functions: Modification number
 Switching mode of the switching outputs 000 = Standard
adjustable (switching point function or Notes:
window function)
 Switching direction of the switching technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
 Switch-on and switch-off delay A male cable connector M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature sensor
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds and a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm² are supplied with the instrument.
 Choice of display (actual temperature, Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, clamps for wall-
peak temperature, switching point 1, mounting, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Pin connections: Dimensions:

Ø 42
25.2 40.4
M12x1, 4 pole M12x1 11
display turns thru
L+
IO-Link
270°
1 C/Q
2 4
3
16.1
93.2
L-
housing turns thru
Standard IO
76.7
65.7
I/Q
340°

6
1 L+ Supply voltage M12x1
electr. conn. female 4 pole 16.1
2 I/Q Switching output (SP2) / Ø 22
analogue output
3 L- Gnd
Separate temperature sensor:

(not supplied with instrument)
 TFP 106 - 000 Part. No.: 921330 male electr. conn. M12x1 4 pole
with male electr. conn.
4 pole M12x1
(connector not supplied) Note:
 Tank install. sleeve Part No.: 906170 The information in this brochure relates to
E 18.328.2.0/11.13
for TFP 100 the operating conditions and applications

122
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 320 Pressure-Resistant

display.
Probe length 18 mm
Pressure-resistant to 600 bar with an Pressure resistance 600 bar
integrated 18 mm temperature probe, Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
this model can be installed directly
Torque value 45 Nm
inline or on the hydraulic block and has
a measuring range of -25 .. +100 °C. Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
Different output models with one or two Output data
signal of 4 .. 20 mA offer a variety of Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
application opportunities. ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
Signal 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 400 W
hystereses can be adjusted very quickly
corresponds to -25 .. +100 °C
and easily using the keypad.
Switch outputs
application, the unit has many additional
adjustment parameters (e.g. switching
delay times, N/C / N/O function, etc.). Switching cycles > 100 million
Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: 3 s
t90: 9 s
 Compact temperature switch with Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
integral temperature probe Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 2 transistor switching outputs, Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C/ -25 .. +100 °C
up to 1.2 A load per output (for the probe)
 Optional analogue output signal mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
4 .. 20 mA Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
 3-digit display DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g 6
 Switching point or window function
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
 Switching / switch-back points and
many useful additional functions can Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
be set using the keypad Other data
Current consumption approx. 100 mA without switch output
Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 5%
Weight ~ 300 g
1)
E 18.310.5/11.13
123
are combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. ETS 3 2 X – X – 100 – X00
set. 2 = G1/2 A DIN 3852 (male)
°C -22.0 .. 100.0 1.0 .. 178.0 1.0
°F -10.0 .. 212.0 2.0 .. 320.0 2.0 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
Unit Lower Upper Incre- Measuring range
switch value switch value ment* -25 .. +100 °C (-13 .. +212 °F)
°F -12.0 .. 210.0 -10.0 .. 212.0 2.0 000 = Display in °C
400 = Display in °F
Additional functions: Note:
 Switching mode of the switching outputs On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
adjustable (switching point function or or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
window function)
Accessories:
 Switching direction of the switching outputs Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, clamps for wall-mounting, etc.
adjustable (N/C or N/O) can be found in the Accessories brochure.
adjustable from 0 .. 750 seconds
peak temperature, switching point 1, Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

Pin connections: 4pole/5pole
M12x1, 4 pole
Pin ETS 326-2 ETS 326-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP 2 Analogue
6
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1 hex. SW27
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
1 2
Pin ETS 328-5

Note:
E 18.310.5/11.13

124
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 380

temperature switch with a 3-digit
display. Measuring range1) -30 .. +150 °C (-22 .. 302 °F)
Connection, separate temperature probe Female cable connection M12x1, 4 pole
The version for a separate temperature
probe has a measuring range Output data
of -30 .. +150 °C and is used primarily Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0 °F)
with the TFP 100 temperature probe Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. zero point
which was specially developed for tank ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. range
installation. Analogue output (optional)
It is also possible, however, to Signal 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance max. 400 W
evaluate commonly available PT 100 corresponds to -30 .. +150 °C
temperature probes. Different output Switch outputs
models with one or two switching Type PNP transistor switching outputs
outputs, and with the possible option of
an additional analogue output signal of
4 .. 20 mA open up a multitude of Switching cycles > 100 million
application opportunities. Environmental conditions
The switching points and the Ambient temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
associated hystereses can be Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
adjusted very quickly and easily using mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
the keypad. Vibration resistance to ≤ 10 g
For optimum adaptation to the DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
particular application, the instrument Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
has many additional adjustment DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
parameters (e.g. switching delay Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
times, N/C / N/O function, etc.). Other data
Current consumption approx. 100 mA without switch output
Special features: Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 5%
 2 transistor switching outputs, Display 3-digit, LED, 7 segment, red,
up to 1.2 A load per output height of digits 9.2 mm
 Optional analogue output signal Weight ~ 300 g 6
4 .. 20 mA
 3-digit display and short circuit protection are provided.
 Switching point or window function FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
 Switching / switch-back points and range of the ETS 380 may be reduced.
many useful additional functions can
be set using the keypad
E 18.329.2/11.13
125
All the settings available on the
ETS 380 are combined in 2 easy-to- ETS 3 8 X – X – 150 – X00
navigate menus.
To prevent unauthorised adjustment of the Mechanical connection
device, a programming lock can be set. 8 = Electrical connection for separate temperature probe
°C -27.0 .. 150.0 1.0 .. 178.0 1.0
°F -16.0 .. 302.0 2.0 .. 320.0 2.0 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
Unit Lower Upper Incre- Measuring range
switch value switch value ment* -30 .. +150 °C (-22 .. +302 °F)
°F -18.0 .. 300.0 -16.0 .. 302.0 2.0 000 = Display in °C
400 = Display in °F
Additional functions: or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
 Switching mode of the switching outputs Accessories:
adjustable (switching point function or A male cable connection M12x1, 4 pole, to connect the separate temperature probe
window function) and a 3 m sensor cable, LIYCY 4 x 0.5 mm² are supplied with the instrument.
 Switching direction of the switching outputs Other accessories, such as electrical connectors, clamps for wall-mounting, etc. can
adjustable (N/C or N/O) be found in the Accessories brochure.
adjustable from 0 .. 750 seconds Separate temperature probe:
 Choice of display (actual temperature, (not supplied with the instrument)
 TFP 104 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 Part no. 904969
 TFP 106 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole M12x1 Part no. 921330
switching point 2, display off) (connector not supplied)
 Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 Part no. 906170
Pin connections:
M12x1, 4 pole
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

4pole/5pole
Pin ETS 386-2 ETS 386-3

1 +UB +UB
2 SP 2 Analogue
6
3 0V 0V
4 SP 1 SP 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4 3
5
M12x1
1 2
Pin ETS 388-5

Note:
E 18.329.2/11.13

126
Electronic
Temperature Switch
ETS 1700

The electronic temperature switch Input data
ETS 1700 is used mainly together
with the temperature probe TFP 100, Measuring range1) 0 .. +100 °C, (+32 .. 212 °F)
which was specially developed for tank Output data
mounting. Accuracy (display, analogue output) ≤ ± 1.0 °C (≤ ± 2.0°F)
The 4-digit display can indicate the Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS
actual temperature, one of the switching Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
points or the maximum temperature ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
value. Analogue output (optional)
The maximum temperature indicates Signal selectable:
the highest temperature which has 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 400 W
occurred since the unit was switched on
or was last reset. 0 .. 10 V load resistance min. 2 kW
corresponds in each case to 0 .. +100 °C
The 4 switching outputs can be used to
control heating and cooling processes Switch outputs
in hydraulic systems, for example. Type 4 relays with change-over contacts in
Four switching and switch-back points 2 groups
which are independent of each other (common supply of each group
can be adjusted very simply via the connected)
keypad. Switching voltage 0.1 .. 250 V AC / DC
An analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or Switching current 0.009 .. 2 A per output
0 .. 10 V) is also available for integration Switching capacity 400 VA, 50 W
into monitoring systems (e.g. with PLC). (for inductive load, use varistors)
Switching cycles > 20 million at minimum load
Special features: > 1 million at maximum load
 4-digit display Environmental conditions
 Simple operation due to
key programming Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 4 limit relays, switching points and
switch back points can be adjusted Vibration resistance to ≤5g
independently DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
 Optional analogue output signal Shock resistance to ≤ 10 g 6
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V) DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
Other data
 Optional mounting position
(sensor connection on the top/
bottom, keypad and display Current consumption approx. 200 mA
can be turned through 180°) Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 10 %
Weight ~ 800 g
1)
range of the ETS 1700 may be reduced.
E 18.303.4/11.13
127
The microprocessor integrated into the
ETS 1700 enables many useful extra ETS 1 7 0 X – 100 – 000
functions in addition to the switching
functions, when compared with a normal Type of sensor
mechanical temperature switch. 0 = For PT 100 sensors
It is possible, for example, to activate Display
switching delay times or to change the
1 = 4-digit display °C
relay switching direction.
2 = 4-digit display °F
All settings are made via the keypad.
Measuring range
Setting ranges of the 0 .. 100 °C, (+32 .. 212 °F)
switching points and Modification number
switch-back hystereses: 000 = Standard
 Switching point relays 1 to 4:
1.5 .. 100 % of the measuring range
 Switching point relays 1 to 4: Note:
1 .. 99 % of the measuring range On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label
or alternatively or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
 Switch-back hystereses 1 to 4: Accessories:
1.. 99 % of the measuring range PG cable glands, mounting bolts, a 5 pole female connector (Binder series 681) for
connecting the separate temperature probe and a 3 m sensor cable
Additional functions: (LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm²) are supplied with the instrument.
 Switching direction of the relays 1 to 4 Other accessories, such as vibration mounts etc. can be found in the Accessories
(N/C or N/O function) brochure.
 Switch-on delay relays 1 to 4 in the Separate temperature probe:
range from 0.0 .. 900.0 seconds
(not supplied with the instrument)
 Switch-off delay relays 1 to 4 in the
range from 0.0 .. 900.0 seconds  TFP 104 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 Part No.: 904696
 Switch-back mode  TFP 106 - 000 with male electr. conn. 4 pole M12x1 Part No.: 921330
(alternatively switch-back point or (female connector not supplied)
switch-back hysteresis)  Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 Part. No.: 906170
 Display of the actual temperature, a
switching point or of the peak value
 Display range individually selectable
in °C or °F
 Measurement unit (°C, °F) is displayed Dimensions:
 Analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
 Programming lock
cable gland PG11
Terminal assignment: countersunk to DIN74-KM5
Device connection
Pin
1 +UB
2 0V
3 Analogue output Signal +
4 Analogue output Signal - (0 V)
5 Relay 1 N/C
6 Relay 1 N/O
6 7 Centre relay 1 and 2
8 Relay 2 N/C
9 Relay 2 N/O
10 Relay 3 N/C
11 Relay 3 N/O
connector female
12 Centre relay 3 and 4 Binder series 681 -5p
13 Relay 4 N/C
14 Relay 4 N/O
Probe connection
Pin
Note:
2 Signal + the operating conditions and applications
E 18.303.4/11.13

3 n.c. For applications or operating conditions Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
4 Signal - not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
5 0V Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
128
Temperature Probe
TFP 100

The TFP 100 temperature probe was Temperature probe TFP 100
developed primarily for tank installation.
The PT 100 precision resistor in Temperature range -40 .. +125 °C (-40 .. +257 °F)
4-conductor design can be connected Electrical connection Male Binder series 714 M18, 4 pole
directly to HYDAC temperature Male M12x1, 4 pole
switches ETS 3800, ETS 380 and Parts in contact with medium Brass
ETS 1700.
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
The standardised electrical connection Sensor current 0.3 .. 1.0 mA
also means that other evaluation or
control systems (e.g. PLC) can easily Tank installation sleeve for TFP 100 (Accessory, not supplied)
be connected. Pressure resistance 10 bar
For adaptation to different applications Parts in contact with medium CuZn39Pb3 (brass), nickel-plated
and fluids, a nickel-plated brass
installation sleeve which is pressure Model code:
resistant up to 10 bar is available as an
accessory. TFP 10X – 000
Separate temperature probe
Special features: Electrical connection
 Measurement circuit configured as 4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18m (connector supplied)
four-conductor circuit 6 = Male, 4 pole M12x1 (connector not supplied)
 Simple to install Modification number
 For universal application 000 = Standard
Dimensions: Tank installation

male electr. conn.
Binder S714, 4 pole
male electr. conn.
M12x1 - 4 pole
sleeve for TFP100
Pin connections: (to be ordered separately)
Part No.: 906 170
Binder series M12x1 hex. SW27

714 M18
6
Male connection
4 pole
Binder, Series 714 Note:
or M12x1
E 18.330.2/11.13
described. HYDAC electronic GmbH

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Sensor resistance technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
129
Sensors for distance and position
Using various measuring techniques, HYDAC offers different distance and
7 position sensors for a wide array of mobile and stationary applications.
Linear position sensors operate on the physical principle of
magnetostriction.
This measuring principle determines with high accuracy the position,
distance and/or speed signal, if required, and is based on elapsed time
measurement.
Utilizing this non-contact and wear-free measuring technique, HYDAC
offers different versions in a pressure-resistant stainless steel housing for
part or full integration in hydraulic cylinders.
Linear position transducers for mobile applications:

Page
HLT 1000-R2 131
Linear position transducers for stationary applications:

Page
HLT 2100-R1 133
HLT 2500-F1 137
HLT 2500-L2 141
The ultrasonic distance sensor is a non-contact, highly compact sensor

for measuring the distance to fluids and objects.
By definition, its functional principle (measurement of sound transmission
time) means that it operates with an extremely high resolution and
measurement rate.
Electronic ultrasonic distance sensor:

Page
HLS 528 145
Further distance and position sensors for special applications can be

found in the Chapter "OEM Products for High Volume Production".
HLT 1000-R2
HLT 2100-R1
HLT 2500-F1
HLT 2500-L2
2015 / 2020
IES 2010 /
HLS 528
HLS 100
HLS 200
IWE 40
Sensors for
distance and position
50 to 50 to 50 to 50 to up to
Measurement range in mm
2,500 4,000 4,000 4,000 6,000
For cylinder installation ü ü
Number of switching outputs 2 2 1 (PWM) 2
Analogue output ü ü ü ü ü ü
CANopen Version ü ü ü ü
Device Net ü ü ü
Profibus ü ü ü
EtherCAT ü ü ü
SSI ü ü ü
Available as individual units ü ü ü ü ü
OEM product for large
ü ü ü ü
E 180.000.2 /11.13
volume production
Enhanced functional safety ü ü ü

Note:
130
7
Linear Position Transducer

HLT 1000-R2

The sensor works on the principle of Input data
magnetostriction. Measuring ranges 50 .. 2500 mm
This measuring principle determines Measured variable Distance, position, speed
with high accuracy the position, Mechanical connection Cylinder-integrated
distance and/or speed and is based Housing Stainl. steel: pressure resistance 450 bar
on elapsed time measurement. Output data
On the basis of this non-contact and Signal output Current: 4 .. 20 mA or
wear-free measurement system, 20 .. 4 mA
HYDAC offers a version in pressure- Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or
resistant stainless steel housing for 10 .. 0 V
complete integration in hydraulic 0.25 .. 4.75 V or
cylinders. 4.75 .. 0.25 V
The different output signals CANopen
(analogue/CANopen) facilitate Measuring accuracy Analogue CANopen
the connection of all HYDAC Resolution 12 bit 0.1 mm
ELECTRONIC GMBH measurement min. 0.1 mm
and control devices as well as Non-linearity ≤ ± 0.05 % FS ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
connection to standard evaluation Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 mm ≤ ± 0.1 mm
systems (e.g. also to PLC controls). Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 mm ≤ ± 0.1 mm
The main areas of application are in Temperature coefficient ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C ≤ ± 0.003 % FS / °C
mobile hydraulics. Installation position and travel speed Optional
Special features: Relative humidity 90 %, non-condensing
 High accuracy,
Storage temperature range -40 .. +85 °C, dry
e.g. ≤ ± 0.05 % FS for CANopen
Vibration resistance to
 Very robust housing DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz ≤ 20 g
 High resistance to shock and at 5 kHz ≤ 15 g
vibration Shock resistance to ≤ 50 g
 Excellent EMC characteristics DIN EN 60068-2-2 (11 ms)
 Non-contact and wear-free mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EMC
 Persuasive price / - Emitted interference DIN EN 61000-6-3
performance ratio - Interference resistance DIN EN 61000-6-2
Housing / Stainless steel, pressure-resistant
Protection class to IEC 60529 1) IP 67
Other data
Electrical connection 1) Flying leads
Separate male panel mount connection
M12x1
Current consumption without load max. 100 mA
Weight Depends on length
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and excess voltage protection are
provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
E 18.372.3/11.13
1)
Other versions are possible.
131
7
Mobile HLT 1 1 0 0 – R2 – XXX – XXX – XXXX – 000 Cable outlet
Design/Geometry type
1 = Rod
R2 = Cylinder-integrated
Cable output
K01 = Flying lead, length 1 m Core Analogue CANopen
K02 = Flying lead, length 2 m
K05 = Flying lead, length 5 m brown +UB +UB
K10 = Flying lead, length 10 m white 0V 0V
Separate male panel mount connection M12x1 green Analogue CAN_L

(4 pole for signal output analogue yellow n.c. CAN_H
5 pole for signal output CANopen)
L06 = 60 mm cable length
L18 = 180 mm cable length M12x1, 4 pole
Signal output
C01 = Analogue 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
B01 = Analogue 0 .. 10 V
G01 = Analogue 0.25 .. 4.75 V
G02 = Analogue 4.75 .. 0.25 V
CAN = CANopen
Pin
Measuring range in mm (50 to 2500 mm) 1 +UB
Example
0150 = 150 mm 2 n.c.
3 0V
Modification
000 = Standard 4 Signal
Notes: M12x1, 5 pole

Special models on request. On instruments with a different modification number,
please read the label or the technical amendment details supplied with the
instrument. 4 3
5
Items supplied:
 HLT 1100-R2 1 2
 Installation instructions German/English
 HLT 1100 CD incl. case
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as position magnets, etc. can be found in the
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure. Pin Signal Description
The recommended position magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be 1 n.c.
ordered separately.
2 +UB supply+
3 0V supply-
Dimensions: 4 CAN_H bus line dominant high
5 CAN_L bus line dominant low
Note:
Damping zone Measuring length Zero position
E 18.372.3/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
132
7

Rod Version
HLT 2100-R1

The measuring principle determines Measured variable Distance, position, speed
with high accuracy the position, Mechanical connection Threaded flange M18x1.5
distance and/or speed, and is based Housing Aluminium
on elapsed time measurement. Hydraulic tube Stainless steel
Utilizing this non-contact and wear- Pressure resist. 450 bar, 750 bar peak
free measuring system, HYDAC Output data
offers a version in a pressure- Signal output analogue Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 ... 4 mA
resistant, tubular casing in stainless Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
steel, for direct installation into Signal output digital Profibus, CANopen, Device Net, SSI,
EtherCAT
hydraulic cylinders.
Measuring accuracy
The different output signals Resolution max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
(analogue/digital) facilitate Non-linearity ± 0.1 mm to 1,500 mm
the connection of all HYDAC ± 0.15 mm > 1,500 mm
ELECTRONIC GMBH measurement Repeatability ≤ 0.005 mm - ≤ 0.05 mm (length-dependent)
and control devices as well as Temperature coefficient < 0.004 % FS / °C (analogue)
connection to standard evaluation < 0.0015 % FS / °C (digital)
systems (e.g. also to PLC controls). Installation position and travel speed No restrictions
The HLT 2100-R1 is primarily used Environmental conditions
in stationary applications as a semi- Operating temperature range 0 .. +70 °C
integrated solution in hydraulic Relative humidity 98 %, non-condensing
cylinders. Storage temperature range -30 .. +85 °C, dry
Vibration resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-6 ≤ 10 g
at 50 .. 2000 Hz
Special features: Shock resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-27 ≤ 100 g / 11 ms / half sine
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.05 % FS typ. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Very robust housing EMC
 High resistance to shock and - Emitted interference DIN EN 61000-6-3
vibration - Interference resistance DIN EN 61000-6-2
 Excellent EMC characteristics Housing / Protection class to IEC 60529 Aluminium / IP 651)
Other data
 Non-contact and wear-free
 Persuasive
price / performance ratio - Analogue - Flying lead, length 1 m1)
- Male M16, 6 pole
- Male M16, 8 pole
- CANopen, Device Net Female M12x1, 5 pole
+ male M12x1, 5 pole
- Profibus Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1,
5 pole + male M8, 4 pole
- Synchronous Serial Interface CONTACT male, 12 pole
- EtherCAT 2 female M12x1, 4 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole
Supply voltage 24 V DC ± 10 %
Current consumption without load < 250 mA
E 18.373.2/11.13

provided.
1)
133
Model code:
7
Stationary HLT 2 1 0 0 – R1 – XXX – XXX – XXXX – 000
1 = Rod
R1 = Threaded flange M18x1.5
Signal output analogue
M06 = Male M16, 6 pole
Signal output CANopen, Device Net

C61 = Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1, 5 pole
Signal output Profibus

P61 = Female M12x1, 5 pole + male M12x1, 5 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output Synchronous Serial Interface

S01 = CONTACT male, 12 pole
Signal output EtherCAT

E51 = 2 female M12x1, 4 pole + male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
SSI = Synchronous Serial Interface
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net
Measuring range in mm (50 to 4000 mm)

Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
• HLT 2100-R1
• Installation instructions German/English
• HLT 2000 CD incl. case
Accessories:
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure. The recommended position
magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be ordered separately.
E 18.373.2/11.13
134
Dimensions:
Signal output: analogue (K01)
Rod length
7
Measuring Zero pos.

Damping zone = 62 range = 28
SW46
Flying leads
Magnet Measuring rod in Cr/Ni alloy
Signal output: analogue (M06, M08)
6/8 pole Binder male
Signal output: CANopen 5 pole male panel mount series M12 A-coded
Device Net (C61)
5 pole female panel mount series M12

A-coded

B-coded
Signal output: Profibus (P61) (PROFIBUS-OUT)
5 pole male panel mount series M12 B-coded

(PROFIBUS-IN)
4 pole male panel mount series M8
Signal output: Synchronous Serial

Interface (S01):
12 pole CONTACT
Signal output: EtherCAT (E51)

D-coded
4 pole male panel mount series M8
Note:
E 18.373.2/11.13

applications described. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
technical department. Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
135
7
136
E 18.373.2/11.13
7

Flat Housing Design
HLT 2500-F1

with a high degree of accuracy the Mechanical connection Flat housing
position, distance and/or a velocity Housing Aluminium
signal based on elapsed time. Output data
Utilizing this non-contact and wear- Signal output analogue Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 ... 4 mA
free measuring system, HYDAC Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
offers a flat housing version in Signal output digital Profibus, CANopen, Device Net, SSI,
aluminium. EtherCAT
Measuring accuracy
The different output signals Resolution max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
(analogue/digital) facilitate
Non-linearity ± 0.1 mm to 1,500 mm
the connection of all HYDAC ± 0.15 mm > 1,500 mm
ELECTRONIC GMBH measurement Repeatability ≤ 0.005 mm - ≤ 0.05 mm (length-
and control devices as well as dependent)
connection to standard evaluation Temperature coefficient < 0.004 % FS / °C (analogue)
systems (e.g. also to PLC controls). < 0.0015 % FS / °C (digital)
The HLT 2500-F1 is primarily used Installation position and travel speed No restrictions
in stationary applications, especially Environmental conditions
when a semi-integrated solution in Operating temperature range 0 .. +70 °C
hydraulic cylinders is not possible. Relative humidity 98 %, non-condensing
Storage temperature range -30 .. +85 °C, dry
Vibration resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-6 ≤ 10 g
Special features: at 50 .. 2000 Hz
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.05 % FS typ. Shock resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-27 ≤ 100 g / 11 ms / half sine
 Very robust housing mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 High resistance to shock and EMC
vibration - Emitted interference DIN EN 61000-6-3
- Interference resistance DIN EN 61000-6-2
 Non-contact and wear-free Housing / Protection class to IEC 60529 Aluminium / IP 651)
Other data
 Persuasive
price / performance ratio Electrical connection
- Analogue - Flying lead, length 1 m1)
- Male M16, 6 pole
- Male M16, 8 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole.
E 18.396.1/11.13
provided.
1)
137
Model code:
7
Stationary HLT 2 5 0 0 – F1 – XXX – XXX – XXXX – 000
5 = Profile
F1 = Flat housing
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net

Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
• HLT 2500-F1
Accessories:
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure. The recommended position
magnet ZBL MF 38-18, part no. 6084456, must be ordered separately.
E 18.396.1/11.13
138
Dimensions:
7
Rod length
Damping zone = 65 Measuring range Zero pos. = 75
Flying leads
adjustable Optional

Interface (S01):
12 pole CONTACT male
Signal output: CANopen

Device Net (C61)
Rod length
5 pole male panel mount

series M12 A-coded
5 pole female panel mount

series M12 A-coded

adjustable Optional series M8

Signal output: Profibus (P61) series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-IN)

series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-OUT)
4 pole male panel

Signal output: EtherCAT (E51) mount
series M8

series M12 D-coded
Note:
E 18.396.1/11.13

139
7
140
E 18.396.1/11.13
7

Profile Design
HLT 2500-L2

with a high degree of accuracy the Mechanical connection With magnet in position slide V
position, distance and/or a velocity Housing Aluminium
signal based on elapsed time. Output data
Utilizing this non-contact and wear- Signal output analogue Current: 4 .. 20 mA or 20 .. 4 mA
free measuring system, HYDAC Voltage: 0 .. 10 V or 10 .. 0 V
offers a version in an aluminium Signal output digital Profibus, CANopen, Device Net, SSI,
profile housing with external EtherCAT
measuring slides or with a sliding Measuring accuracy
magnet for positioning by the Resolution max. 0.005 mm, 16 bit
operator. Non-linearity ± 0.1 mm to 1,500 mm
± 0.15 mm > 1,500 mm
The different output signals Repeatability ≤ 0.005 mm - ≤ 0.05 mm (length-
(analogue/digital) facilitate dependent)
the connection of all HYDAC Temperature coefficient < 0.004 % FS / °C (analogue)
ELECTRONIC GMBH measurement < 0.0015 % FS / °C (digital)
and control devices as well as Installation position and travel speed No restrictions
connection to standard evaluation Environmental conditions
systems (e.g. also to PLC controls). Operating temperature range 0 .. +70 °C
The HLT 2500-L2 is primarily used Relative humidity 98 %, non-condensing
in stationary applications, especially Storage temperature range -30 .. +85 °C, dry
when a semi-integrated solution in Vibration resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-6 ≤ 10 g
hydraulic cylinders is not possible. at 50 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-27 ≤ 100 g / 11 ms / half sine
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Special features: EMC
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.05 % FS typ. - Emitted interference DIN EN 61000-6-3
 Very robust housing - Interference resistance DIN EN 61000-6-2
 High resistance to shock and Housing / Protection class to IEC 60529 Aluminium / IP 651)
vibration Other data
 Excellent EMC characteristics Electrical connection
 Contact-free and wear-free - Analogue - Flying lead, length 1 m1)
 Persuasive - Male M16, 6 pole
price / performance ratio - Male M16, 8 pole
+ male M8, 4 pole
E 18.397.1/11.13
provided.
1)
141
Model code:
7
Stationary HLT 2 5 0 0 – L2 – XXX – XXX – XXXX – 000
5 = Profile
L2 = With magnet in position slide V
+ male M8, 4 pole
Signal output
ETC = EtherCAT
CAN = CANopen
PRO = Profibus
DVN = Device Net

Example
0150 = 150 mm
Modification
000 = Standard
Notes:
instrument.
Items supplied:
• HLT 2500-L2
• ZBL MS35-39, position magnet
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as position magnets and mounting material can be
found in the Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
E 18.397.1/11.13
142
Dimensions:
7
Rod length
Flying leads
adjustable
M5x20 DIN912 (4x)
Signal output: CANopen

5 pole male panel mount series
Device Net (C61) M12 A-coded

series M12 A-coded
Signal output: Profibus (P61) 5 pole male panel mount

series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-IN)

series M8

series M12 B-coded
(PROFIBUS-OUT)

Interface (S01):
12 pole Contact male
Signal output: EtherCAT (E51)

series M12 D-coded

series M8
Note:
E 18.397.1/11.13

143
7
144
E 18.397.1/11.13
7
Electronic
Distance Sensor
HLS 528

The distance sensor HLS 528 is a
Input data
non-contact, highly compact sensor
for measuring distances to fluids and Operating range 250; 350; 1300; 3400; 6000 mm
objects. Blind zone 0 .. 30; 0 .. 85; 0 ..200; 0 .. 350; 0 .. 600 mm
By definition, its functional principle Maximum range 350; 600; 2000; 5000; 8000 mm
(measurement of sound transmission Resolution ≤ 0.18 mm
time) means that it operates with Output data
an extremely high resolution and Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % of the latest measured value
measurement rate.
Repeatability ± 0.15 % of the latest measured value
The HLS 528 is available for measuring Versions 2 switch outputs 1 switch outp. +1 analog. outp. /
ranges up to 6000 mm and is available 2 switch outputs +
in three signal output versions 1 analogue output
(2 switching outputs; 1 analogue output, Analogue output (optional)
either 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V, plus 1 or
Signal; selectable 4 .. 20 mA,
2 switching outputs). RLmax = 100 Ω (UB ≤ 20 V)
(short-circuit resistant, invertible)
The sensor can be adjusted simply and RLmax = 500 Ω (UB > 20 V)
conveniently using two push-buttons
and a self-explanatory menu structure. 0 .. 10 V,
A 3-digit display indicates the latest RLmin = 100 kΩ (UB ≥ 18 V)
distance and 2 three-colour LEDs also Switch outputs
show the operating condition. Switching output 2 x PNP 1 x PNP
(short-circuit resistant) Imax = 2 x 200 mA Imax = 200 mA
2 x PNP
Imax = 2 x 200 mA
Special features: Switching direction N/O or N/C, adjustable
 Contact-free distance measurement Reaction time 50; 70; 110; 180; 240 ms
 Measurement range up to 6000 mm Environmental conditions
 Various signal output Operating temperature -25 °C .. +70 °C
versions available Storage temperature range -40 °C .. +85 °C
 Very high resolution and mark DIN EN 60947-5-2
measurement rate DIN EN 60947-5-7
 Integrated temperature compensation Protection class to EN 60529 IP 67
 3-digit display to show the latest Other data
distance Supply voltage 9 .. 30 V DC without analogue output
 2 three-colour LEDs to display 18 .. 30 V DC with analogue output
the operating status Time delay before availability < 300 ms
 Switching and switch-back points Residual ripple ± 10%
can be adjusted independently No-load current consumption ≤ 80 mA
 Selectable analogue output (optional) Electrical connection Male M12x1, 5 pole
 Only for use in depressurised Housing Brass, nickel-plated;
applications Ultrasonic transducer with PEEK film
Controls 2 push-buttons
Display 3-digit, LED-display, 2 three-colour-LEDs
Weight 150; 150; 150; 210; 270 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection are
provided.
E 18.383.1/11.13
145
Setting options: Operational scanning range 350 mm: Additional functions:
All the settings available on the  Switching mode of the switching
7 HLS 528 are grouped in two easy-to- outputs adjustable (switching point
navigate menus. function or window function)
In order to prevent unauthorised  Switching direction of the switching
adjustment of the instrument, a key-lock Plate
outputs adjustable (N/C or
can be set. N/O function)
 Switch-on delay adjustable from
Round bar
Ø 10 mm
0 to 20 seconds
Setting ranges of the  Energy saving mode
switching points and
switch-back hystereses: Pin connections:
Switching point function distance M12x1, 5 pole
Oper. Switching Hysteresis*
scanning point*
range 4 3
5
250 mm 30 .. 350 mm 1 .. 320 mm
350 mm 85 .. 600 mm 1 .. 515 mm
Operational scanning range 1300 mm: 1 2
1300 mm 200 .. 999 mm 1 .. 999 mm
100 .. 200 cm 100 .. 180 cm
3400 mm 350 .. 999 mm 1 .. 999 mm
100 .. 500 cm 100 .. 465 cm
6000 mm 600 .. 999 mm 1 .. 999 mm Plate
Pin HLS 528-2
100 .. 800 cm 100 .. 740 cm 1 +UB
Round bar
2 D1 (switching output 1)
Ø 27 mm
Window function distance

3 -UB (0 V)
Oper. Lower Upper
scanning switch value* switch value* 4 D2 (switching output 2)
range 5 Synchronisation
250 mm 30 .. 348 mm 32 .. 350 mm
350 mm 85 .. 598 mm 87 .. 600 mm
Pin HLS 528-3
1300 mm 200 .. 999 mm 202 .. 999 mm
100 .. 198 cm 100 .. 200 cm 1 +UB
3400 mm 350 .. 999 mm 352 .. 999 mm 2 Analogue
100 .. 498 cm 100 .. 500 cm
3 -UB (0 V)
6000 mm 600 .. 999 mm 602 .. 999 mm Operational scanning range 3400 mm:
100 .. 798 cm 100 .. 800 cm 4 D (switching output)
* The increment for all units is 1 mm or cm. 5 Synchronisation
Recording ranges
Plate
Pin HLS 528-5

(for different objects): Round bar
Ø 27 mm
1 +UB
The dark-grey areas specify the range in
which the normal reflector (round bar) is 2 Analogue
detected safely. This is the typical working 3 -UB (0 V)
range of the sensors. The light grey areas
illustrate the range in which a very large 4 D2 (switching output 2)
reflector, e.g. a very large plate, is still 5 D1 (switching output 1)
detected, provided it is aligned optimally
to the sensor. Ultrasonic reflections cannot
be evaluated outside the light grey area.
Operational scanning range 250 mm: Operational scanning range 6000 mm:
Plate Plate
Round bar Round bar

Ø 10 mm Ø 27 mm
E 18.383.1/11.13
146
Model code: Note:
HLS 5 2 8 - X - XXXX - 000 - F the operating conditions and applications 7
Mechanical connection described.
2 = M30x1.5 For applications or operating conditions
Electrical connection Subject to technical modifications.
Output

Operational scanning range in mm
0250; 0350; 1300, 3400, 6000
Modification number
000 = Standard
Type of protection, front face of sensor

F = Foil
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
Operational scanning range:
250 mm 350 mm,1300mm
Buttons
Buttons

3400 mm 6000 mm
Buttons Buttons

E 18.383.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
147
Electronic level sensors
In industry, level sensors are used for the most diverse tasks. In the main,
sensors which are based on capacitive, magnetostrictive or ultrasonic
measurement are used.
HYDAC ELECTRONIC has level sensors for each of these measurement
principles in its product range.
Electronic level switches for general applications:

Page
ENS 3000 (capacitive) 149
ENS 3000 IO-Link (capacitive) 153
HNS 3000 (magnetostrictive) 155
HNS 526 (based on ultrasound) 157
Electronic level measuring transmitter for general applications:
Page
HNT 1000 (magnetostrictive) 161
E 180.000.2 /11.13
148
Electronic
Level Switch
ENS 3000 8

The ENS 3000 is an electronic level Input data
switch with integrated display. The Sensor type Capacitive fluid level sensor
instrument has 1, 2 or 4 switching Probe lengths 250; 410; 520; 730 mm
outputs and an analogue output signal Active zone 170; 290; 390; 590 mm
is available as an option. Max. speed of change 40; 60; 80; 100 mm/s
in fluid level
In addition to the standard minimum Repeatability1) ≤ ± 2 % FS
and maximum switching signals, Switching point accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS
with the 4 switching output version it Temperature (optional)
is possible to set additional warning Sensor type Semiconductor sensor
signals to prevent problems such as Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
tank overflow or aeration of the pump. Accuracy ± 1.5 °C
The ENS 3000 can be used for oil as Reaction time (t90) 180 s
well as water. The fluid type can be Output data

selected for specific applications via the
With 1 or 2 SP selectable 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resistance ≤ 500 Ω
menu. 0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance ≥ 1 kΩ
The main applications of the ENS 3000 corresponds to measuring range selected
are primarily in hydraulics, e.g. for fluid With 4 SP (only with temperature sensor) 0 .. 10 V ohmic resistance ≥ 1 kΩ
level monitoring of a tank. corresponds to measuring range selected
Switch outputs
The ENS 3000 is available in standard Type PNP transistor output
probe lengths of 250 mm, 410 mm, programmable as N/O / N/C
520 mm and 730 mm. Assignment On version with temperature measurement,
The instrument is also available with user can select temperature or fluid level
Switching current 1 or 2 SP: max. 1.2 A per output
or without an integrated temperature 4 SP: max. 0.25 A per output
sensor. Switching cycles > 100 million
Compensated temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
Special features: Operating temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
 1, 2 or 4 independent PNP Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
transistor switching outputs Fluid temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
 Selectable for use with oil or water mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 User-selectable switch outputs Vibration resistance to ≤5g
based on the measured value DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
 Switching and switch-back points Shock resistance to ≤ 25 g
can be adjusted independently DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
 Selectable analogue output (optional) Other data
 4-digit display Max. tank pressure 0.5 bar (short-term 3 bar, t < 1 min)
 Simple to operate due to Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
menu-based key operation 18 .. 35 V DC with analogue output
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
and 2 analogue outputs
Fluids3) Hydraulic oils (mineral based),
synth. oils, fluids containing water
Parts in contact with medium Ceramic
E 18.061.4/11.13
Weight ~ 180; 220; 250; 300 g

1)
Specified for calm, non-turbulent fluid,
2)
3)
Other fluids on request
149
Setting options: Additional functions: Pin connections:
All settings available on the ENS 3000 are  Switching mode of the switching outputs
combined in 2 easy-to-navigate menus. adjustable (switching point function or
To prevent unauthorised adjustment of the window function) M12x1, 4 pole
instrument, a programming lock can be  Switching direction of the switching
set. outputs adjustable (N/C or N/O function)
 Switching outputs can be assigned to
Setting ranges of the fluid level or temperature, as required
switching points and  Switch-on and switch-off delay
switch-back hystereses: adjustable from 0.00 .. 9999
8 seconds
Fluid level switching point function  Display can be adjusted (actual fluid
Probe Meas. Switching Hysteresis level, actual temperature, peak values,
length range point switching point 1, 2, 3, 4 or display Pin ENS ENS
in cm in cm in cm * in cm * off)
3X16-2 3X16-3
25.0 17.0 0.3 .. 17.0 0.1 .. 16.8  Analogue output can be assigned to
fluid level or temperature as required 1 +UB +UB
41.0 29.0 0.5 .. 29.0 0.2 .. 28.7 (depending on model)
2 SP 2 Analogue
52.0 39.0 0.6 .. 39.0 0.2 .. 38.6
3 0V 0V
73.0 59.0 0.9 .. 59.0 0.3 .. 58.4
The increment for all units is 0.1 cm. 4 SP 1 SP 1
Fluid level window function M12x1, 5 pole

Probe Lower Upper
length switch switch value
value 4 3
in cm in cm * in cm * 5
25.0 0.3 .. 16.7 0.4 .. 16.8

1 2
41.0 0.5 .. 28.4 0.7 .. 28.7
52.0 0.6 . 38.3 0.9 .. 38.6
73.0 0.9 .. 57.9 1.4 .. 58.4
The increment for all units is 0.1 cm. Pin ENS
3X18-5
Fluid level offset function
1 +UB
Probe Meas. Offset
length range 2 Analogue
in cm in cm * in cm * 3 0V
25.0 17.0 0 .. 68.0 4 SP 1
41.0 29.0 0 .. 116.0 5 SP 2
52.0 39.0 0 .. 156.0
73.0 59.0 0 .. 177.0 M12x1, 8 pole
The increment for all units is 0.1 cm.
6 4
5
Temperature switching point function
7 3
Unit Meas. Switching Hysteresis 8
range point 1 2
°C -25 .. +100 -23.0 .. +100.0 1.0 .. 123.5

The increment for all units is 0.5 °C.
Temperature window function Pin ENS

Unit Lower Upper
3X1P-8
switch value switch value 1 +UB
°C -23.5 .. +97.5 -22.0 .. +98.5 2 SP 2
The increment for all units is 0.5 °C. 3 0V
4 SP 1
5 SP 3
* All ranges given in the table 6 SP 4
shown. 7 Analogue fluid level
8 Analogue temperature
E 18.061.4/11.13
150
Model code: Note:
ENS 3 X 1 X – X – XXXX – 000 – K the operating conditions and applications
described.
Temperature sensor For applications or operating conditions
1 = With temperature sensor not described, please contact the relevant
2 = Without temperature sensor technical department.
Mechanical connection Subject to technical modifications.
1 = 22 mm collar
to fit cutting ring coupling G22L
Electrical connection 8
only possible on output models "2" and "3"
only possible on output model "5"
P = Male M12x1, 8 pole
only possible on output model "8"
Output
8 = 4 switching outputs and 2 analogue outputs
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "P"
Probe length (physical) in mm
0250; 0410; 0520; 0730
Modification number
000 = Standard
Probe material
K = Ceramic
Note:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, etc. can be
found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
Rear view
dimension of contact M3 (earth screw M3
M12x1
Installation
and lock washer M3 supplied)
dimension
∅ 54
hex. SW27
Ø 29
Total length
Measuring range (upper end) Ø 25.1
Installation
dimension
Inactive zone
Ø 22 -0.2 ∅ 54
Probe length
Designation [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Inactive zone approx. approx. approx. approx. Installation

(lower end) 22 28 34 50 dimension
Inactive zone
∅ 54
(lower end)
Measuring 170 290 390 590

range
Probe length 250 410 520 730

Ø 15 ±0.4
Total length 340 500 610 820
Inactive zone approx. approx. approx. approx.

(upper end) 33 67 71 65
E 18.061.4/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
151
8
152
E 18.061.4/11.13
Electronic
Level Switch
ENS 3000 8

The ENS 3000 with IO-Link Input data
communication interface is an electronic Sensor type Capacitive level sensor
level switch with integrated display. Probe length 250; 410; 520; 730 mm
The instrument has a switching output Measuring range 170; 290; 390; 590 mm
and additional output that can be Max. speed of change in the fluid level 40; 60; 80; 100 mm/s
configured as switching or analogue Repeatability1) ≤ ± 2 % FS
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). The ENS 3000 Switching point accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS
Temperature (optional)
can be used not only for oil but also for
Sensor type Semi-conductor sensor
water and is available with or without
Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
temperature sensor. Accuracy ± 1.5 °C
Compared with the standard Reaction time (t90) 180 s
version, the IO-Link interface Output data
enables bidirectional communication Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
between the device and the control. Output 2: can be configured as PNP transistor
Parameterisation and cyclical switching output or analogue output
Analogue output
transmission of process and service
selectable: 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 Ω
data is therefore possible. Signal
0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 kΩ
The level switch series ENS 3000 corresponds to measuring range selected
with communication interface IO-Link Switch outputs
according to specification V1.1 has Type PNP transistor switching output
been specially designed to connect Assignment On version with temperature measurement
sensors in automation systems. user-selectable temperature or fluid level
Switching current max. 250 mA per output
machine tools, handling and assembly Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface,
automation, intralogistics or the with HYDAC programming device HPG 3000 or
packaging industry. push buttons on the ENS 3000
Compensated temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
Special features: Operating temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
 IO-Link interface Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
 1 PNP transistor output Fluid temperature range 0 .. +60 °C
- mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Additional signal output, Vibration resistance according to ≤5g
can be configured as PNP transistor DIN EN 60068-2-6 (0 .. 500 Hz)
switching output or analogue output Shock resistance according to ≤ 25 g
 Selectable for use with oil or water DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms)
 4-digit display Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
 Display rotates in two axes for optimal Max. tank pressure 0.5 bar (short-term 3 bar, t < 1 min)
alignment Supply voltage 9 .. 35 V DC without analogue output
and analogue output
Fluids2) Hydraulic oils (mineral based),
synth. oils, fluids containing water
Parts in contact with medium Ceramic
E 18.061.1.0/11.13
Weight 180 .. 300 g, dependent on the probe length

Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
provided.
1)
Specified for calm, non-turbulent fluid
2)
153
ENS 3000 as well as the menu structure Cycle time 2.5 ms
VDMA Standard for level switches. Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
Measuring Lower Upper limit of http://www.hydac.com/de-en/service/downloads-software-on-request/
8 range/ limit of SP / FH
probe length RP / FL
in cm in cm in cm Model code:
17.0 / 25.0 0.2 / 0.3 17.0 / 16.8 ENS 3 X 1 6 – L – XXXX – 000 –K
29.0 / 41.0 0.3 / 0.5 29.0 / 28.7
39.0 / 52.0 0.4 / 0.6 39.0 / 38.6 Temperature sensor
59.0 / 73.0 0.6 / 0.9 59.0 / 58.4 1 = With temperature sensor
2 = Without temperature sensor
range betw. RP & SP 1 = Collar Ø 22
and FL & FH Electrical connection
in cm in cm in cm 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
17.0 / 25.0 0.1 / 0.1 0.1 (connector not supplied)
29.0 / 41.0 0.2 / 0.2 0.1 Output
39.0 / 52.0 0.2 / 0.3 0.1 L = IO-Link interface
59.0 / 73.0 0.3 / 0.5 0.1
Probe length, physical
* All ranges given in the table 0250; 0410; 0520; 0730 mm
are adjustable by the increments Modification number
shown. 000 = Standard
SP = switch point
RP = switch-back point Probe material
FL = level window lower value K = Ceramic
FH = level window upper value Notes:
Additional functions: technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
 Switching mode of the switching outputs Accessories:
adjustable (switching point function or Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical connection
window function) adaptors, splash guards, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
 Switching outputs can be assigned to the Dimensions:
fluid level or temperature
 Switch-on and switch-off delay M12x1 Rear view
Dimension of contact M3 (earth
Ø 42
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds installation
dimension
screw M3 and lock washer
 Optional analogue output signal to Ø 54

4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
 Analogue output can be assigned to fluid
level or temperature as required
M3 supplied)
(depending on version)
Pin connections: hex. SW27

Total length
Ø 29
Ø 25.1
M12x1, 4 pole
Inactive zone
Ø 22 -0.2
(upper end)
L+
IO-Link
1 C/Q
2 4
Probe length
Designation [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

Measuring range
3
L- (lower end) 22 28 34 50
Standard IO
Measuring
I/Q 170 290 390 590
range
Probe length 250 410 520 730
Inactive zone
(lower end)
Total length 340 500 610 820

1 L+ Supply voltage Ø 15 ±0.4 (upper end) 33 67 71 65
analogue output
3 L- Gnd Note:
4 C/Q IO-Link communication / The information in this brochure relates to
E 18.061.1.0/11.13
switching output (SP1) the operating conditions and applications

154
Electronic
Level Switch
HNS 3000 8
Description: technical data:

The HNS 3000 is an electronic level Input data
switch with integrated display. Sensor type Magnetostrictive
The float-based sensor for high- Measuring ranges 178; 208; 298; 338; 448; 658 mm
precision analogue monitoring of Probe length1) 250; 280; 370; 410; 520; 730 mm
the fluid level has 1, 2 or 4 switching Max. speed of change in fluid level Optional
outputs and an analogue output signal
Repeatability2) ≤ ± 1 % FS
is available as an option.
Switching point accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS
In addition to the conventional minimum Temperature (optional)
and maximum switching signal, with Sensor type Semi-conductor sensor
the 4 output version it is possible to set
Measuring range -25 °C .. +100 °C
additional warning signals to prevent
Accuracy ± 1.5 °C
problems such as tank overflow or
Reaction time (t90) < 100 s
aeration of the pump.
Output data
The main applications of this HNS 3000 Analogue output (optional)
are primarily in hydraulics, e.g. for fluid
With 1 or 2 SP selectable 4 .. 20 mA load resistance ≤ 500 Ω
level monitoring of a tank. 0 .. 10 V load resistance ≥ 1 kΩ
The sensor is available in probe lengths corresponds to measurement range selected
from 250 to 2500 mm. The instrument With 4 SP (only with temperature sensor) 0 .. 10 V load resistance ≥ 1kΩ
is also available with or without corresponds to measurement range selected
temperature sensor. Switch outputs
Depending on the application, several Type PNP transistor output
different floats are available, e.g. programmable as N/O / N/C
stainless steel for aggressive media or Assignment On version with temperature measurement
user-selectable temperature or fluid level
plastic.
Switching current 1 or 2 SP: max. 1.2 A per output
4 SP: max. 0.25 A per output
Special features: Switching cycles > 100 million
z 1, 2 or 4 independent PNP transistor Environmental conditions
switching outputs Max. tank pressure 3 bar (short-term 10 bar, t < 1 min)
z User-selectable switch outputs Operating temperature range -40 .. +85°C
based on the measured value Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
z Switching and switch-back points Fluid temperature range -40 .. +120 °C
can be adjusted independently - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Vibration resistance to 7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)
z Selectable analogue output available
DIN EN 60068-2-6 2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
as an option
Shock resistance to 20 g (11ms)
z 4-digit display DIN EN 60068-2-27
z Various types of float available Protection class to IEC 60529 IP67
other data
Supply voltage (UB) 9 .. 35 V DC (without analogue output)
Current consumption (without output) ≤ 150 mA
Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤ 250 mV
Fluids Hydraulic oils, cooling lubricants
Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel (1.4301 / 1.4571)
Float PP (polypropylene); 0.6 kg/dm3
E 18.061.2.0/11.13
Weight (dependent on the probe length) ~ 1000 g

1)
Other probe lengths on request
2)
155
Pin connections: Model code:
M12x1, 4 pole HNS 3 X X X – X – XXXX – 000
Temperature sensor
1 = With temperature sensor
2 = G3/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
8 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
only for output models "2" and "3"
Pin HNS 3X26-2 HNS 3X26-3 possible only for output model "5"
P = Male M12x1, 8 pole
1 +UB +UB
only for output model "8"
2 SP 2 Analogue
Output
3 0V 0V 2 = 2 switching outputs
4 SP 1 SP 1 only in conjunction with electrical connection type "6"
M12x1, 5 pole 5 = 2 switching outputs and 1 analogue output
only in conjunction with electrical connection code type "8"
8 = 4 switching outputs and 2 analogue outputs
4 3
only in conjunction with electrical connection type "P"
5 Probe length (physical) in mm
0250; 0280; 0370; 0410; 0520; 0730
1 2 Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Pin HNS 3X28-5 the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
1 +UB Accessories:
2 Analogue Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, splash guards, etc. can be
3 0V found in the Accessories brochure.
4 SP 1
5 SP 2
Dimensions:
M12x1
M12x1, 8 pole
6 4
5
7 3 Ø 44
8
1 2
SW 32
16
38
G 3/4 A
100 %
Pin HNS 3X2P-8
1 +UB
2 SP 2
Probe length
3 0V
4 SP 1
5 SP 3 Immersion depth
6 SP 4 at density 1
7 Analogue level 0%
50
8 Analogue temperature
34
Ø 23.5
Note:
E 18.061.2.0/11.13

156
Electronic
Level Switch
HNS 526 8

The level switch HNS 526 is a non-
Input data
contact, highly compact sensor for
fluid level measurement in stationary Operating range 280; 480; 1600; 4000; 6400 mm
applications. Blind zone 0 .. 30; 0 .. 85; 0 .. 200; 0 .. 350; 0 .. 600 mm
By definition, its functional principle Maximum range 350; 600; 2000; 5000; 8000 mm
(measurement of sound transmission Resolution ≤ 0.18 mm
time) means that it operates with Output data
an extremely high resolution and Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % of the actual measured value
measurement rate.
Repeatability ± 0.15 % of the actual measured value
The HNS 526 is available for
measurement ranges up to 6400 mm
and is obtainable in different signal Signal selectable:
(short-circuit resistant) 4 .. 20 mA, RLmax = 100 Ω (UB ≤ 20 V)
output variants (2 switching outputs;
1 switching output and 1 analogue RLmax = 500 Ω (UB > 20 V)
output, either 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V).
0 .. 10 V, RLmin = 100 kΩ (UB ≥ 20 V)
The sensor can be adjusted simply
Switch outputs
and conveniently via two push-buttons
and a self-explanatory menu structure Type PNP transistor output (short-circuit resistant)
according to VDMA. Switching current max. 200 mA per switching output
The actual fluid level can be displayed in Switching direction N/O or N/C, adjustable
a 3-digit digital display either in absolute Switching cycles > 100 million
value or in percent (selectable); Reaction time 32; 64; 92; 172; 240 ms
2 three-colour LEDs also indicate the Environmental conditions
operating status.
Operating temperature -25 °C .. +70 °C
Storage temperature range -40 °C .. +85 °C
mark DIN EN 60947-5-2
DIN EN 60947-5-7
Vibration resistance to ≤2g
Special features: DIN EN 60068-2-6 (10 .. 55 Hz)
 Non-contact distance measurement
 Measurement range up to 6400 mm DIN EN 60068-2-27 (11 ms)
 Various signal output Protection class to EN 60529 IP 67
versions available Other data
 Very high resolution and Supply voltage 9 .. 30 V DC without analogue output
measurement rate 20 .. 30 V DC with analogue output
 Integrated temperature compensation Time delay before availability < 300 ms
 3-digit digital display to show Residual ripple ± 10%
the actual distance No-load current consumption ≤ 80 mA
 2 three-colour LEDs to display Electrical connection Male M12x1, 4 pole
the operating status Housing Brass, nickel-plated;
 Switching and switch-back points Ultrasonic transducer with PEEK film
can be adjusted independently Controls 2 push-buttons
 Selectable analogue output (optional) Display 3-digit, LED-display, 2 three-colour-LEDs
 Only for use in depressurised Weight 150; 150; 150; 210; 270 g
applications
 Must be installed vertically to the fluid Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection are
E 18.604.0/11.13
provided.
surface
157
Setting options: Operational scanning range 480 mm: Additional functions:
All the terms and symbols used for  Switching mode of the switching
setting the HNS 526 as well as the menu outputs adjustable (switching
structure comply with the specifications point function or window function)
of the German Engineering Federation  Switching direction of the switching
Standard (VDMA 24574-4) for level Plate outputs adjustable
switches. (N/C or N/O function)
In order to prevent unauthorised Round bar  Switch-on delay adjustable from
adjustment of the device, a key-lock can
Ø 27 mm
0 to 20 seconds
be set.  Energy saving mode
8 Setting ranges of the
switching points Pin connections:
or switch-back points:
M12x4, 4 pole
Switching point function distance and
window function distance
Oper. SP1, SP2, RP1, RP2,
scanning FH1, FH2 * FL1, FL2*
range
280 mm 2 .. 32 cm 1 .. 31 cm Operational scanning range 1600 mm:
2 .. 13 inch 1 .. 12 inch
480 mm 2 .. 59 cm 1 .. 58 cm
2 .. 23 inch 1 .. 22 inch
1600 mm 2 .. 180 cm 1 .. 179 cm
2 .. 71 inch 1 .. 70 inch Pin HNS 526-2 HNS 526-3
Plate
4000 mm 2 .. 465 cm 1 .. 464 cm 1 +UB +UB

2 .. 183 inch 1 .. 182 inch Round bar
Ø 27 mm 2 SP2 I/U
6400 mm 2 .. 740 cm 1 .. 739 cm
2 .. 291 inch 1 .. 290 inch 3 0V 0V
4 SP1 SP1
Switching point function:
SP1, SP2 = switching points 1 or 2
RP1, RP2 = switch-back points 1 or 2
Window function.
FH1, FH2 = upper switch values 1 or 2
FL1, FL2 = lower switch values 1 or 2
* The increment for all devices is 1 cm or
1 inch.
Operational scanning range 4000 mm:
Plate
Round bar
Ø 27 mm
Recording ranges
(for different objects):
The grey areas show the detection range
for a very large reflector, e.g. a fluid
surface, providing the sensor is ideally
positioned. Outside the grey area, it is
not possible to evaluate the ultrasonic
reflections.
Operational scanning range 280 mm: Operational scanning range 6400 mm:
Plate Plate
Round bar
Round bar
Ø 11 mm
Ø 27 mm
E 18.604.0/11.13
158
Model code: Note:
HNS 5 2 6 - X - XXXX - 000 - F the operating conditions and applications
Mechanical connection described.
2 = M30x1.5 For applications or operating conditions
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole Subject to technical modifications.
8
Output

Operational scanning range in mm
0280; 0480; 1600, 4000, 6400
Modification number
000 = Standard
Design, front face of sensor

F = Foil
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
280 mm 480 mm,1600 mm
Buttons
Buttons
51
84

4000 mm 6400 mm
Buttons Buttons

E 18.604.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
159
8
160
E 18.604.0/11.13
Electronic
Level Transmitter
HNT 1000 8

The level transmitter HNT 1000 is a Input data
float-based sensor for highly accurate Sensor type magnetostrictive
analogue recording of fluid levels. Measuring ranges 178; 208; 298; 338; 448; 658 mm
The sensor is available in probe lengths Probe length1) 250; 280; 370; 410; 520; 730 mm
from 250 to 2500 mm. HYDAC offers Max. speed of change in fluid level No orientation restrictions
the HNT 1000 in a pressure-resistant Output data
stainless steel housing for in-tank Output signal 4 .. 20 mA load ≤ 500 Ω
installation. 0 .. 10 V load ≥ 1 kΩ
Depending on the application, a variety Accuracy to DIN 16086 2) ≤ ± 1 % FS
of different floats are available, e.g. Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS
stainless steel for aggressive media or to DIN 16086
plastic. Repeatability ≤ ± 1 % FS
The output signals enable connection Hysteresis ≤ ± 1 % FS
to all HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH Rise time ≤ 30 ms
measurement and control devices Environmental conditions
as well as connection to standard Max. tank pressure 3 bar (short-term 10 bar, t < 1 min)
evaluation systems (e.g. PLC controls). Operating temperature range -40 .. +85 °C
Special features: mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Probe lengths from 200 to 2500 mm
Vibration resistance to 7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)
 Process connection: DIN EN 60068-2-6 2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
G3/4 A threaded connection Shock resistance to 20 g (11ms)
 High degree of accuracy DIN EN 60068-2-27
 Very robust housing Protection class to IEC 60529 IP67
 Highly resistant to shock and Other data
vibration Supply voltage (UB) 9 .. 36 V DC
 Various float variants available Fluids Hydraulic oils, cooling lubricants
Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel (1.4301 / 1.4571)
Float PP (polypropylene); 0.6 kg/dm3
Weight (dependent on probe and cable lengths) ~ 1000 g
1)
Other probe lengths on request
2)
E 18.604.1.0/11.13
161
M12x1, 4 pole HNT 1 2 2 X – X – XXXX – 000
Temperature sensor
2 = G 3/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
1 = Flying lead, 2 m
8 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
Output
Pin HNT 1226 B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
1 +UB C = 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
2 n.c. Probe length (physical) in mm
3 0V 0250; 0280; 0370; 0410; 0520; 0730
4 Signal Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
M12x1, 5 pole Special models on request.
4 3 Accessories:
5 Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found
in the Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
1 2
Dimensions:
Ø 44
Pin HNT 1228 Male connector
M12x1, 4 pole M12x1
Ø 44
1 +UB
2 n.c. SW 32 SW 32
3 0V
4 Signal
16
16
5 n.c.
38
38
G 3/4 A G 3/4 A
100 % 100 %
Cable outlet
Probe length
Probe length
Immersion depth Immersion depth

at density 1 at density 1
0% 0%
50
50
34
34
Ø 23.5
Core HNT 1221 Ø 23.5
brown +UB
white 0V
green Signal
yellow n.c.
Note:
E 18.604.1.0/11.13

162
E 18.604.1.0/11.13
8
163
FLOw RATE TRANSMITTERS
FLOw SwITCHES
To measure the flow rate in machines and systems HYDAC ELECTRONIC
offers various flow rate transmitters and flow switches.
The flow rate transmitter of the EVS 3000 series operates according to
the turbine principle (measuring the rpm of an impeller rotating in the fluid
flow). Depending on the model, additional connection ports are available for
pressure and/or temperature transmitters.
The HYDAC flow switches and transmitters in the HFS 2000 and
HFT 2000 series are based on the variable area float principle. The
test medium deflects a spring-loaded float in the direction of the flow,
depending on the flow rate. A reed contact is attached to the outside of the
instrument. When the magnet inside the float reaches the preset position,
the reed contact will switch.
9
Electronic flow rate transmitters for general
applications:
Page
EVS 3110 165
EVS 3100 167
Electromechanical flow switches and transmitters for general applications:
Page
HFS 2100 169
HFS 2500 173
HFT 2100 177
HFT 2500 181
Further flow rate transmitters for special applications can be found in the
section "Service Instruments".
Flow rate
EVS 3100
HFS 2100
HFS 2500
EVS 3110
HFT 2100
HFT 2500
sensors,
flow
switches
Accuracy (max. error) 2 2 10 5 10 3

Pressure-resistant ü ü ü ü ü ü
Water-based media ü ü ü
Oil / viscous fluids ü ü ü
Direction of flow optional ü ü
Installation position optional ü ü ü ü ü ü
Max. number of switching
contacts
2 2
Analogue output ü ü ü ü
Display ü ü
E 180.000.2 /11.13
ATEX Intrinsically safe ü ü

note:
Not all feature combinations are possible. For precise information, please consult the relevant data
sheet.
164
Electronic
Flow Rate Transmitter
EVS 3110
for Water-Based Fluids

The flow rate transmitters in the Input data
EVS 3110 series (stainless steel Measuring ranges1) and operating pressure
series) are specially designed for use EVS 311X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min 400 bar
in hydraulic and other fluid technology
EVS 311X-A-0060 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min 400 bar
systems.
EVS 311X-A-0300 15.0 .. 300.0 l/min 400 bar
They operate according to the turbine
principle, i.e. the speed of an impeller EVS 311X-A-0600 40.0 .. 600.0 l/min 400 bar
turning in the fluid flow is measured Additional connection options 2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure and/
and converted into a 4 ... 20 mA or temperature sensors
analogue signal. Output data
On the EVS 3110 stainless steel Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
range, the impeller has a carbide
bearing and the resulting increased Accuracy ≤ 2 % of the actual value
robustness also makes it suitable Environmental conditions
for use in pulsating, dynamic Compensated temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
applications. Operating temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
Two further G1/4 threaded holes Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
in the turbine housing allow Fluid temperature range -20 .. +90 °C
additional devices to be connected, mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
e.g. temperature and pressure Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Binder 714 M18)
transmitters. IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
is used)
Other data
Special features: Housing material Stainless steel
 Suitable for pressures up to 400 bar Test medium2) Water-based fluids
 Viscosities of 1 .. 100 cSt Viscosity range 1 .. 100 cSt
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Calibration viscosity 5 cSt
 Additional connection of Supply voltage 10 .. 32 V DC
temperature and / or Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
pressure transmitters possible Weight ~ 1790 g ( 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min)
~ 2100 g ( 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min)
~ 3320 g (15.0 .. 300.0 l/min)
~ 3500 g (40.0 .. 600.0 l/min)
1)
Note: Other measuring ranges on request
2)
E 18.313.3/11.13
165
EVS 3 1 1 X – A – XXXX – 000
Housing material
1 = Stainless steel
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Pin EVS 3114-A
1 reserved
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min 2 Signal +
9 0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min 3 Signal -
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min 4 reserved
Modification number
M12x1
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Pin EVS 3116-A
1 Signal +
2 reserved
3 Signal -
4 reserved
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

male electr. conn. 4 pole
Binder series 714 4 pole
Note:
described.
Model Meas. L H D / SW G Torque DN
range value not described, please contact the relevant
[l/min] [mm] [mm] [mm] [Nm] [mm] technical department.
EVS 311X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20 117 135 47 / 46 G¼" 60 7
E 18.313.3/11.13

EVS 311X-A-0060 6 .. 60 144 135 48.5 / 46 G½" 130 11 Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
EVS 311X-A-0300 15 .. 300 155 150 63.5 / 60 G1¼" 500 22 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
EVS 311X-A-0600 40 .. 600 181 150 63.5 / 60 G1½" 600 30 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
166
Electronic
EVS 3100
for Oils / Viscous Fluids

The flow rate transmitters of the Input data
EVS 3100 series (aluminium series) Measuring ranges1) and operating pressure
are specially designed for use in EVS 310X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min 400 bar
hydraulic and other fluid technology
EVS 310X-A-0060 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min 400 bar
systems.
EVS 310X-A-0300 15.0 .. 300.0 l/min 400 bar
They operate according to the turbine
principle, i.e. the speed of an impeller EVS 310X-A-0600 40.0 .. 600.0 l/min 315 bar
turning in the fluid flow is measured Additional connection options 2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure and/
and converted into a 4 ... 20 mA or temperature sensors
analogue signal. Output data
Two further G1/4 threaded holes Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
in the turbine housing allow
additional units to be connected, Accuracy ≤ 2 % of the actual value
e.g. temperature and pressure Environmental conditions
transmitters. Compensated temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
 Pressure resistant to 400 bar mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
(depending on model) Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Binder 714 M18)
 Viscosities of 1 .. 100 cSt IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA is used)
 Additional connection of Other data
temperature and / or Housing material Aluminium
pressure transmitters possible Measuring medium2) Hydraulic oils
Viscosity range 1 .. 100 cSt
Calibration viscosity 30 cSt
Weight ~ 730 g ( 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min)
~ 860 g ( 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min)
~ 1410 g (15.0 .. 300.0 l/min)
~ 1530 g (40.0 .. 600.0 l/min)
1)
Note: Other measuring ranges on request
2)
E 18.331.2/11.13
167
EVS 3 1 0 X – A – XXXX – 000
Housing material
0 = Aluminium
Signal
A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor Pin EVS 3104-A
1 reserved
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min 2 Signal +
9 0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min 3 Signal -
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min 4 reserved
Modification number
M12x1
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Pin EVS 3106-A
1 Signal +
2 reserved
3 Signal -
4 reserved
Dimensions:

Binder series 714 4 pole
4 pole
Note:
described.
range value not described, please contact the relevant
[l/min] [mm] [mm] [mm] [Nm] [mm] technical department.
EVS 310X-A-0020 1.2 .. 20 117 135 47 / 46 G¼" 60 7
E 18.331.2/11.13

EVS 310X-A-0060 6 .. 60 144 135 48.5 / 46 G½" 130 11 Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
EVS 310X-A-0300 15 .. 300 155 150 63.5 / 60 G1¼" 500 22 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
EVS 310X-A-0600 40 .. 600 181 150 63.5 / 60 G1½" 600 30 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
168
Electro-mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2100

The HYDAC flow switches of the Input data
HFS 2100 series are based on a variable Switching ranges [l/min] Size 1 Size 2
area float principle and are position- 0.5 .. 1.6 0.5 .. 1.5
independent. The test medium deflects
0.8 .. 3.0 1 .. 4
a spring-loaded float in the direction of
flow, depending on the flow rate. A reed 2.0 .. 7.0 2 .. 8
contact is fitted to the outside of the 3 .. 10
device and is therefore separate from 5 .. 15
the flow circuit. When the magnet inside 8 .. 24
the float reaches the preset position, the 10 .. 30
reed contact will switch. 15 .. 45
To protect it from external influences, 20 .. 60
the switch is encapsulated in a casing 30 .. 90
designed to allow steplessly variable 35 .. 110
adjustment. Operating pressure
The instruments are designed to be Brass version 300 bar 250 bar
capable of monitoring threshold values Stainless steel version 350 bar 300 bar
reliably, even when the viscosity Pressure drop [bar] 0.02 .. 0.2 0.02 .. 0.4
fluctuates. The kinematic viscosity may
Mechanical connection See dimensions
vary between 30 and 600 cSt.
The main areas of application are: Parts in contact with medium
Brass version Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Brass,
- Central lubrication systems (nickel-pl.); Brass; Hard ferrite
- Oil circuit lubrication systems Stainless steel version Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
- Transformers Output data
- Cooling systems and circuits Switching outputs2) 1 or 2 reed contacts
- Lubrication circuits Change-over or N/O type
- Hydraulic systems Accuracy3) ≤ ± 10 % FS
- Pumps
Repeatability 2 % FS max.
- Welding machines and laser systems
Switching capacity
- Chemical industry
- Research & development Change-over contact 4) max. max.
Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA
Male connection M12x1 125 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA 250 V / 1.5 A / 50 VA
Medium: N/O contact max. max.
 Oils / viscous fluids Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 230 V / 3 A / 60 VA 250 V / 3 A / 100 VA
Male connection M12x1 125 V / 3 A / 60 VA 250 V / 3 A / 100 VA
 Accuracy ≤ ± 10 % FS Operating temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
 Viscosity compensation from Fluid temperature range
30 .. 600 cSt Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) -20 .. +120 °C (optional -20 .. +160 °C)
 Any mounting position Male connection M12x1 -20 .. +85 °C
 High level of functional reliability
mark Directive 2006 / 95 / EC
 High level of switching accuracy Directive 2004 / 108 / EC
 Stepless switch point setting by user Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
 High pressure resistance Other data
 Threaded connection Housing material Brass (nickel-pl.) or stainl. steel 1.4571
Electrical connection Male connection EN175301-803
 ATEX version also available for (DIN 43650)
potentially explosive areas. Male connection M12x1
E 18.379.1/11.13
Note: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range

1)
Other seal materials available on request
2)
The contact opens / switches when the flow falls below the pre-set switching point.
3)
3% possible when calibrated to a certain viscosity
4)
Minimum load 3 VA
169
HFS 2 1 X X – XX – XXXX–XXXX – 7 – X – X – 000
Measuring principle EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
2 = Variable area float
Measuring medium
1 = Oils / viscous fluids
Mechanical
connection 4) 5)
1 = 1/4 “
2 = 3/8 “
3 = 1/2 “
4 = 3/4 “
5 = 1 “ Pin HFS 21X5-XS HFS 21X5-XW
Electrical connection 1 Centre Centre
5 = Male EN175301-803 2 N/O contact N/C contact
(DIN 43650)
9 3 n.c. N/O contact
3 pole + PE,
(connector supplied) ┴ Housing Housing
6 = Male M12x1, 4-pole
Switching contacts 6) M12x1
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
1W = 1 Change-over contact
2W = 2 Change-over contacts
Switching ranges in l/min 5)
Oil 10 % -Size 1-
00.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0
Oil 10 % -Size 2-
00.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010;
0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045; Pin HFS 21X6-XS HFS 21X6-XW
0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110 1 Centre Centre
Accuracy 2 n.c. N/C contact
7 = ≤ ± 10.0 % FS
3 n.c. n.c.
Housing material
B = Brass, nickel-plated 4 N/O contact N/O contact
S = Stainless steel
Mechanical indicator
0 = Without indicator
1 = With indicator Notes on installation:
Modification number  The medium must not contain
000 = Standard solid particles! We recommend
using contamination strainers.
4) Mechanical connection options depend on housing type
(see Dimensions)
 External magnetic fields can affect the
switching contact.
5) Other models available on request.
Ensure sufficient distance from
6) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is fitted
on the side of the instrument, at 90° to the first contact. magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
motors)!
Note:
Accessories:
E 18.379.1/11.13
170
Dimensions without indicator:
G
OIL -Size 1- without indicator
Type Installation dimensions Weight
(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L
8 24 1/4“ 98 400
L
0.5 .. 1.6 10 24 3/8“ 108 450
15 27 1/2“ *) 90 350
0.8 .. 3.0
15 27 1/2“ 90 350
2.0 .. 7.0
*)
Standard
G 9
SW
OIL -Size 2- without indicator
Type Installation Weight
dimensions (approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L T
0.5 .. 1.5 8 34 1/4“ 152 10 1500

15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1425
1 .. 4 20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1340
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1160
2 .. 8
3 .. 10 15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1425
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1340
5 .. 15 25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1160
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1340
15 .. 45
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1160
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
25 40 1“ 130 17 1160
35 .. 110
*)
Standard
E 18.379.1/11.13
171
Dimensions with indicator:
OIL -Size 1- with indicator

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L
L
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0 15 30 1/2“ 90 570
2.0 .. 7.0
OIL -Size 2- with indicator

[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L T
0.5 .. 1.5 8 34 1/4“ 152 10 1590

15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1515
1 .. 4 20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1430
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1250
2 .. 8
3 .. 10 15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1515
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1430
5 .. 15 25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1250
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1430
15 .. 45
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1250
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
25 40 1“ 130 17 1250
35 .. 110
*)
Standard
Note:
E 18.379.1/11.13

applications described. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
relevant technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
172
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2500
for Water or Water-Based Media

The HYDAC Flow Switch in the series Input data
HFS 2500 is based on the variable area Switching ranges [l/min] 5 % accuracy 10 % accuracy
float principle. The test medium deflects Size 1 Size 2 Size 3
a spring-loaded float in the direction of 0.2 .. 4.0 8 .. 90 0.005..0.06 0.02 .. 0.2 10 .. 30
flow, depending on the flow rate. A reed 0.6 .. 5.0 5 .. 110 0.04 .. 0.13 0.2 .. 0.6 15 .. 45
contact is fitted to the outside of the 0.5 .. 8.0 10 .. 150 0.1 .. 0.6 0.4 .. 1.8 20 .. 60
instrument and is therefore separate
1 .. 14 35 .. 220 0.2 .. 1.2 0.8 .. 3.2 30 .. 90
from the flow circuit. When the magnet
inside the float reaches the pre-set 1 .. 28 35 .. 250 0.4 .. 2.0 2 .. 7 60 .. 150
position, the reed contact will switch. 2 .. 40 0.5 .. 3.0 3 .. 13
To protect it from external influences, 4 .. 55 1.0 .. 5.0 4 .. 20
the switch is encapsulated in a casing 1 .. 70 8 .. 30
designed to allow steplessly variable Operating pressure
adjustment. Brass version 200 bar 300 bar 300 bar 250 bar
The instruments in the HFS 2500 series Stainless steel version 300 bar 350 bar 350 bar 300 bar
are available in two versions, with 5% Pressure drop [bar] 0.02 .. 0.8 0.02 .. 0.2 0.02 .. 0.3 0.02 .. 0.4
accuracy and with 10% accuracy. Mechanical connection See dimensions
Areas of application are to monitor flow
Parts in contact with medium
rate in fluids (water / water-based) in the Brass version Stainless steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass; nickel-plated; Brass;
following areas, amongst others: Hard ferrite
- Cooling systems and circuits Stainless steel version Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
- Hydraulic systems Output data
- Pumps Switching outputs 2) 1 or 2 reed contacts
- Welding machines and laser systems Change-over or N/O type 2)
- Medical technology Accuracy ≤ ± 5 % or ≤ ± 10 % FS
- Pharmaceutical industry Repeatability 2 % FS max.
- Chemical industry Switching capacity
- Research & development Change-over contact 3) max. max. max. max.
Male connection - 250 V - 200 V - 250 V - 250 V
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) - 1.5 A -1A - 1.5 A - 1.5 A
Fluid: - 50 VA - 20 VA - 50 VA - 50 VA
 Water / water-based media Male connection M12x1 max. max. max. max.
- 250 V - 125 V - 125 V - 250 V
- 1.5 A -1A - 1.5 A - 1.5 A
Special features: - 50 VA - 20 VA - 50 VA - 50 VA
 Accuracy ≤ ± 5 % or ≤ ± 10 % FS N/O contact max. max. max. max.
 Any mounting position Male connection - 250 V - 200 V - 230 V - 250 V
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) -3A -1A -3A -3A
 High level of function reliability - 100 VA - 20 VA - 60 VA - 100 VA
 High level of switching accuracy Male connection M12x1 max. max. max. max.
 Stepless switch point setting by user - 250 V - 125 V - 125 V - 250 V
-3A -1A -3A -3A
 High pressure resistance - 100 VA - 20 VA - 60 VA - 100 VA
 Threaded connection Environmental Conditions
 ATEX version also available Operating temperature range -20 .. + 70 °C
for potentially explosive atmospheres Fluid temperature range
Male connection
Note: FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) -20 .. +100 °C (optional -20 .. +160 °C)
range
1) Other seal materials available on request
Male connection M12x1 -20 .. +85 °C
2) The contact opens / switches when the flow falls Directive 2006 / 95 / EC
mark
below the pre-set switching point. Directive 2004 / 108 / EC
E 18.384.1/11.13
3) Minimum load 3 VA
Other data
Housing material Brass (nickel-plated) or stainless steel 1.4571
Electrical connection Male connection EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Male connection M12x1
173
HFS 2 5 X X – XX – XXXX–XXXX – X – X – X – 000
Measuring principle EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Test medium
5 = Water or
water-based
Mechanical
connection 4)5)
1 = 1/4 "
2 = 3/8 "
3 = 1/2 "
4 = 3/4 " Pin HFS 25X5-XS HFS 25X5-XW
5 = 1 "
6 = 1 1/4 " 1 Centre Centre
7 = 1 1/2 " 2 N/O contact N/C contact
9 Electrical connection
3 n.c. N/O contact
5 = Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650) ┴ Housing Housing
3 pole + PE
6 = Male M12x1, 4-pole M12x1
Switching contacts 6)
1S = 1 N/O contact
2S = 2 N/O contacts
1W = 1 Change-over contact
Switching ranges in l/min 5)
Water 5 %
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0;
01.0-0014; 01.0-0028; 02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150; Pin HFS 25X6-XS HFS 25X6-XW
0035-0220; 0035-0250; 1 Centre Centre
==================================== 2 n.c. N/C contact
Water 10 % - Size 1 - (only available without mech. indicator)
3 n.c. n.c.
.005-0.06; 0.04-0.13; 00.1-00.6; 00.2-01.2;
00.4-02.0; 00.5-03.0; 01.0-05.0 4 N/O contact N/O contact
Water 10 % - Size 2 -
0.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2;
02.0-07.0; 03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030
Notes on installation:
Water 10 % - Size 3 -
 The medium must not contain solid
0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060; particles! We recommend using
0030-0090; 0060-0150 contamination strainers.
Accuracy
6 = ≤ ± 5.0 % FS  External magnetic fields can affect
7 = ≤ ± 10.0 % FS the switching contact.
Housing material Ensure sufficient distance from
B = Brass (nickel-plated) magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
S = Stainless steel motors)!
1 = With indicator
Modification number
000 = Standard

(see Dimensions)
6) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is fitted
on the side of the instrument at 90° to the first contact.
Note:
E 18.384.1/11.13
Accessories:
174

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
SW D B G DN T L
Water 5 % Accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0 1/4“ 8
3/8“ 10
0.5 .. 8.0 27 30 86 14 130 850
1/2“ 15
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40 1/2“ 15 14 148 9
27 30 86 900
4 .. 55 3/4“ 20 16 174
1 .. 70
34 40 96 3/4“ 20 18 152 1400
8 .. 90
40 40 96 1“ 25 19 156 1100
5 .. 110
10 .. 150 50 50 101 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 2750
35 .. 220 50 50 106 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 3000
35 .. 250 60 50 107 1 1/2“ 40 24 200 3800
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 1- D

0.005..0.06
0.04..0.13
0.1..0.6
0.2..1.2 17 18 56 1/4“ 8 10 65 140
0.4..2.0
0.5..3.0
1.0..5.0
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 2 -

0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
27 31 67 1/2 ’’ 15 15 90 350
2.0 .. 7.0
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0

10 .. 30
15 .. 45 3/4 “ 20 21 152 1200
41 47 93
20 .. 60 1“ *) 25 17 130 1050
30 .. 90
60 .. 150 41 47 93 1“ 25 17 130 1050
E 18.384.1/11.13
*)
Standard
175
G
T
(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
SW D B G DN T L
L
Water 5 % Accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0 T
0.6 .. 5.0 1/4“ 8 G

3/8“ 10
0.5 .. 8.0 27 30 86 14 130 940
1/2“ 15
1 .. 14
B
1 .. 28
D
9 2 .. 40 1/2“ 15 14 148
27 30 86 990
4 .. 55 3/4“ 20 16 174
D +17
1 .. 70
34 40 96 3/4“ 20 18 152 1490
8 .. 90
40 40 96 1“ 25 19 156 1190
5 .. 110
10 .. 150 50 50 101 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 2840
35 .. 220 50 50 106 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 3090
35 .. 250 60 50 107 1 1/2“ 40 24 200 3890
Water 10 % Accuracy - Size 2-

0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
30 30 70 1/2 ’’ 15 15 90 570
2.0 .. 7.0
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0

10 .. 30
15 .. 45 3/4 “ 20 21 152 1430
41 47 93
20 .. 60 1“ *) 25 17 130 1250
30 .. 90
60 .. 150 41 47 93 1“ 25 17 130 1250
*)
Standard

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and
E 18.384.1/11.13

For applications or operating conditions not described, please contact the Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
176
Electronic
Flow Transmitter
HFT 2100

The HFT 2100 series of HYDAC flow Input data
transmitters is based on the variable Measuring ranges [l/min] Size 1 Size 2
area float principle. 0.5 .. 1.6 0.5 .. 1.5
Irrespective of the installation position, 0.8 .. 3.0 1 .. 4
the test medium deflects a spring-loaded 2.0 .. 7.0 2 .. 8
float in the direction of flow, depending 3 .. 10
on the flow rate.
5 .. 15
A Hall sensor which detects the position
of the float, is fitted to the outside of the 8 .. 24
instrument and is therefore separate to 10 .. 30
the flow circuit. 15 .. 45
In proportion to the deflection of the float, 20 .. 60
the sensor produces an analogue signal 30 .. 90
which corresponds to the particular 35 .. 110
measuring range. Operating pressure
The device is calibrated for vertical Brass version 300 bar 250 bar
installation and for an upwards flow Stainless steel version 350 bar 300 bar
direction. The transmitter is designed Pressure drop [bar] 0.02 .. 0.2 0.02 .. 0.4
to give reliable measurements within its Mechanical connection See dimensions
accuracy range, even with changes in Parts in contact with medium
viscosity. The kinematic viscosity may Brass version Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Brass,
vary between 30 and 600 cSt. nickel-plated; Brass; Hard ferrite
Stainless steel version Stainl. st. 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
The areas of application include: Output data
- Central lubrication systems Output signal 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
- Oil circuit lubrication systems 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor
- Transformers Accuracy2) ≤ ± 10 % FS
- Cooling systems and circuits Repeatability 1 % FS max.
- Lubrication circuits Environmental conditions
- Hydraulic systems Operating temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
- Pumps Fluid temperature range -20 .. +70°C
- Welding machines and laser systems Viscosity range 30 .. 600 cSt
- Chemical industry mark Directive 2004 / 108 / EC
- Research & development Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
Medium: Supply voltage 18 .. 30 V
 Oils / viscous fluids Power consumption <1W
Electrical connection Male connection M12x1
Housing material
Special features: Measuring body Brass (nickel-plated) or st. steel 1.4571
 Accuracy ≤ ± 10 % FS Transmitter Brass (nickel-plated)
 Viscosity compensation from Note: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
30 .. 600 cSt 1)
 Any mounting position 2)
3 % possible with calibration to a certain viscosity
 High level of functional reliability
 High pressure resistance
 Threaded connection
E 18.395.1/11.13
177
HFT 2 1 X 6 – X – XXXX–XXXX – 7 – X – 0 – 000
Measuring principle M12x1
Measuring medium
Mechanical
connection 2) 3)
1 = 1/4 “
2 = 3/8 “
3 = 1/2 “
4 = 3/4 “
5 = 1 “ Pin HFT 21X6-C HFT 21X6-B
Electrical connection 1 +UB +UB
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole 2 reserved reserved
9 3 GND GND
Output signal
B = 0 .. 10 V, 3 conductor 4 4 .. 20 mA 0 .. 10 V
C = 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
Measuring ranges in l/min 3)
Oil 10 % - Size 1 -
00.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0 Notes on installation:
Oil 10 % -Size 2-  The medium must not contain solid
00.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010; particles! We recommend using
0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045; contamination strainers.
0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110
 External magnetic fields can
Accuracy affect the switching contact.
7 = ≤ ± 10.0 % FS Ensure sufficient distance from
Housing material magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
B = Brass, nickel-plated motors)!
S = Stainless steel
Modification number
000 = Standard

(see Dimensions)
Note:
Accessories:
E 18.395.1/11.13
178
Dimensions:
Size 1 G
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L
8 24 1/4“ 98 610
L
0.5 .. 1.6 10 24 3/8“ 119 660
15 30 1/2“ *) 90 560
0.8 .. 3.0
15 30 1/2“ 90 560
2.0 .. 7.0 G
*)
Standard
SW 9
SW
Size 2 G
Type Installation dimensions Weight T

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L T
L
0.5 .. 1.5 8 34 1/4“ 152 10 1510
15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1435
1 .. 4 20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1350
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1170 T
2 .. 8
G
3 .. 10 15 34 1/2“ 152 14 1435
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1350
5 .. 15 25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1170 SW
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
SW
20 34 3/4“ 152 15 1350

15 .. 45
25 40 1“ *) 130 17 1170
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
25 40 1“ 130 17 1170
35 .. 110
*)
Standard
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and
E 18.395.1/11.13

For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
179
9
180
E 18.395.1/11.13
Electronic
Flow Transmitter
HFT 2500
for water / water-based media

The HFT 2500 series of HYDAC flow Input data
transmitters is based on the variable
area float principle and is position- Measuring ranges [l/min] Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
independent. 0.005..0.06 0.02 .. 0.2 10 .. 30 0.2 .. 4.0 8 .. 90
The test medium deflects a spring- 0.04 .. 0.13 0.2 .. 0.6 15 .. 45 0.6 .. 5.0 5 .. 110
loaded float in the direction of flow,
0.1 .. 0.6 0.4 .. 1.8 20 .. 60 0.5 .. 8.0 10 .. 150
depending on the flow rate but
irrespective of the installation position. 0.2 .. 1.2 0.8 .. 3.2 30 .. 90 1 .. 14 35 .. 220
A Hall sensor is fitted to the outside of 0.4 .. 2.0 2 .. 7 60 .. 150 1 .. 28 35 .. 250
the device and is therefore also outside
the flow circuit. It determines the position 0.5 .. 3.0 3 .. 13 2 .. 40
of the float. 1.0 .. 5.0 4 .. 20 4 .. 55
The sensor emits an analogue signal
8 .. 30 1 .. 70
proportional to the deflection of the
float which corresponds to the relevant Operating pressure
measurement range. Brass version 300 bar 300 bar 250 bar 200 bar
The device is calibrated for vertical Stainless steel version 350 bar 350 bar 300 bar 300 bar
installation and for a flow direction from
bottom to top. Pressure drop [bar] 0.02 .. 0.2 0.02 .. 0.3 0.02 .. 0.4 0.02 .. 0.8
Areas of application are to monitor flow Mechanical connection See dimensions
rate in fluids (water / water-based) in the Parts in contact with medium
following areas, amongst others: Brass version Stainl. steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass (nickel-pl.); Brass; Hard ferrite
- Cooling systems and circuits Stainless steel version Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
- Hydraulic systems Output data
- Pumps
Output signal 4 .. 20 mA, 3-conductor
- Welding machines and laser systems 0 .. 10 V, 3-conductor
- Medical technology
- Pharmaceutical industry Accuracy ≤ ± 3 % FS
- Chemical industry Repeatability 1 % FS
- Research & development
Medium:
 Water or water-based media Fluid temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
Special features: Protection class to IP 67
 Accuracy ≤ ± 3 % FS IEC 60529
 Any mounting position Other data
 High level of functional reliability Supply voltage 18 .. 30 V DC
 High pressure resistance Power consumption <1W
 Threaded connection Housing material
Measuring body Brass (nickel-plated) or stainless steel 1.4571
Transmitter Brass (nickel-plated)
Electrical connection Male connection M12x1
Note: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1) Other seal materials available on request
E 18.601.0/11.13
181
HFT 2 5 X 6 – X – XXXX–XXXX – 5 – X – 0 – 000
Measuring principle M12x1
Test medium
5 = Water /
water-based
Mechanical
connection 2)
1 = 1/4 “
2 = 3/8 “
3 = 1/2 “
4 = 3/4 “ Pin HFT 25X6-C HFT 25X6-B
5 = 1 “
6 = 1 1/4 “ 1 +UB +UB
7 = 1 1/2 “ 2 reserved reserved
3 GND GND
(connector not supplied) 4 4 ..20 mA 0 ..10 V
Output signal
Measuring ranges in l/min Notes on installation:
Size 1  The medium must not contain
.005-0.06; 0.04-0.13; 00.1-00.6; 00.2-01.2; 00.4-02.0; solid particles! We recommend
00.5-03.0; 01.0-05.0 using contamination strainers.
Size 2
0.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2; 02.0-07.0;
switching contact.
03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030 Ensure sufficient distance from
Size 3 magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0060-0150 motors)!
=============================================
Size 4
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0; 01.0-0014; 01.0-0028;
02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150;
0035-0220; 0035-0250
Accuracy
5 = ≤ ± 3.0 % FS
Housing material
B = Brass (nickel-plated)
S = Stainless steel
Modification number
000 = Standard

(see Dimensions)
Note:
Accessories:
E 18.601.0/11.13
182
Dimensions:

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
SW D B G DN T L
Size 1
SW G
0.005..0.06
T
0.04..0.13 □D
B
0.1..0.6
L
0.2..1.2 17 18 39 1/4“ 8 10 65 210
0.4..2.0 T
G
0.5..3.0
9
1.0..5.0
Size 2
SW G
0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6 T
□D
0.4 .. 1.8 B
0.8 .. 3.2
L
30 30 62 1/2 ’’ 15 14 90 560
2.0 .. 7.0
3.0 .. 13.0 T
4.0 .. 20.0 G
8.0 .. 30.0
Size 3
10 .. 30 SW G
15 .. 45 34 3/4 “ 20 15 152 1200

40 62 T
20 .. 60 40 1“ *) 25 17 130 1050 □D
B
30 .. 90
60 .. 150 40 40 62 1“ 25 17 130 1050
L
G
Size 4
0.2 .. 4.0 SW
□D
G
0.6 .. 5.0 1/4“ 8
3/8“ 10 T
0.5 .. 8.0 27 40 52 14 131 900
1/2“ 15 B
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
L
2 .. 40 27 1/2“ 15 14 146
40 52 950
4 .. 55 32 3/4“ 20 16 174
1 .. 70
3/4“ T
34 40 62 20 18 152 1420
8 .. 90 1“ G
40 40 62 25 19 156 1120 SW
5 .. 110
10 .. 150 50 50 72 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 2770
35 .. 220 50 50 72 1 1/4“ 32 21 200 3020
35 .. 250 60 50 72 1 1/2“ 40 24 200 3820
*) Standard
E 18.601.0/11.13

applications described. For applications and operating conditions not Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
described, please contact the relevant technical department. Subject to E-Mail: electronic@hydac.com
technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
183
speed sensors
The contact-free speed sensors of the HSS series detect the movement
of ferromagnetic structures, such as gear wheels, gear rims or perforated
discs, using the changes in magnetic flux.
Speed sensors for general applications:

Page
Electronic Speed Sensor HSS 110 185
10
E 180.000.2/11.13
184
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 110

The contact-free speed sensors of the Input data
HSS 110 series detect the movement of Frequency range NPN: 0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
ferromagnetic structures, such as gear PWM: 1.0 .. 5,000 Hz
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs, Probe length 18.4 mm
using the changes in magnetic flux. Probe diameter 10.2 / 9.4 mm 10
So each sensor has two Hall elements Max. pressure on sensing surface 25 bar, static
and the differential between the two Air gap / installation distance Module 1: 0.2 .. 0.8 mm
signals is detected, evaluated and then Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.4 mm
converted into an output signal suitable Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
for processing. Module 2: 0.2 .. 2.4 mm
Module 3: 0.2 .. 2.9 mm
For integration into standard controls, Mechanical connection Flange, single, asymmetrical,
standard output signals are available. cable outlet 90°
Due to their extremely compact design, Type of installation Dependent on direction
the robust housing and protection (with asymmetrical flange)
class IP 6K9K, the devices can be Torque value max. 8 Nm
used in almost any application and any Housing material Brass
mounting position. Seal FPM
The main fields of application are Output data
detection of speed and rotation direction Variants 1-channel frequency
on gear wheels with small module and or
1-channel frequency / direction of rotation
high resolution, especially in vehicles (PWM)
and mobile machines with electrical and
Types 1 NPN frequency output
hydraulic drives. or
1 PWM output, 4 .. 20 mA
Switching capacity / current rating NPN: ≤ 40 mA
Special features: PWM: ≤ 200 mA
z 1-channel Hall differential sensor Direction of rotation Flange on left, gear turns to right,
z Different signal outputs available for duration of PWM signal pulse
z Extremely compact design Signal level LOW: ≤ 0.6 V / 4 .. 9 mA PWM
HIGH: +UB / 12 ..17 mA PWM
z Wide frequency range
z Alignment required on installation Operating temperature range -40 .. +140 °C
z Large air gap Media resistance of housing Salt water; various hydraulic oils; diesel oils;
cleaning agent; salt spray
Vibration resistance to 0.05 g2 / Hz, 20 .. 2,000 Hz
EN 60068-2-64
Shock resistance to 100 g, 6 ms, 3x in each direction
EN 60068-2-27
to ISO 20653 IP 6K9K
other data
Electrical connection Flying leads, 3-core, cable length 1 m
Supply voltage NPN: 12.5 .. 32 V DC
PWM: 4.5 .. 20 V DC
Current consumption < 30 mA at 30 V DC
Average life expectancy 200,000 h (MTTF)
Weight ~ 50 g
E 18.606.0/11.13
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection (max. 50 mA)
are provided.
185
Core HSS 110-1 HSS 110-4 HSS 1 1 0 – X – 018 – 000
red +UB +UB
black 0V PWM Signal type
1 = Output 1: Frequency
blue Frequency 4 = Output 1: Frequency and direction of rotation PWM
Probe length
Mounting position tolerance: 018 = 18.4 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Dimensions:
(18.6) 6
3.7
±5°
10
ø10.2 -0.2
0
0
18.4 -0.25
Specification for installation

cavity:
Ø 13.7 +0.10
ø 9.4 ±0.1
0
Ø 10.31 +0.025
0
M6
1.8
°
15
(9)
8
5.2
Ø 10.31
13 +0.2
0
13 +0.2
6.1 +0.2
0
0
R
7
7.1 ±0.2
Note:
E 18.606.0/11.13

186
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 120

HSS 120 series detect the movement of Frequency range 0.1 .. 20,000 Hz
ferromagnetic structures, such as gear Probe length 30; 35; 45 mm
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs, probe diameter 15 / 12 mm
using the changes in magnetic flux. Max. pressure on sensing surface 15 bar, dynamic 10
So each sensor has two Hall elements Air gap / installation distance Probe length: 30 mm 35 / 45 mm
and the differential between the two Module 1: 0.2 .. 1.0 mm 0.2 .. 1.3 mm
signals is detected, evaluated and then Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.5 mm 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
converted into an output signal suitable Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 1.7 mm 0.2 .. 2.0 mm
for processing. Module 2: 0.2 .. 2.2 mm 0.2 .. 2.5 mm
Module 2.5: 0.2 .. 3.2 mm 0.2 .. 3.5 mm
The instruments are available Mechanical connection Flange, single, asymmetrical,
for different insertion depths. For cable outlet 90° (30 mm) / axial (35, 45 mm)
integration into standard controls, Type of installation Dependent on direction
standard output signals are available. (with asymmetrical flange)
Due to their extremely compact design, Torque value 10 Nm
the robust housing and protection Housing material Brass
class IP 69K, the instruments can be Seal FPM
used in almost any application and any Output data
mounting position. Variant 2-channel speed
The main fields of application are (90° / 270° phase shift for module 2)
detection of speed and rotation direction Type 2 NPN frequency outputs
on gear wheels with a small module and Switching capacity ≤ 50 mA
high resolution, especially in vehicles ≥ 10 kΩ ohmic load
≤ 2.2 nF capacitive load
and mobile machines with hydraulic
Direction of rotation Flange on left, gear turns to right:
drives.
channel A lagging; channel B leading
Signal level LOW: ≤ 0.5 V
HIGH: +UB
z 2-channel Hall differential sensor
z Wide frequency range (-40 .. +160 °C for max. 500 operating hours)
z Alignment required when installing Media resistance of housing Salt water; various hydraulic oils; diesel oils;
z Large air gap cleaning agent; salt spray
Vibration resistance to 30 g, 10 .. 500 Hz,
EN 60068-2-64 100 min in each direction
Shock resistance to 50 g, 11 ms, 3x in each direction
EN 60068-2-27 / -29 100 g, 6 ms, 3x in each direction
to ISO 20653 IP 69K
other data
Electrical connection Flying leads, 4-core, cable length 1 m
Weight ~ 80 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage and short circuit protection
(max. 50 mA) are provided
E 18.607.0/11.13
187
Core HSS 120-2 HSS 1 2 0 – 2 – XXX – 000
brown +UB
blue Frequency 1 (A) Signal technology
2 = Outputs 1 and 2: Frequency (90° phase shift)
black 0V
Probe length
white Frequency 2 (B) 030 = 30 mm
035 = 35 mm
045 = 45 mm
Adjustment angle for other
Modification number
modules: 000 = Standard
It is possible to achieve a 90° phase shift
of the two frequency signals by turning the Notes:
sensor through the angle indicated in the On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
table below. the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Dimensions:
-20° Module 1 Probe length (A): 35 mm, 45 mm
15
-15° Module 1.25
Ø
-10° Module 1.5 6.
4
± 0° Module 2 ± 0°
Ø 15.1
Ø 12
Ø 15
Module 2.5 +15°
.5
R 5
10 R
10
2.4
Specification for installation .5
cavity:
10
°+ M6
20
min. 1.5
min. 9
16.5
12
5
1.6*
O-ring 11.8 x 1.8

R 0
Ø 15 HB FPM V80
R 0.4
35
9±0.25
.4
4.5±0.25
Probe length: 30 mm
1,000 +50
0 12
15±0.1
Ø 4.7±0.15
* For sealing function RA 1.6,

otherwise 3.2
4.5±0.25
9±0.25
0
Ø12 -0.10
0
Ø15 -0.10
19.5
6
O-ring 11.8 x 1.8

FPM V80
30
Note:
E 18.607.0/11.13

188
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 130

ferromagnetic structures, such as gear Probe length 16; 32 mm
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs, probe diameter 18 mm
using the changes in magnetic flux. Max. pressure on sensing surface 10 bar, dynamic 10
So each sensor has two Hall elements Air gap / installation distance Module 1: 0.2 .. 1.3 mm
and the differential between the two Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
signals is detected, evaluated and then Module 1.5: 0.2 .. 2.0 mm
converted into an output signal suitable Module 2: 0.2 .. 2.5 mm
for processing. Module 2.5: 0.2 .. 3.5 mm
Mechanical connection Double flange, asymmetrical,
The instruments are available cable outlet at 90°
in different insertion depths. For Type of installation Dependent on direction
integration into standard controls, (with asymmetrical flange)
standard output signals are available. Torque value 10 Nm
Due to their extremely compact design, Housing material Brass / plastic (PA6 GF30)
the robust housing and protection Seal FPM
class IP 69K, the devices can be used Output data
in almost any application and any Variants 2-channel speed (90° phase shift)
mounting position. or
These devices are mainly used for 2-channel speed / direction of rotation
detection of speed and rotation direction Types 2 NPN frequency outputs
or
on rotary sensors, also under extreme
1 NPN frequency output +
environmental conditions. 1 NPN direction of rotation output
Switching capacity ≤ 500 mA
Special features: Cable outlet at 90°, gear rotation to right:
channel A leading; channel B lagging
z 2-channel Hall differential sensor Direction of rotation
or
z Single-core seal rotational direction signal
z Very high EMC resistance (right: HIGH / left: LOW)
Signal level LOW: ≤ 2 V
z Large air gap
HIGH: ≥ UB - 2 V
Media resistance of housing Saltwater, various hydraulic oils
Vibration resistance to 5 .. 57 Hz (1.5 mm p-p)
EN 60068-2-36 57 .. 2000 Hz (10 g)
Shock resistance to 15 g, 11 ms, in each direction
EN 60068-2-27 25 g, 6 ms, in each direction
to ISO 20653 IP 6K9K
other data
Electrical connection Flying leads, 4-core, 43 cm cable length
Current consumption < 33 mA at 24 V, both outputs LOW
< 23 mA at 24 V, both outputs HIGH
Weight ~ 110 g
E 18.608.0/11.13
provided.
189
Core HSS 130-2 HSS 130-3 HSS 1 3 0 – X – XXX – 000
brown +UB +UB
blue 0V 0V Signal technology
2 = Outputs 1 and 2: Frequency
black Frequency 1 Frequency (90° phase shift)
white Frequency 2 Direction of 3 = Output 1: Frequency
rotation Output 2: Direction of rotation
Probe length
Adjustment angle 016 = 16 mm
032 = 32 mm
for other modules:
Modification number
It is possible to achieve a 90° phase shift 000 = Standard
of the two frequency signals by turning the
sensor through the angle indicated in the Notes:
table below. On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
-12° Module 1 Dimensions:

- 9° Module 1.25 27 24.5
- 7° Module 1.5
- 3° Module 1.75
± 0° Module 2 ± 0°
10 Module 2.25 + 4°
Module 2.5 + 8°
A + 38.3
Module 2.75 +13°

30
Module 3 +17°
Specification for installation

A
O-ring 17.3 x 2.2 FPM

cavity:
Ø 18 - 0.05
Ø 22.1 +0.10 Cheese-head screw DIN912

0
internal hexagon M6 x 16
+0.10
A = Probe length, 16 or 32 mm
Ø 18.2 0
M6
7
(9)
w
22
R15
v
24.5
0.1 A 0.2 A
20
.2 °
R0 45
8
A
R
°
90
2.4 +0.40
x
0

General tolerances for chipping
processes: ISO 2768-mH
 Tolerance: ISO 8015
 Surface quality: ISO 1302
Note:
E 18.608.0/11.13

190
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 210

ferromagnetic structures, such as gear Installation depth 0 .. 50 mm adjustable
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs, Max. pressure on sensing surface 5 bar, static / dynamic
using the changes in magnetic flux. Air gap / installation distance Module 1: 0.2 .. 1.0 mm
10
So each sensor has two Hall elements Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.5 mm
signals is detected, evaluated and then Module 2: 0.2 .. 2.2 mm
for processing. Mechanical connection Screw-in thread M12x1
Type of installation Dependent on direction
For integration into standard controls,
Housing material Brass
Due to their extremely compact design, Output data
the robust housing and protection
Variants 2-channel speed (90° phase shift)
class IP 67, the instruments can be or
used in almost any application and any 2-channel speed / direction of rotation
mounting position. Types 2 push-pull frequency outputs
The main fields of application are or
detection of speed and rotation direction 1 push-pull frequency output +
on gear wheels with a small module and 1 push-pull direction of rotation output
high resolution, especially in vehicles Switching capacity ≤ 50 mA
and mobile machines with hydraulic Marking on housing in direction of rotation,
Direction of rotation
drives. gear rotation to right: channel A leading;
channel B lagging
or
Special features: direction of rotation signal
(right: HIGH / left: LOW)
Signal level LOW: ≤ 2 V
z Wide frequency range HIGH: ≥ UB - 2 V
z Alignment required when installing Environmental conditions
z Large air gap Operating temperature range -40 .. +125 °C
z Simple installation Media resistance of housing Oils: HETG; HEES, HFD; HVLP; HLP
Vibration resistance to 0.05 g2/Hz, 20 .. 2,000 Hz
EN 60068-2-64
Shock resistance to 30 g, 11 ms
EN 60068-2-27
(when an IP 67 female connector is used)
other data
Electrical connection Male M12x1, 4 pole
Weight ~ 40 g
provided.
E 18.609.0/11.13
191
M12x1, 4 pole HSS 2 1 0 – X – 050 – 000
Signal technology
(90° phase shift)
Output 2: Direction of rotation
Installation depth
050 = 50 mm max.
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin HSS 210-2 HSS 210-3
Notes:
1 +UB +UB On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
2 Frequency 1 (A) Frequency the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
3 0V 0V
4 Frequency 2 (B) Direction of
rotation Dimensions:
Adjustment angle
for other modules:
M12x1
M12x1

10.4
sensor through the angle indicated in the

10 table below.
1.85
Module 2
50 7.5
30 °
Module 1
15 °
2 1 68
3 4
Key for
alignment
Module 1 +15°
Module 1.25 +18°
Module 1.5 +23°
Module 2 +30°
Module 2.5 +38°
Note:
E 18.609.0/11.13

192
Electronic
Speed Sensor
HSS 220

ferromagnetic structures, such as gear Installation depth 0 .. 46 mm adjustable
wheels, gear rims or perforated discs, Max. pressure on sensing surface 10 bar, static
using the changes in magnetic flux. Air gap / installation distance Module 1: 0.2 .. 1.3 mm
10
So each sensor has two Hall elements Module 1.25: 0.2 .. 1.8 mm
signals is detected, evaluated and then Module 2: 0.2 .. 2.5 mm
for processing. Mechanical connection Screw-in thread M18x1
Type of installation Dependent on direction
For integration into standard controls,
Housing material X12CrNiS18 8
Due to their extremely compact design, Output data
the robust housing and protection
Variants 2-channel speed (90° phase shift)
class IP 68, the instruments can be or
used in almost any application and any 2-channel speed / direction of rotation
mounting position. Types 2 NPN frequency outputs
The main fields of application are or
detection of speed and rotation direction 1 NPN frequency output +
on gear wheels with a small module 1 NPN direction of rotation output
and high resolution, especially in rail Switching capacity ≤ 50 mA (36 V, 125 °C, 50 % duty cycle)
vehicles and mobile machines. ≤ 500 mA (24 V, 25 °C, 50 % duty cycle)
Direction of rotation Marking on housing at 90° to rotational
direction, gear rotation to right: channel A
Special features: leading, channel B lagging
or
direction of rotation signal
z Wide frequency range (right: HIGH / left: LOW)
z Alignment required when installing Signal level LOW: ≤ 2 V
z Large air gap HIGH: ≥ +UB - 2 V
z Simple installation
Media resistance of housing Saltwater, various hydraulic oils
Vibration resistance to 15 g / 1 .. 2000 Hz
EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance to 30 g, 11 ms
EN 60068-2-27
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 68 (when female connector is fitted)
other data
Electrical connection Male M12x1, 4 pole
Current consumption < 33 mA at 24 V, both outputs LOW
< 23 mA at 24 V, both outputs HIGH
Weight ~ 80 g
provided.
E 18.610.0/11.13
193
M12x1, 4 pole HSS 2 2 0 – X – 046 – 000
Signal technology
(90° phase shift)
Output 2: Direction of rotation
Installation depth
046 = 46 mm max.
Modification number
000 = Standard
Pin HSS 220-2 HSS 220-3
Notes:
1 +UB +UB On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or
2 Frequency 2 Direction of the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
rotation
3 0V 0V
4 Frequency 1 Frequency Dimensions:
Adjustment angle for other

modules: M12x1

10 sensor through the angle indicated in the
table below.
-12° Module 1
- 9° Module 1.25
- 7° Module 1.5
Ø 22
- 3° Module 1.75
70
± 0° Module 2 ± 0°

Module 2.25 + 4°
Module 2.5 + 8°
Module 2.75 +13° 46
Module 3 +17°
2
Ø 16.8
M18x1
Note:
E 18.610.0/11.13

194
E 18.610.0/11.13
195
10
Electronic pressure transmitters
and linear position TRANSDUCERS for
applications with increased functional
safety
"Failsafe" is the keyword for vehicle designers of mobile machinery.
No single error is allowed to cause a breakdown or malfunction of part or
all of the system in safety-critical applications.
For use in safety-critical applications, these pressure transmitters are

certified for Performance Level "d" (PLd) according to DIN EN ISO 13849.
The linear position transducers PLd comply with DIN EN 13849-1 and also
with the comparable safety level SIL 2 in accordance with the
standard applicable worldwide for electronic products IEC 61508.
Pressure transmitters for applications with increased functional safety
Page
HDA 4700 197
Linear position transducer for applications with increased functional safety

Page
HLT 1100 - R2 199
Further sensors for applications with increased functional safety can be

found in the Chapter "OEM Products for High Volume Production" .
11
12
E 180.000.2/11.13
196
Electronic
HDA 4700
for Applications with Increased
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d

This version of the pressure Input data
transmitter series HDA 4700 has been Measuring ranges signal 1 in bar 25 40 60 100
specially developed for use in safety Measuring ranges signal 2 in bar 25 / 40 40 / 60 60 / 100 100 / 160
circuits / safety functions as part of 160 250 400 600
the functional safety of machinery 160 / 250 250 / 400 400 / 600 600 / 1000
and equipment up to PL d - Cat 3 (in
Overload pressures in bar 80 80 120 200
accordance with ISO 13849).
320 500 800 1200
The pressure transmitters are Burst pressures in bar 200 200 300 500
designed with two channels. Each
800 1250 2000 2000
channel consists of a sensor element
Mechanical connection G¼ A DIN 3852 with 0.5 mm orifice
and evaluation electronics. As a (Torque value) (20 Nm)
result, the pressure transmitter Parts in contact with medium 1) Mech. conn.: Stainl. steel (2 x thin-film strain gauge)
develops two separate and 11
Seal: FPM
independent output signals in Output data
proportion to the pressure. Output signal 12) 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
The safety function is tested by Output signal 22) 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor
evaluating and comparing the two Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
analogue output signals in a higher- Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
level system. Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
The main areas of application are as Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % / °C typ.
sensor elements in mobile, safety- Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % / °C max.
oriented systems such as load torque Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % / °C typ.
displays or load torque limitation in Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % / °C max.
truck-mounted cranes or working Non-linearity at max. setting to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
platforms. Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS.
Rise time ≤ 2 ms
Long term stability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
z Two-channel, redundant Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
pressure measurement Operating temperature range (fail safe)3) -40 .. +85 °C/ -25 .. +85 °C
z Two separate, independent Storage temperature range -40 .. +85 °C
output signals Fluid temperature range3) -40 .. +85 °C/ -25 .. +85 °C
z Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
z Highly robust sensor cell Vibration resistance according to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
z Outstanding performance in terms Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when female connector is fitted)
of temperature effect and EMC to ISO 20653 IP 69K (when female connector is fitted)
z Small, compact design other data
Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole; DT04, 4 pole
z PL d, Cat. 3 certification
Supply voltage 7 .. 35 V DC (max. load resistance 250 Ω)
12 .. 35 V DC (max. load resistance 500 Ω)
Life expectancy > 10 million load cycles (0 .. 100 %)
Weight ~ 180 g
Safety-related data
Performance level
Based on DIN EN ISO 13849-1:2008
E 18.381.1/11.13
PL d
Architecture Category 3
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are provided
1)
2)
Other output signals on request
3)
197
HDA 4 7 4 X - C C - XXXX - XXXX - Pd- 000 M12x1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
V = Male Deutsch DT04, 4 pole
Pin HDA 4746-CC
Signal 1
C = 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor 1 +UB
2 Signal 2
Signal 2
C = 4 .. 20 mA, 3 conductor 3 0V
Pressure ranges for Signal 1 in bar 4 Signal 1

(max. oper. pressure)
0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0160; 0250; 0400; 0600 DT04
Pressure ranges for Signal 2 in bar

0025; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0160; 0250; 0400; 0600; 1000
Press. range for signal 2 = Pressure range for signal 1
or max. 1 pressure level higher
Functional safety
Pd = PL d – Cat 3 according to DIN EN 13849-1
Pin HDA 474V-CC
Modification number
000 = Standard 1 +UB
2 0V
Note: 3 Signal 2
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label 4 Signal 1
11
Accessories: Block circuit diagram:
12
Dimensions:
output output
signal 1 signal 2
male electr. conn.

M12x1 - 4 pole
input input
male electr. conn.
signal 1 signal 2
DT04 - 4p
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
orifice Note:
E 18.381.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
198
HLT 1100-R2
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2

This version of the linear position Input data
sensor series HLT 1100 has been Measuring ranges 200 .. 2500 mm
specially developed for use in safety Measured variable Distance
circuits / safety functions as part of
Pressure resistance 450 bar
the functional safety of machinery and
Peak pressure 630 bar
equipment up to SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or
PL d (ISO 13849). Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel (1.4301 / 1.4571)
Output data
The sensor works on the principle of
Output signal 4 .. 20 mA, CANopen
magnetostriction.
Resolution 12 bit
This measuring principle determines
Load resistance to GND 200 .. 500 Ohm
with high-precision the position, the
Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS 11
distance and/or the velocity and is
based on elapsed time measurement. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Based on this non-contact and wear-
Non-linearity ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
free measuring system, HYDAC
offers this version in a pressure- Dynamics ≤ 30 ms (10 .. 90 %)
resistant stainless steel housing for Environmental conditions
full integration in hydraulic cylinders. Operating temperature range -40 .. +85 °C
Media temperature range -40 .. +120 °C
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP67
Special features: Vibration resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-6 7.5 mm (5 .. 8.2 Hz)
 Very robust housing 2.0 g (8.2 .. 150 Hz)
 High resistance to shock and Shock resistance to DIN EN 60068-2-27 20 g (11ms)
vibration mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Supply voltage (Vin) nominal 9 ... 36 VDC
 Non-contact and wear-free
 SIL 2 / PL d certification
Electrical connection PUR cable, 3-core; flying leads
Separate panel mount connection M12x1
Measurement principle magnetostrictive
Installation position and travel speed No restrictions
Weight ~ 1000 g
(dependent on measurement and cable lengths)
Safety-related data
Performance level
PL d
Safety Integrity Level
Based on DIN EN 61508:2002
SIL 2
Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage and short circuit protection
E 18.372.1.0/11.13
are provided.

199
Mobile HLT 1 1 0 0 – R2 – XXX – XXX – XXXX – S2PD – 000 Cable outlet
Design/
Geometry type
1 = Rod
R2 = Cylinder-integrated
Cable output Core Analogue CANopen
K02 = Flying lead, length 2 m brown +UB +UB
K05 = Flying lead, length 5 m white 0V 0V
green Analogue CAN_L
Separate panel mount connection M12x1 yellow n.c. CAN_H
(4 pole for signal output analogue
5 pole for signal output CANopen)
L06 = 60 mm cable length M12x1, 4 pole
Signal output
CAN = CANopen

Example
0250 = 250 mm
Pin
Functional safety 1 +UB
S2PD = SIL 2 acc. to IEC 61508
and PLd – Cat 2 acc. to DIN EN 13849-1 2 n.c.
11
3 0V
Modification
000 = Standard 4 Signal
12 Notes: M12x1, 5 pole

instrument. 4 3
5
Accessories: 1 2
Accessories section of the Electronics brochure.
The recommended position magnet ZBL MR33, part no. 6084207, must be
ordered separately.
1 n.c.
2 +UB supply+
Dimensions: 3 0V supply-
4 CAN_H bus line dominant high
5 CAN_L bus line dominant low
Note:
Damping zone Measuring length Zero position
E 18.372.1.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
200
E 18.372.1.0/11.13
201
11
Sensors for potentially explosive atmospheres
Sensors for Potentially Explosive Locations: For several years
Page HYDAC ELECTRONIC has been
HDA 4700 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 203 systematically stepping up the
EDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure, programmable 207 expansion of its range of sensors for
ETS 4500 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof enclosure 211 potentially explosive locations.
HDA 4700 ATEX Intrinsically safe 215 The sensors for potentially explosive
locations can be supplied with a variety
HDA 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe 219
of output signals, connectors and fluid
HDA 4300 ATEX Intrinsically safe 223 port connection options.
HDA 4100 ATEX Intrinsically safe 227 This versatility, combined with
EDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe, programmable 231 certification to ATEX, CSA and IECEx,
EDS 4300 ATEX Intrinsically safe, programmable 235 ensures worldwide acceptance
EDS 4100 ATEX Intrinsically safe, programmable 239 of our products.
HDA 4700 CSA Intrinsically Safe 243
HDA 4700 IECEx Intrinsically safe 259
HDA 4700 Flush membrane ATEX Intrinsically safe 275
HDA 4700 Flush membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe 287
HDA 4700 Flush membrane ATEX, CSA, IECEx flameproof enclosure 299
HFS 2100 ATEX Intrinsically safe 303
HFS 2500 ATEX Intrinsically safe 307
Further sensors for potentially explosive locations can be found in the section "OEM
Products for Large Volume Production" .
12
HDA 4700
HDA 4400
HDA 4300
HDA 4100
EDS 4400
EDS 4300
EDS 4100
HFS 2500
HFS 2100
ETS 4500
Sensors
for potentially
explosive atmospheres
Pressure ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Temperature ü
Flow rate ü ü
Available as individual units ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
OEM product for large volume production ü ü ü
Flush membrane ü ü ü
ATEX-Intrinsically safe ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
Flush membrane ATEX-Intrinsically safe ü ü ü
CSA Intrinsically safe ü ü ü
IECEx Intrinsically safe ü ü ü ü
Flush membrane IECEx Intrinsically safe ü ü ü
ATEX, IECEx, CSA,
flameproof enclosure ü ü ü
E 180.000.2/11.13
Flush membrane ATEX,

IECEx, CSA, flameproof enclosure ü
Note:
202
Electronic
HDA 4700
ATEX, CSA, IECEx
Flameproof Enclosure

The HDA 4700 electronic pressure Input data
transmitter series with flameproof Measuring ranges1) 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
enclosure has triple approval according Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
to ATEX, CSA and IECEx which ensures Burst pressures 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
the instrument is universally suitable for Mechanical connection1)2) G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
use in potentially explosive environments (torque value) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
around the world. Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
Each instrument is certified by the three 1.4404; 1.4301
approvals organizations and is labelled Seal: FPM
accordingly. Therefore there is no longer Conduit and housing material 1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
any need to stock multiple devices with Output data
separate individual approvals. Output signal, permitted load resistance 3) 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
As with the industrial version of the Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
HDA 4700, those with triple approval Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
have a proven, fully-welded stainless Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
steel measurement cell with thin film (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
strain gauge without internal seals. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ. 12
The main areas of application are in Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
mining and the oil & gas industry, e.g. in Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
underground vehicles, hydraulic power Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
units, blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
drives or valve actuation stations as to DIN 16086
well as in areas with high levels of dust Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
contamination. Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Protection types and applications: Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
CCSAUS Explosion Proof - Seal Not Required Environmental conditions
Compensated temperature range T5, T130 °C: -25 .. +80 °C
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5 T6, T110 °C: -25 .. +60 °C
Class II Group E, F, G Operating temperature range 4) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
Class III T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Type 4 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
ATEX Flame Proof Fluid temperature range 4) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
I M2 Ex d I Mb
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
IECEx Flame Proof DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Ex d I Mb Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Vented Gauge)
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb to ISO 20653 IP 69K (Sealed Gauge)
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Other data
Voltage supply 8 .. 30 V DC
Special features: Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. 0 .. 100 % FS
 Certificates: Weight ~ 300 g
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX0100 X Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit
CSA MC 224264 FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
IECEx KEM 10.0053X B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 DIN 3852 and vice versa
 Robust design
E 18.385.1/11.13
2)
Other mechanical connections on request
 Very small temperature error 3)
4)
 Excellent durability
203
Pin connections: Areas of application:
Conduit (single cores) Approvals CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required
ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
Certificate ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100X
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Applications / CCSAUS:
Protection types Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6; T5
Class II Group E, F, G
Class III
Type 4
Core HDA 47X9-A
ATEX:
red Signal + I M2 Ex d I Mb
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
black Signal -
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db
green- Housing
yellow IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Conduit (flying leads) Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db
Model code:
HDA 4 7 X X – A – XXXX – D X – 000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
(only for "1000 bar" press. range)
Core HDA 47XG-A 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
white Signal + Electrical connection
9 = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
brown Signal - single cores
green n.c. G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
yellow n.c. flying leads
Signal
12
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
(only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "4")
1000
(only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Approval
D = CSA Explosion Proof - Seal not required
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Type of measurement cell
S = Sealed Gauge (sealed to atmosphere) ≥ 40 bar
V = Vented Gauge (vented to atmosphere) ≤ 16 bar
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Notes:
please read the label or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
E 18.385.1/11.13
204
Dimensions:
Venting Venting
hex SW27 hex SW27
hex SW27
hex SW27
12
elastomer
profile
seal ring
*) optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
Note:
E 18.385.1/11.13

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and applications Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
described. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
For applications or operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
205
12
206
E 18.385.1/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400 Programmable
ATEX, CSA, IECEx

switch EDS 4400 with flameproof Measuring ranges 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
enclosure has triple approval according Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
to ATEX, CSA and IECEx which ensures Burst pressure 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
the instrument is universally suitable for Mechanical connection1) G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
use in potentially explosive environments (torque value) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
around the world. Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
Each instrument is certified by the three 1.4404; 1.4301
approval organizations and is labelled Seal: FPM
accordingly. Therefore there is no longer Conduit and housing material 1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
any need to stock multiple devices with Output data
separate individual approvals. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
As with the industrial version of the Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
EDS 4400, those with triple approval Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
have a proven, fully-welded stainless Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
steel measurement cell with thin film ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
strain gauge without internal seals. Switch output 2) 1 or 2 PNP transistor switch outputs
The instrument is programmed Output load max. 1.2 A on version with 1 switch output 12
conveniently and simply using the max. 1 A each on version with 2 switch
HPG 3000 HYDAC programming unit. outputs
Switch points / hysteresis / N/C or user-programmable with HYDAC
The main areas of application are in N/O function Programming Unit HPG 3000
mining and the oil & gas industry, e.g. in
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 .. 2000 ms; User-programmable with
underground vehicles, hydraulic power HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
units, blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill
drives or valve actuation stations as well
as in areas with high dust loads.
Protection types and applications: T6, T110 °C: -25 .. +60 °C
CCSAUS Explosion Proof - Seal Not Required Operating temperature range3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C/-20 .. +80 °C
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5 T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C/-20 .. +60 °C
Class II Group E, F, G Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Class III Fluid temperature range3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C/-20 .. +80 °C
Type 4 T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C/-20 .. +60 °C
ATEX Flame Proof mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
I M2 Ex d I Mb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Vented Gauge)
IECEx Flame Proof to ISO 20653 IP 69K (Sealed Gauge)
Ex d I Mb Other data
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb Voltage supply 12 .. 30 V DC
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Current consumption ~ 25 mA (plus switching current)
Special features: Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.0 % FS 0 .. 100 % FS
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100 X Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit
CSA MC 224264 protection are provided.
IECEx KEM 10.0053X 1)
Other mechanical connection options available on request
 Robust design 2)
NPN switching outputs upon request
3)
E 18.386.1/11.13

207
Setting ranges for the switch Areas of application:
outputs: Approvals CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required
- Switch point or upper switch value ATEX: Flame Proof
5% .. 100% of the measurement range IECEx: Flame Proof
- Hysteresis or lower switch value Certificate ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100X
1% .. 96% of the measurement range CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Pin connections: Applications / CCSAUS:
Conduit (single cores) Protection types Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6; T5

Class III
Type 4
ATEX:
I M2 Ex d I Mb
Core EDS 44x9-*-1P EDS 44x9-*-2P
red +UB +UB IECEx:
white Switch output 1 Switch output 1 Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
brown --------- Switch output 2 Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db
black 0V 0V
green SDA1) SDA1)
Model code:
Conduit (flying leads)
EDS 4 4 X X – XXXX – X P – D X – 000 (2m)
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
9 = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
Core EDS 44xG-*-1P EDS 44xG-*-2P single cores
white Switch output 1 Switch output 1 G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
flying leads
brown n.c. Switch output 2
green SDA1) SDA1)
0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
12 yellow 0V 0V (only in conjunction with mech. connection type "4")
grey +UB +UB 1000
(only in conjunction with mech. connection type "2")
1) Programming line
Number of switch outputs
Programming Unit: 1 = 1 switch output
(must be ordered separately) 2 = 2 switch outputs
HPG 3000 – 000 Output type
Portable Programming Unit P = Programmable
Part. No. 909 422
Approval
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Notes:
electr. conn.
female 5 pole
The pressure switch can be connected to Accessories:

the HPG 3000 very simply by using the Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found
UVM 3000 Connection Adapter (see in the Accessories brochure.
Accessories Brochure).
E 18.386.1/11.13
CAUTION!
The HPG 3000 Programming Unit may
only be used outside the potentially
explosive area.
208
Dimensions:
Venting Venting
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
*) optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
Note:
E 18.386.1/11.13

209
12
210
E 18.386.1/11.13
Electronic
ETS 4500
ATEX, CSA, IECEx

The electronic temperature transmitter Input data
series ETS 4500 with flameproof Measuring principle Silicon semiconductor device
enclosure has triple approval according Measuring range -25 .. +100 °C
to ATEX, CSA and IECEx which ensures Probe length 10.7; 100; 250; 350 mm
that the device is universally suitable for Pressure resistance 600 bar (probe length 10.7 mm)
use in potentially explosive environments 125 bar (probe length 100 mm)
around the world. 125 bar (probe length 250 mm)
Each device is certified by the three 125 bar (probe length 350 mm)
approval organizations and is labelled Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
accordingly. Therefore it is no longer (torque value)
necessary to stock multiple devices with Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4571; 1.4301 (316Ti; 304)
Seal: FPM
separate individual approvals.
Based on a silicon semiconductor Conduit and housing material 1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
device and corresponding evaluation Output data
electronics, the temperature sensor is Output signal1) 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax = (UB - 8 V) / 20 mA [kW]
designed to measure temperatures in the
Accuracy ≤ ± 1.5 % FS typ.
range -25 to +100 °C. ≤ ± 3.0 % FS max.
Its main applications are in mining 12
Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t : ~ 10 s
and the oil and gas industry, e.g. in t50
90
: ~ 15 s
underground vehicles, hydraulic power Environmental conditions
units, blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill Operating temperature range 2) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C/-20 .. +80 °C
drives or valve actuation stations as well T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C/-20 .. +60 °C
as in areas with high dust loads. Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Fluid temperature range 2) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C/-20 .. +80 °C
Protection types and applications: T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C/-20 .. +60 °C
CCSAUS Explosion Proof - Seal Not Required
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5 Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
Class II Group E, F, G DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Class III Protection class to ISO 20653 IP 69K
Type 4 Other data
ATEX Flame Proof Voltage supply 8 .. 30 V DC
I M2 Ex d I Mb Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db 0 .. 100 % FS
IECEx Flame Proof Weight ~ 280 g (probe length 10.7 mm)
Ex d I Mb ~ 350 g (probe length 250 mm)
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb ~ 385 g (probe length 350 mm)
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage and override short circuit
Special features: 1)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.5 % FS typ. 2)
 Certificates:
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100 X
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
 Robust design
 Pressure resistant to 600 bar
E 18.387.1/11.13
(depending on model)
211
Conduit (single cores) Approvals CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required
ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Class III
Type 4
Core ETS 4549-A
ATEX:
red Signal + I M2 Ex d I Mb
black Signal -
green- Housing
yellow IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Conduit (flying leads) Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Model code:
ETS 4 5 4 X – A– D – XXX – 000 (2m)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
Core ETS 454G-A 9 = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
single cores
white Signal +
G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit (male thread),
brown Signal - flying leads
green n.c. Signal
yellow n.c. A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
Approval
12 ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Probe length
010 = 10.7 mm
100 = 100 mm
250 = 250 mm
350 = 350 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found
E 18.387.1/11.13
212
Dimensions:
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:
E 18.387.1/11.13

For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
213
12
214
E 18.387.1/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4700
ATEX Intrinsically Safe
ATEX Dustproof Enclosure
ATEX Non-sparking

The pressure transmitter HDA 4700 Input data
in ATEX version has been specially Measuring ranges1) -1 .. 9; 6; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 20; 15; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based Burst pressures 100; 100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
on the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852
G1/2 DIN 3852
As with the industry model, the Torque value 20 Nm
HDA 4700 in ATEX version has a Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
stainless steel measurement cell with 1.4404; 1.4301
thin-film strain gauge. Seal: FPM
Output data
Intended areas of application are, for Output signal permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
example, in the oil and gas industry, in RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
mining, on gas turbines or in locations Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
with high levels of dust contamination, Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
e.g. in mills. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
Protection types and applications: Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max. 12
I M1 Ex ia I Ma Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga to DIN 16086
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85°C Da Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100°C Da Operating temperature range2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
T500T90/T100/T110°C Da Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 ... +60 °C
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100°C Dc EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100°C Dc EN 50303
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. IP 67 (for M12x1 male when an
 Certificates: IP 67 connector is used)
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
KEMA 05ATEX1021 Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
≤1W
 Very small temperature error Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
 Excellent EMC characteristics Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
Insulation voltage 3) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
 Excellent durability EN 61000-6-2
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
E 18.335.2/11.13

FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range, B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
215
Areas of application:
Code No.for use
1 9 A C
in Model code
Protection type II 1D Ex ta lllC T80°C
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
T500T90°C Da
I M1 Ex ia I Ma II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc II 3D Ex ic lllC T80°C Dc
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85°C Da
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
Certificate KEMA 05ATEX1016 X / KEMA 05ATEX1021
Group I Group II, lll Group II Group II Group IIl Group II, lll
Category M1 Category 1G, 1/2G, 1D Category 2G Category 3G Category 1D, 2D Category 3G, 3D
Mining Gases/conductive dust Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust
Zones / Protection Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
Categories class: intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia Non-sparking nA Dustproof enclosure Intrinsically safe ic
intrinsically with barrier with barrier with barrier
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model
code)
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100° C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db
and ll 3D Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type II 3G Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.

Binder series 714 M18 HDA 4 7 X X – A – XXXX – A N X – 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
Pin HDA 47X4-A (DIN 43650)
1 n.c. (connector supplied)
6 = Male, M12x1, 4 pole
2 Signal +
3 Signal - Signal
12 4 n.c. A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 0009 (-1..9); 0006; 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection code "2")
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Protection types and applications (code)
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga
Pin HDA 47X5-A II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
1 Signal + II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da
2 Signal - 9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
3 n.c. A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
^ Housing II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
C = II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
* For design and electrical connection see device dimensions
Accessories:
Pin HDA 47X6-A
1 Signal +
E 18.335.2/11.13
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
216
Dimensions: Note:
Protection types and applications (code): 1, C the operating conditions and applications
described.
profile seal ring

Binder series 714-4p 3p +PE EN 175301-803
(DIN43650) male electr. conn. 4p
M18
□ 18 M12x1
18.3
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex. SW27
12
2+0,3
Elastomer profile G1/4 A

seal ring
Ø 18.9 -0.2
DIN3869
Ø 29.5
hex. SW27 12
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection ratings and areas of application (code): 9, A
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27
E 18.335.2/11.13

The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. A straight female connector is Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
required for electrical connection; e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part No. 6098243 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
217
12
218
E 18.335.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4400
ATEX Non-sparking

in ATEX version has been specially Measuring ranges1) 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
on the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852
G1/2 DIN 3852
HDA 4400 in ATEX version has a Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
stainless steel measurement cell with 1.4404; 1.4301
Seal: FPM
thin-film strain gauge.
Output data
Intended areas of application are, for Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
example, in the oil and gas industry, in RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
with high levels of dust contamination, Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
e.g. in mills. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
Protection types and applications: Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Operating temperature range -20 .. +60 °C
T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da
Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +60° C / -20° .. +60 °C
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc EN 50303
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Special features: and Binder 714 M18)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. IP 67 (for M12x1 when an IP 67 connector is used)
 Certificates: Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
KEMA 05ATEX1021 Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA ≤1W
Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
 Very small temperature error Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
 Excellent EMC characteristics Insulation voltage 3) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
 Excellent durability Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
E 18.336.2/11.13
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
219
Code No. for use
1 9 A C
in Model code
T500T90°C Da
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model
code)
Pin connections:
Model code:
HDA 4 4 X X – A – XXXX – A N X – 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Pin HDA 44X4-A 5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
1 n.c. (connector supplied)
2 Signal + 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole
3 Signal -
Signal
12 4 n.c. A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Protection type and applications (code)
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Pin HDA 44X5-A II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
1 Signal + II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da
2 Signal - 9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. conn. “6“)*
3 n.c. A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. "6")*
^ Housing II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
ll 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
M12x1
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Pin HDA 44X6-A in the Accessories brochure.
1 Signal +
E 18.336.2/11.13
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
220
Dimensions: Note:
Protection types and applications (code): 1, C the operating conditions and
profile seal ring
male connection male connection

(DIN43650) male connection 4p
M18
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex-SW27
12
2+0,3

seal ring
Ø 18.9 -0.2
DIN3869
Ø 29.5
hex-SW27
12
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection types and applications (code): 9, A
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-SW27
E 18.336.2/11.13

The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. A straight female connector is Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
required for electrical connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part No. 6098243 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
221
12
222
E 18.336.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4300
ATEX Non-sparking

in ATEX version has been specially Measuring ranges -1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based Burst pressures 5; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
on the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
ATEX version HDA 4300 has a ceramic Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
Mech. connection: 1.4301
measurement cell with thick-film strain Seal: FPM / EPDM
gauge. Output data
example, in the oil and gas industry, in RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
with high levels of dust contamination,
Protection types and applications:
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Operating temperature range -20 .. +60 °C
T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db Fluid temperature range 1) -40 °C .. +60 °C / -20 °C .. +60 °C
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
EN 50303
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. and Binder 714 M18)
 Certificates: IP 67 ( for M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X is used)
KEMA 05ATEX1021 Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
 Very small temperature error ≤1W
 Excellent EMC characteristics Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
 Excellent durability Insulation voltage 2) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.337.2/11.13
Weight ~ 180 g
1)
2)
500 V AC on request
223
Code No.for use
1 9 A C
in Model code
T500T90°C Da
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model
code)
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da, II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db
and ll 3D Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc are available with flying leads on request.

Binder series 714 M18 HDA 4 3 4 X – A – XXXX – A N X – 000 –X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
Pin HDA 4344-A 6 = Male, M12x1, 4 pole
1 n.c. (connector not supplied)
Signal
2 Signal +
3 Signal - Pressure ranges in bar
12 4 n.c. 0001(-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. conn. “6“)*
Pin HDA 4345-A
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80°C T500T90°C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. "6")*
1 Signal + II 2D Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
2 Signal - C = II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80°C Dc
3 n.c.
Modification number
^ Housing 000 = Standard
M12x1 F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Pin HDA 4346-A in the Accessories brochure.
1 Signal +
E 18.337.2/11.13
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
224
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring

M18
□ 18 M12x1
18.3
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex. SW27
12
2+0,3

seal ring
Ø 18.9 -0.2
DIN3869
Ø 29.5
Protection types and applications (code): 9, A 12
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27
The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. A straight female connector is
required for electrical connection; e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part No. 6098243
E 18.337.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
225
12
226
E 18.337.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4100
ATEX Dustproof housing
ATEX Non-sparking

The pressure transmitter Input data
HDA 4100 in ATEX version has Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
been specially developed for use in Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
for absolute measurement in the low Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
pressure range and is based on the Torque value 20 Nm
HDA 4000 series. Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
Mech. connection: 1.4301
As with the industry model, the Seal: FPM / EPDM
ATEX version HDA 4100 has a ceramic Output data
measurement cell with thick-film strain Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
gauge. RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
Intended areas of application are, for Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
example, in the oil and gas industry, in
mining, on gas turbines or in locations (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
with high levels of dust contamination, Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
e.g. in mills. Zero point ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. 12
Protection types and applications: Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
I M1 Ex ia I Ma to DIN 16086
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Environmental conditions
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Fluid temperature range1) -40 °C .. +60 °C / -20 °C .. +60 °C
T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
EN 50303
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)
Special features: IP 67 (for M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. is used)
 Certificates: Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
KEMA 05ATEX1021 Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
≤1W
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
 Very small temperature error Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
 Excellent EMC characteristics EN 61000-6-2
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.338.2/11.13
Weight ~ 180 g
1)
2)
500 V AC on request
227
Code No.for use
1 9 A C
in Model code
T500T90°C Da
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model
code)

Binder series 714 M18 HDA 4 1 4 X – A – XXXX – A N X – 000 –X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
Pin HDA 4144-A 6 = Male, M12x1, 4 pole
1 n.c. (connector not supplied)
Signal
2 Signal + A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
12 4 n.c. 01.0; 02.5
Approval
A = ATEX
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6") *
Pin HDA 4145-A A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
1 Signal + II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
3 n.c.
Modification number
^ Housing 000 = Standard
M12x1 F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
Accessories:
Pin HDA 4146-A in the Accessories brochure.
1 Signal +
E 18.338.2/11.13
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
228
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring

M18
□ 18 M12x1
18.3
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex. SW27
12
2+0,3

seal ring
Ø 18.9 -0.2
DIN3869
Ø 29.5
Protection types and applications (code): 9, A 12
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27
3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Part. No. 6098243
E 18.338.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
229
12
230
E 18.338.2/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch

The programmable pressure switch Input data
EDS 4400 in ATEX version has Measuring ranges 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
been specially developed for use in Overload pressures 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres, and Burst pressure 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
is based on the EDS 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch- Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
back point, the function of the 1.4404; 1.4301
switching outputs as N/C or N/O Seal: FPM
and the switching delay are user- Output data
programmable in conjunction with the Switch output 1 x PNP N/C or N/O
Output load during operation: Imax ≤ 34 mA
HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000.
Switching points user-programmable with HYDAC
As with the industry model, the Programming Unit HPG 3000
programmable EDS 4400 in ATEX Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
version has a stainless steel Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
measurement cell with thin-film strain Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
gauge for measuring relative pressure Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range 12
in the high pressure range. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms; user-programmable with
HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
With approval for the following Environmental conditions
Protection types and applications: Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
I M1 Ex ia I Fluid temperature range -20 .. +60 °C / +70 °C / +85 °C
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26
II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100°C
almost all requirements are covered DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
regarding ignition group, error class Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
and temperature class. is used)
Relevant data for Ex applications
Versions for other Protection types I M1 II 1 D
and applications are available upon II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
request. Supply voltage 14 .. 28 V DC
Compensated temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
Special features: T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Switching point and switch-back Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
point are user-programmable T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
T5, T4: +70 °C
 Certificates:
Max. input current 100 mA 93 mA
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X Max. input power 0.7 W 0.65 W
 Very small temperature error Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
Max. internal inductance 0 mH 0 mH
 Excellent EMC characteristics Insulation voltage 1) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
 Excellent durability protection EN 61000-6-2
Approved intrinsic safety barriers Pepperl & Fuchs: Z 787
Telematic Ex STOCK: MTL 7087
Other data
E 18.339.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
231
Setting options: Areas of application:
In conjunction with the HYDAC Code No.
Programming Unit HPG 3000, all the for use in
settings are combined in an easy-to-follow 1 2 3 8
Model
menu. code
Setting ranges for the switch Protection I M1 Ex ia I II 1G Ex ia IIC II 2G Ex ia IIC II 1D Ex iaD 20

Type T4, T5, T6 II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T100 °C
outputs: T4, T5, T6
Measuring Increment DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM
range in bar in bar Certificate BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX
0 .. 60 0.1 E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
0 .. 100 0.2 Group I Group II Group II Group II

Category M1 Category 1G Category 2G, 1/2G Category iD
0 .. 250 0.5
Mining Gases Gases Dusts
0 .. 400 1 Protection Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
0 .. 600 1 class: intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia
Zones / intrinsically with barrier with barrier with barrier
The switch point (upper switch value) Categories safe ia with For use in Zone 0 For use in Zone For use in Zone
on all instruments is between barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range For mounting to For mounting to
and the switch-back point (lower Zone 0 Zone 20
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 %
T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
of the measuring range.
T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
Minimum Maximum
Electrical 8 8 8 8
value value
in ms in ms Connection
Switch-on
Instruments for other Protection types and applications are available on request.
delay 8 2040 Please contact our technical sales department for more information.
Ton1/Ton2
Switch-off Model code:
delay
ToF1/ToF2
8 2040
EDS 4 4 4 8 – XXXX – P – A N X – 000
The increment for all instruments is 8 ms. Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
Pin connections: Electrical connection
M12x1, 5 pole (connector not supplied)
12 Pressure ranges in bar
4 3 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
5 Switching output
P = Programmable
1 2
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Pin Process HPG Protection types and applications (code)
connection connection 1 = I M1 Ex ia I
2 = II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
1 +UB +UB 3 = II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 / II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
2 0V Comport 1 * 8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C
3 0V 0V Modification number
000 = Standard
4 Out 1 n.c.
5 0V Comport 2 *
* Comport = programming connection Accessories:
E 18.339.2/11.13
232
Safety instructions: Note:
 These units must only be programmed outside the potentially explosive location. The information in this brochure relates to
 When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables
may only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area. For applications or operating conditions
 The switching output draws the switching energy from the power supply to the not described, please contact the relevant
pressure switch. No additional energy is introduced into the electrical circuit technical department.
through the switching output. Subject to technical modifications.
 The dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be
used to connect the pressure switch.
These have a reverse polarity diode to decouple the signal.
The signal path may only be passively loaded.
 Ensure that measured fluids in contact with the pressure switch are compatible
with the materials used.
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 12
Programming Unit:
(must be ordered separately)
HPG 3000 – 000
Part. No. 909 422
electr. conn.
E 18.339.2/11.13
female 5 pole HYDAC electronic GmbH

Caution: Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
The HPG 3000 Programming Unit may only be used outside the potentially explosive Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
area. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
233
12
234
E 18.339.2/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch

EDS 4300 in ATEX version was Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
specially developed for use in Overload pressures 3; 8, 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres and Burst pressures 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch- Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
back point, the function of the Mech. connection: 1.4301
switching outputs as N/C or N/O Seal: FPM / EPDM
HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000.
Switching points user-programmable with HYDAC
version has a ceramic measurement Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
cell with thick-film strain gauge for Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
measuring relative pressure in the low ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range 12
pressure range. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms; user-programmable with
With approval for the following HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
I M1 Ex ia I Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 Fluid temperature range -20 .. +60 °C / +70 °C / +85 °C
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
almost all requirements are covered Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
regarding ignition group, error class DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
and temperature class. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Versions for other Protection types (M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)
and applications are available on
I M1 II 1 D
request. II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Special features: T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Switching point and switch-back T100: -20 .. +70 °C
point user-programmable Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Certificates: Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X T5, T4: +70 °C
 Very small temperature error Max. input power 0.7 W 0.65 W
 Excellent EMC characteristics Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
 Excellent durability Insulation voltage 1) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
protection EN 61000-6-2
Other data
E 18.340.1/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
235
In conjunction with the HYDAC Programming Code No.
Unit HPG 3000, all the settings are for use in
combined in an easy-to-follow menu. 1 2 3 8
Model
code
outputs: Type T4, T5, T6 II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T100 °C
T4, T5, T6
Measuring range Increment in bar
in bar DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM
Certificate BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX
0 .. 1 0.002
E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
0 .. 2.5 0.005
Group I Group II Group II Group II
0 .. 4 0.01 Category M1 Category 1G Category 2G, 1/2G Category iD
0 .. 6 0.01 Mining Gases Gases Dusts
0 .. 10 0.02 Protection Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
class: intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia
0 .. 16 0.05 Zones / intrinsically with barrier with barrier with barrier
0 .. 25 0.1 Categories safe ia with For use in Zone 0 For use in Zone For use in Zone
barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
0 .. 40 0.1
For mounting to For mounting to
The switch point (upper switch value) Zone 0 Zone 20
on all instruments is between T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
and the switch-back point (lower
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 % Electrical 8 8 8 8
of the measuring range. Connection
Minimum Maximum
value in ms value in ms Please contact our technical sales department for more information.
Switch-on
delay 8 2040 Model code:
Ton1/Ton2 EDS 4 3 4 8 – XXXX – P – A N X – 000 – X 1
Switch-off
delay 8 2040 Mechanical connection
ToF1/ToF2 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
The increment for all instruments is 8 ms. Electrical connection
Pin connections: (connector not supplied)
M12x1, 5 pole
01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Switching output
4
5
3 P = Programmable
Approval
1 2 A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
Pin Process HPG 1 = I M1 Ex ia I
2 = II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
1 +UB +UB 3 = II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 / II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
2 0V Comport 1 * 8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C
3 0V 0V Modification number
000 = Standard
4 Out 1 n.c.
5 0V Comport 2 * F = FPM seal (e.g.: for hydraulic oils)
* Comport = programming connection E = EPDM seal (e.g.: for refrigerants)
1 = Stainless steel
Accessories:
E 18.340.1/11.13
236
 When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables may
only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area. For applications or operating conditions
 Dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be used to
connect the pressure switch.
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 12
Programming Unit:
HPG 3000 – 000
Part. No. 909 422
electr. conn.
E 18.340.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
237
12
238
E 18.340.1/11.13
Electronic
Pressure Switch

EDS 4100 in ATEX version has Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres and Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch- Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
back point, the function of the Mech. connection: 1.4301
switching outputs as N/C or N/O Seal: FPM / EPDM
HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000. Switching points user-programmable with HYDAC
version has a ceramic measurement Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
cell with thick-film strain gauge for
measuring absolute pressure in the ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range 12
low pressure range. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms; user-programmable with
With approval for the following HYDAC Programming Unit HPG 3000
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
and temperature class. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
(M12x1, when an IP 67 connector is used)
Versions for other Protection types
and applications are available on I M1 II 1 D
request. II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Special features: T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Switching point and switch-back T100: -20 .. +70 °C
point user-programmable Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Certificates: Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X T5, T4: +70 °C
 Excellent EMC characteristics Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
Other data
E 18.341.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
and short circuit protection are provided. FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
500 V AC on request
239
In conjunction with the HYDAC Code No.
Programming Unit HPG 3000, all the for use in
settings are combined in an easy-to-follow 1 2 3 8
Model
menu. code

Type T4, T5, T6 II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T100 °C
outputs: T4, T5, T6
Measuring Increment DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM
range in bar in bar Certificate BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX BVS 07 ATEX
0 .. 1 0.002 E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
0 .. 2.5 0.005 Group I Group II Group II Group II

The switch point (upper switch value) Mining Gases Gases Dusts
on all instruments is between
Protection Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
5 % and 100 % of the measuring range
and the switch-back point (lower
switch value) is between 1 % and 96 % Categories safe ia with
of the measuring range. For use in Zone 0 For use in Zone For use in Zone
barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
Minimum Maximum For mounting to For mounting to
value value Zone 0 Zone 20
in ms in ms
T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
Switch-on T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
delay 8 2040
Ton1/Ton2 Electrical 8 8 8 8
Connection
Switch-off
delay 8 2040 Instruments for other Protection types and applications are available on request.
ToF1/ToF2 Please contact our technical sales department for more information.
The increment for all instruments is 8 ms.
Model code:
Pin connections: EDS 4 1 4 8 – XXXX – P – A N X – 000 – X 1
M12x1, 5 pole
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
4
5
1 2
01.0; 02.5
Switching output
Pin Process HPG P = Programmable
Approval
1 +UB +UB A = ATEX
2 0V Comport 1 * Insulation voltage
3 0V 0V N = 50 V AC
4 Out 1 n.c.
1 = I M1 Ex ia I
5 0V Comport 2 * 2 = II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
* Comport = programming connection 3 = II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 / II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
8 = II 1D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Accessories:
E 18.341.2/11.13
240
 When operating in potentially explosive locations, the programming cables may
only be connected to the 0 V outside of the potentially explosive area. For applications or operating conditions
 Dual Zener barriers specified and approved in the technical data must be used to
connect the pressure switch.
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869 12
Programming Unit:
HPG 3000 – 000
Part. No. 909 422
electr. conn.
E 18.341.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
241
12
242
E 18.341.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4700
CSA Intrinsically safe
CSA Non Incendive

in CSA version has been specially Measuring ranges1)2) -1 .. 9; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
developed for the North American Overload pressures 20; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
market for use in potentially explosive Burst pressures 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Mechanical connection2) G1/4 A DIN 3852
HDA 4000 series. G1/2 DIN 3852
Torque value 20 Nm; 40 Nm
As with the industry model, the Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
HDA 4700 in CSA version has a 1.4404; 1.4301
stainless steel measurement cell with Seal: FPM
thin-film strain gauge. Output data
Intended areas of application are, for RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
example, the oil and gas industry, on Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
gas turbines or in locations with high Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
levels of dust, e.g. in mills. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
Protection types and applications: Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
Intrinsically safe: 12
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6 [C, US] Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
- Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6 [US] Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
- Ex ia IIC T6 [C] to DIN 16086
- Class I, II, III
Div. 1 Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G T6 [C, US] Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Non incendive: Compensated temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D T4A [C, US] Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nL IIC T4 [US] Operating temperature range3) Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nL IIC T4 [C] Non incendive: -40 .. +85 °C / -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I, II, III Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Div. 2 Fluid temperature range3) Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Non incendive: -40 .. +85 °C / -20 .. +85 °C
Group A, B, C, D, F, G T4A [C, US]
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nA II T4 [US] mark Certificate No.: CSA 1760344
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II T4 [C] Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 / NEMA Min. IP 65
Special features: (depending on the electr. connection) Min. NEMA 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. Relevant data for Ex applications
 Certificate: CSA 1760344 Supply voltage 12 .. 28 V DC
Max. input current 100 mA
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Max. input power up to 28 V: 1 W
 Very small temperature error Connection capacitance of the sensor ≤ 22 nF
Inductance of the sensor 0 mH
Insulation voltage 4) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
E 18.342.2/11.13

1)
psi pressure ranges on request
2)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G 1/2 DIN 3852 and vice versa.
3)
-20 °C with FPM seal, -40 C on request
4)
500 V AC on request
243
Conduit (single cores) Group 1 2 3 4
Protection Intrinsically safe Intrinsically safe Non incendive Non incendive
Type (with field cabling)
Gases and dusts Gases Gases Gases and dusts
Certificate CSA 1760344
Intrinsically safe Intrinsically safe Non incendive Non incendive
- Class I, II, III Ex ia IIC T6 - Class I - Class I, II, III

- Division 1 - Division 2 - Division 2
- Group - Class I - Group - Group
Core HDA 47X9-A A, B, C, D, E, F, G - Zone 0 A, B, C, D A, B, C, D, F, G
T6 - AEx ia IIC T6 T4A T4A
green Signal + Zones /
white Signal - Categories - Class I - Class I - Class I
- Division I - Zone 2 - Zone 2
green- Housing - Group - AEx nL IIC T4 - Ex nA II T4
yellow A, B, C, D
T6 - Class I - Class I
- Zone 2 - Zone 2
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) - Ex nL IIC T4 - AEx nA II T4 IP 6x
Electrical 9, A 5, 9, A 5, 9, A 9
Connection
Code for A B C
Model Code
Pin HDA 47X5-A HDA 47XA-A

1 Signal + Signal + Model code:
2 Signal - Signal - HDA 4 7 X X – A – XXXX – C N X – 000 (2m)
3 n.c. n.c. Mechanical connection
^ Housing Housing 2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
(only for pressure range "1000 bar")
12 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
9 = Conduit connection thread
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
(1/2’’ conduit female thread)
Signal
0009 (-1..9); 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m (only for electr. connection type 9)
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
E 18.342.2/11.13
244
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
E 18.342.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
245
12
246
E 18.342.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4400
CSA Non Incendive

in CSA version has been specially Measuring ranges1) 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
developed for the North American Overload pressures 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900; 1600 bar
market for use in potentially explosive Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Mechanical connection1) G1/2 A DIN 3852
HDA 4000 series. G1/4 A DIN 3852
As with the industry model, the Torque value 45 Nm; 20 Nm
HDA 4400 in CSA version has a Parts in contact with medium2) Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301
stainless steel measurement cell with
Seal: FPM
thin-film strain gauge.
Output data
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
example, the oil and gas industry, on
gas turbines or in locations with high Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
levels of dust, e.g. in mills. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
Intrinsically safe: Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max. 12
- Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D T6 [C, US] Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
- Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6 [US] Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
- Ex ia IIC T6 [C] Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
- Class I, II, III Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
Div. 1
Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G T6 [C, US]
Non incendive: Environmental conditions
- Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D T4A [C, US] Compensated temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nL IIC T4 [US] Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nL IIC T4 [C] Operating temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I, II, III Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
Div. 2 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Group A, B, C, D, F, G T4A [C, US] Fluid temperature range3) Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nA II T4 [US] Non incendive: -40 .. +85 °C / -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II T4 [C] mark Certificate No.: CSA 1760344
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529 / NEMA Min. IP 65
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. (depending on the electr. connection) Min. NEMA 4
 Certificate: CSA 1760344 Relevant data for Ex applications
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Supply voltage 12 .. 28 V DC
 Very small temperature error Max. input power up to 28 V: 1 W
 Excellent EMC characteristics Connection capacitance of the sensor ≤ 22 nF
 Excellent durability Inductance of the sensor 0 mH
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range, B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line
1)
1000 bar only with mechanical connection G ½ DIN 3852 and vice versa
2)
3)
4)
500 V AC on request
247

yellow A, B, C, D
- Zone 2 - Zone 2
Electrical 9, A 5, 9, A 5, 9, A 9
Connection
Code for A B C
Model Code
Pin HDA 44X5-A HDA 44XA-A Model code:

1 Signal + Signal + HDA 4 4 X X – A – XXXX – C N X – 000 (2m)
2 Signal - Signal - Mechanical connection
3 n.c. n.c. 2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
^ (only for pressure range "1000 bar")
Housing Housing
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
12
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
(1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m (only for electr. connection code 9)
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
248
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
E 18.342.1.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
249
12
250
E 18.342.1.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4300
CSA Non Incendive

in CSA version has been specially Measuring ranges1) -1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
developed for the North American Overload pressures 3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
market for use in potentially explosive Burst pressures 5; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
HDA 4000 series. Torque value 20 Nm
As with the industry model, the Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic Al203
HDA 4300 in CSA version has a ceramic Mech. conn.: 1.4301
measurement cell with thick-film strain Seal: FPM / EPDM
gauge for measuring relative pressure in Output data
the low pressure range. Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
example, the oil and gas industry, on gas Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
turbines or in locations with high levels of Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
dust, e.g. in mills. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Div. 1
Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G T6 [C, US]
Non incendive:
- Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D T4A [C, US]
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nL IIC T4 [US] Compensated temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nL IIC T4 [C] Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
Operating temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I, II, III Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
Div. 2 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Group A, B, C, D, F, G T4A [C, US] Fluid temperature range2) Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nA II T4 [US] Non incendive: -40 .. +85 °C / -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II T4 [C]
mark Certificate No.: CSA 1760344
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Protection class to IEC 60529 / NEMA Min. IP 65
(depending on the electr. connection) Min. NEMA 4
 Certificate: CSA 1760344 Relevant data for Ex applications
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Supply voltage 12 .. 28 V DC
 Very small temperature error Max. input current 100 mA
Max. input power up to 28 V: 1 W
 Excellent EMC characteristics Connection capacitance of the sensor ≤ 22 nF
 Excellent durability Inductance of the sensor 0 mH
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.343.2/11.13
Weight ~ 180 g
1)
2)
-20 °C with FPM or EPDM seal, -40° on request
3)
500 V AC on request 251

yellow A, B, C, D
- Zone 2 - Zone 2
Electrical 9, A 5, 9, A 5, 9, A 9
Connection
Code for A B C
Model Code
Model code:
HDA 4 3 4 X – A – XXXX – C N X – 000 – X 1 (2m)
1 Signal + Signal + 4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2 Signal - Signal - Electrical connection
5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE, EN175301-803
3 n.c. n.c. (DIN 43650)
^ Housing Housing (connector supplied)
12 (1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male, EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
0001(-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
E 18.343.2/11.13
252
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.343.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
253
12
254
E 18.343.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4100
CSA Non Incendive

in CSA version has been specially Measuring ranges1) 1; 2.5 bar
developed for the North American Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
market for use in potentially explosive Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
HDA 4000 series. Torque value 20 Nm
As with the industry model, the Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic Al203
HDA 4100 in CSA version has a Mech. conn.: 1.4301
ceramic measurement cell with thick- Seal: FPM / EPDM
film strain gauge for measuring absolute Output data
pressure in the low pressure range. Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 ..20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax.= (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
Intended areas of application are, for Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
example, the oil and gas industry, on Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
gas turbines or in locations with high Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
levels of dust, e.g. in mills. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Div. 1 Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G T6 [C, US] Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Non incendive:
- Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D T4A [C, US] Compensated temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nL IIC T4 [US] Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nL IIC T4 [C] Operating temperature range Intrinsically safe: -20 .. +60 °C
Non incendive: -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I, II, III
Div. 2 Fluid temperature range2) Intrinsically safe: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Group A, B, C, D, F, G T4A [C, US] Non incendive: -40 .. +85 °C / -20 .. +85 °C
- Class I Zone 2 AEx nA II T4 [US] mark Certificate No.: CSA 1760344
- Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II T4 [C] Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 / NEMA Min. IP 65
Special features: (depending on the electr. connection) Min. NEMA 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Relevant data for Ex applications
 Certificate: CSA 1760344 Supply voltage 12 .. 28 V DC
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA
Max. input power up to 28 V: 1 W
 Very small temperature error Connection capacitance of the sensor ≤ 22 nF
 Excellent EMC characteristics Inductance of the sensor 0 mH
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.344.2/11.13
Weight ~ 180 g
1)
2)
-20°C with FPM or EPDM seal, -40° on request
3)

yellow A, B, C, D
- Zone 2 - Zone 2
Electrical 9, A 5, 9, A 5, 9, A 9
Connection
Code for A B C
Model Code
Model code:
HDA 4 1 4 X – A – XXXX – C N X – 000 – X 1 (2m)
1 Signal + Signal + Mechanical connection
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
2 Signal - Signal - Electrical connection
3 n.c. n.c. 5 = Male, 3 pole+ PE,
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
^ Housing Housing (connector supplied)
12 (1/2-14 NPT, male)
A = Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
Signal
01.0; 02.5
Approval
C = CSA
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
A = Group 1
B = Group 2 and 3
C = Group 4
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
E 18.344.2/11.13
256
Dimensions: Note:
described.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

3pole+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
welded
hex.-SW27
12
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.344.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
257
12
258
E 18.344.2/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4700
IECEx Intrinsically Safe
IECEx Dustproof Enclosure
IECEx Non-sparking

IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has Measuring ranges1) -1 .. 9; 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600;
been especially developed for use in 1000 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres and Overload pressures 20; 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000;
1600 bar
is based on the HDA 4000 series.
Burst pressure 100; 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000;
As with the industrial version of the 3000 bar
HDA 4700, devices with IECEx Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
Intrinsically Safe approval have a (torque value) G1/2 DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
field-proven, all-welded stainless steel Parts in contact with medium Stainl. steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
1.4404; 1.4301
measurement cell with thin film strain Seal: FPM
gauge without internal seal. Output data
example, in the oil and gas industry, in RLmax = (UB - 12 V) / 20 mA [kW]
mining, on gas turbines or in locations Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
with high dust loads, e.g. in mills. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
Protection types and applications: (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max. 12
Ex ia l Ma Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
Ex ia llC T6 Ga Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
Ex ia llC T6 Gb to DIN 16086
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
T500 90/100/110 °C Da Environmental conditions
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db Operating temperature range2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex ia lllC T85 °C Da mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4;
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN175301-803
 Certificate: IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
IECEx TSA 09.0041X / IP 67 female connector is used)
IECEx KEM 08.0014X Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
 Robust design Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
≤1W
 Excellent EMC characteristics Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
 Excellent long-term properties EN 61000-6-2
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.392.1/11.13
Weight ~ 150 g
1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
259
Protection types Ex ta lllC T80 °C
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga Ex ic llC T6 Gc
and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90 °C Da Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
applications Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
Equipment protec- Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment

tion level protection level protection level protection level protection level protection level protection level
Ma Ga, Ga/Gb Gb Gc Da, Db Gc, Dc Da
Zones /
Mining Gases Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust Conductive dust
Categories
Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia non-sparking nA Dustproof Intrinsically safe ic intrinsically safe ia
with barrier with barrier with barrier enclosure with barrier with barrier
Electrical connection 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6
Code for IECEx IECEx

use in Australia
Model code
1 ü ü ü ü ü
9 ü ü
A ü ü
C ü ü
D ü ü ü ü ü
Certificate numbers: IECEx TSA 09.0041X, IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, Ex tb lllC
T80/90/100 °C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Model code:
HDA 4 7 X X – A – XXXX – I N X – 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852
(only for "1000 bar" pressure range)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male)
4 = Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
12 6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
0009 (-1..9); 0006; 0016; 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600;
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
A = Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85 °C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
* For design and electrical connection see Dimensions
E 18.392.1/11.13
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found in the Accessories brochure.
260
Protection types and applications: (code): 1, C, D Binder series 714 M18
profile seal
ring
Pin HDA 47x4-A

1 n.c.
male electr. conn.
Binder series 714, -4p male electr. conn. male electr. conn. 2 Signal +
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin HDA 47x5-A
1 Signal +
2 Signal -
hex-SW27
3 n.c.
^ Housing
elastomer 12
profile gasket M12x1
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection types and applications: (code): 9, A Pin HDA 47x6-A

1 Signal +
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.392.1/11.13
required for electrical connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with
261
Note:
12
E 18.392.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
262
Electronic
HDA 4400
IECEx Non-sparking

IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has been Measuring ranges1) 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
especially developed for use in potentially Overload ranges 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based on Burst pressure 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection1) G1/2 DIN 3852 (45 Nm)
As with the industrial version of the (Torque value) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
HDA 4400, devices with IECEx Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
Intrinsically Safe approval have a 1.4404; 1.4301
Seal: FPM
field-proven, all-welded stainless steel
Output data
measurement cell with thin film strain
Output signal, permitted load resistance conductor
4 .. 20 mA, 2
gauge without internal seal. RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
example, in the oil and gas industry, in Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
mining, on gas turbines or in locations Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
with high dust loads, e.g. in mills.
Protection types and applications: 12
Ex ia l Ma Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
Ex ia llC T6 Ga to DIN 16086
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
Ex ia llC T6 Gb Repeatability ≤ ± 0.25 % FS
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
T500 90/100/110 °C Da Operating temperature range -20 .. +60 °C
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex ia lllC T85 °C Da Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) and
Special features: Binder 714 M18)
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. IP 67 female connector is used)
 Certificate: Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
IECEx TSA 09.0041X / Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
IECEx KEM 08.0014X Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
 Robust design Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
 Very small temperature error Insulation voltage 3) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
 Excellent EMC characteristics EN 61000-6-2
 Excellent long-term properties Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
E 18.392.1.0/11.13

1)
2)
3)
500 V AC on request
263
Protection types Ex ta lllC T80 °C
and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90 °C Da Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
applications Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
Equipment protec- Equipment protec- Equipment pro- Equipment protec- Equipment protec- Equipment protection Equipment protec-
tion level tion level tection level tion evel tion level level tion level
Zones /
Mining Gases Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust Conductive dust
Categories
Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia non-sparking nA Dustproof Intrinsically safe ic intrinsically safe ia
with barrier with barrier with barrier enclosure with barrier with barrier
Code for IECEx IECEx

use in Australia
Model code
1 ü ü ü ü ü
9 ü ü
A ü ü
C ü ü
D ü ü ü ü ü
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, Ex tb lllC
T80/90/100 °C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
protection types Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.
Model code:
HDA 4 4 X X – A – XXXX – I N X – 000
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852 (only for "1000 bar" pressure range)
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
4 = Male 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5 = Male 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6 = Male M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
12 Signal
0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
1000 (only in conjunction with mechanical connection type "2")
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
A = Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
*For design and electrical connection see Dimensions
E 18.392.1.0/11.13
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the Accessories brochure.
264
profile seal ring
Pin HDA 44x4-A

1 n.c.
male electr. conn.
Binder series 714, -4p male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
male electr. conn. 2 Signal +
4 pole
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin HDA 44x5-A

1 Signal +
hex-SW27
2 Signal -
3 n.c.
┴ Housing
elastomer 12
profile gasket
DIN 3869
optional
M12x1, 4 pole
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
Protection types and applications: (code): 9, A

Pin HDA 44x6-A
1 Signal +
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.392.1.0/11.13
required for electrical connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, straight, with
265
Note:
12
E 18.392.1.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
266
Electronic
HDA 4300
IECEx Non-sparking

in IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has Measuring ranges -1 .. 1; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
been specially developed for use in Overload pressures 3; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres Burst pressures 5; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
and is based on the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
As with the industrial version, Torque value 20 Nm
the HDA 4300 with IECEx Intrinsically Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
Safe approval has the field-proven Mech. connection: 1.4301
Seal: FPM / EPDM
ceramic measuring cell with thick-film
Output data
strain gauge.
Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2
-conductor
Intended areas of application are, for RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
example, in the oil and gas industry, in Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
mining, on gas turbines or in locations max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
with high levels of dust contamination, Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
Protection types and applications: 12
Ex ia l Ma Over range ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
Ex ia llC T6 Ga to DIN 16086
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
Ex ia llC T6 Gb Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100°C Da Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
T500 90/100/110°C Da Operating temperature range -20 .. +60 °C
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100°C Dc - mark
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex ia lllC T85°C Da Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Special features: and Binder 714 M18)
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
 Certificate: Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
IECEx TSA 09.0041X / Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
IECEx KEM 08.0014X Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
 Excellent EMC characteristics Insulation voltage 2) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
 Excellent durability EN 61000-6-2
Other data
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 180 g
E 18.392.3.0/11.13

1)
2)
500 V AC on request
267
Protection types Ex ta lllC T80°C
and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90°C Da Ex ia lIIC T85° C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ic lllC T80°C Dc
applications Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level
standard standard standard standard standard standard standard
Zones / Mining Gases Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust Conductive dust
Categories Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
intrinsically intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia non-sparking nA Dustproof Intrinsically safe ic intrinsically safe ia
safe ia with barrier with barrier enclosure with barrier with barrier
with barrier
Code (see IECEx IECEx

model code) Australia
1 ü ü ü ü ü
9 ü ü
A ü ü
C ü ü
D ü ü ü ü ü
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100° C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, Ex tb lllC
T80/90/100°C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
Model code:
HDA 4 3 4 X – A – XXXX – I N X – 000 – X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6 = Male, M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
12 A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
0001 (-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
A = Ex ta lllC T80°C T500T90°C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection 6")*
Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
Ex ic lllC T80°C Dc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85°C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
E 18.392.3.0/11.13
Accessories:
268
Protection types and applications (code): 1, C, D Binder series 714 M18
profile seal ring
Pin HDA 43x4-A

1 n.c.
male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 pole
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin HDA 43x5-A

1 Signal +
2 Signal -
3 n.c.
┴ Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole

Pin HDA 43x6-A
1 Signal +
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex.-SW27
E 18.392.3.0/11.13
269
Note:
described.
12
E 18.392.3.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
270
Electronic
HDA 4100
IECEx Non-sparking

in IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
for absolute measurement in the low Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
pressure range and is based Torque value 20 Nm
on the HDA 4000 series. Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
As with the industrial version, the Mech. connection: 1.4301
Seal: FPM / EPDM
HDA 4100 with IECEx Intrinsically Safe
Output data
approval has the field-proven ceramic
Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2
conductor
measuring cell with thick-film strain RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
gauge without interior seals. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
Intended areas of application are, for max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
example, in the oil and gas industry, in Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
mining, on gas turbines or in locations (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
with high levels of dust contamination, Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
zero point ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
e.g. in mills. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ. 12
over range ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
Protection types and applications: Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
Ex ia l Ma to DIN 16086
Ex ia llC T6 Ga Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
Ex ia llC T6 Gb Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Environmental conditions
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100°C Da Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
T500 90/100/110°C Da Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
- mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100°C Dc DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Ex ia lllC T85°C Da Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
and Binder 714 M18)
Special features: Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
 Certificate: Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
IECEx TSA 09.0041X / ≤1W
IECEx KEM 08.0014X Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
 Output signal 4 .. 20 mA Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
 Very small temperature error EN 61000-6-2
 Excellent durability Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 180 g
E 18.392.2.0/11.13

1)
2)
500 V AC on request
271
Protection types Ex ta lllC T80°C
and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90°C Da Ex ia lIIC T85° C Da
Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ic lllC T80°C Dc
applications Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level Equipment level
standard standard standard standard standard standard standard
Zones / Mining Gases Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust Conductive dust
Categories Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
intrinsically intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia non-sparking nA Dustproof Intrinsically safe ic intrinsically safe ia
safe ia with barrier with barrier enclosure with barrier with barrier
with barrier
Code (see IECEx IECEx

model code) Australia
1 ü ü ü ü ü
9 ü ü
A ü ü
C ü ü
D ü ü ü ü ü
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100° C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, Ex tb lllC
T80/90/100°C Db and Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for
Model code:
HDA 4 1 4 X – A – XXXX – I N X – 000 – X 1
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852
4 = Male, 4 pole Binder series 714 M18 (connector not supplied)
5 = Male, 3 pole + PE, EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) (connector supplied)
6 = Male, M12x1, 4 pole (connector not supplied)
Signal
12 A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
01.0; 02.5;
Approval
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
A = Ex ta lllC T80°C T500T90°C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Ex ia lllC T85°C Da
Modification number
000 = Standard
1 = Stainless steel
Notes:
E 18.392.2.0/11.13
Accessories:
272
profile seal ring
Pin HDA 41x4-A

1 n.c.
male electr. conn.
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
4 pole
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
hex.-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Pin HDA 41x5-A

1 Signal +
2 Signal -
3 n.c.
┴ Housing
12
M12x1, 4 pole

Pin HDA 41x6-A
1 Signal +
2 n.c.
3 Signal -
4 n.c.
Impact protected
metal safety
sleeve
SW25
hex.-SW27
E 18.392.2.0/11.13
273
Note:
12
E 18.392.2.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
274
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
The pressure transmitter HDA 4700 in Input data
ATEX version with flush membrane has Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
been specially developed for use in Overload ranges 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
potentially explosive atmospheres. Burst pressure 1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
Like the standard model, the HDA 4700 Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
with flush membrane has a stainless steel
Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
measurement cell with a thin film strain
Torque value 45 Nm
gauge.
Parts in contact with medium 2) Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
The pressure connection is achieved Seal: FPM
with an all-welded stainless steel O-ring: FPM
front membrane filled internally with Output data
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically to
the measurement cell via the pressure max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
transfer fluid. Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
This device is used for applications in (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
which a standard pressure connection Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
could become blocked, clogged or 12
frozen by the particular medium used. Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
Further applications include processes Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
where the medium changes regularly to DIN 16086
and any residues could cause mixing Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
or contamination of the media, or in Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
highly viscous media. Intended areas of Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
application are, for example, the oil and Long term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
gas industry, in mines or in locations with Environmental conditions
high levels of dust, e.g. in mills. Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
I M1 Ex ia I Ma Fluid temperature range3) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 1G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 31
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb EN 50303
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db ≤1W
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc Insulation voltage 4) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
 Pressure connection has a flush Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
membrane 0 .. 100 % FS
 Accuracy ≤ 0.25 % typ. Weight ~ 180 g
 Certificates: Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
provided.
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
KEMA 05ATEX1021 B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
 Robust design
1)
2)
4)
500 V AC on request
 Excellent long-term properties
275
Code used in
1 9 A C
Model code
T500T90°C Da
Zones / Mining Gases/conductive dust Gases Gases Conductive dust Gases/conductive dust
Categories Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class: Protection class:
intrinsically safe intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia Non-sparking nA Dustproof enclosure Intrinsically safe ic
ia with barrier with barrier with barrier with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model code)

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) HDA 4 7 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – A N X – 000
Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male 3 pole + PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin HDA 47Z5-A
Signal
1 Signal + A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
12 3 n.c. 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
^ Mechanical connection
Housing
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
M12x1, 4 pole Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Pin HDA 47Z6-A II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da
1 Signal + 9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
A = II 1D Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
2 n.c. II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
4 n.c. II 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical female connectors, can be found in the
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
276
Dimensions: Note:
~ 35
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5
male electr. conn. male electr.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex-
SW27
3
13.8
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
12
hex-
SW27
3
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
20.5
10
O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 18.1
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included.

A straight female connector is required for electrical HYDAC electronic GmbH
connection, e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
straight, with 3m shielded cable: ZBE 06S-03, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
Part. No. 6098243 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
277
12
278
E 18.374.1.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
in ATEX version has been specially Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for use in potentially explosive Overload ranges 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Burst pressure 1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/2A DIN 3852
As with the industrial version, the G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
G1/4 with add. front O-ring seal
HDA 4400 in ATEX version has a Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
stainless steel measurement cell with thin- Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
film strain gauge. 20 Nm for G1/4
The pressure connection is achieved Parts in contact with medium 2) Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
with an all-welded stainless steel Seal: FPM
O-ring: FPM
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically to RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
the measurement cell via the pressure Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
transfer fluid. max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
This device is used for applications in Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max. 12
could become blocked, clogged or Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
frozen by the particular medium used. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
Further applications include processes Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
where the medium changes regularly Non-linearity at max. setting to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
and any residues could cause mixing or Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
contamination of the media. Intended Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
areas of application are, for example, Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
the oil and gas industry, in mines, or in Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
locations with high levels of dust, Environmental conditions
e.g. in mills. Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb EN 50303
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db ≤1W
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100 °C Dc Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
Special features: EN 61000-6-2
 Pressure connection has a flush Other data
membrane Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
 Accuracy ≤ 0.5 % typ. 0 .. 100 % FS
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
KEMA 05ATEX1021 Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
provided.
 Robust design FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
 Very small temperature error B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line
1)
 Excellent EMC characteristics 2)
3)
 Excellent long-term properties 4)
500 V AC on request
279
Code used in
1 9 A C
Model code
T500T90°C Da
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model code)

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) HDA 4 4 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – A N X – 000
Z = Flush membrane
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
Pin HDA 44Z5-A A = 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
1 Signal + Pressure ranges in bar
12 2 Signal - 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
3 n.c. Mechanical connection
┴ Housing G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
Pin HDA 44Z6-A
1 Signal + II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
2 n.c. C = II 3G Ex ic llC T6 Gc
3 Signal - II 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
4 n.c. Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
280
Dimensions: Note:
~ 35 applications described.
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex-
SW27
Elastomer profile
3
13.8
seal ring DIN3869

G1/2 A
Ø 29 h14
Ø 29.5
12
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
3
2
seal ring DIN3869 seal ring DIN3869

11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5 18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
20.5
19.5
10
8
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 10.9 Ø 18.1
G1/4 A G1/2 A
Ø 18.9 Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5 Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
The impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. HYDAC electronic GmbH
A straight female connector is required for electrical Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
connection. e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
281
12
282
E 18.375.1.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane
ATEX Non-sparking
in ATEX version has been specially Measuring ranges -1 .. 1; -1 .. 9; 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar
developed for use in potentially explosive Overload range 3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
atmospheres and is based on the Burst pressure 5; 48; 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/2A DIN 3852
As with the industrial version, the G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
HDA 4300 in ATEX version has the field- Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
proven ceramic measurement cell with Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
thick-film strain gauge. 20 Nm for G1/4
max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
which a standard pressure connection Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ. 12
could become blocked, clogged or
Further applications include processes Non-linearity at max. setting to
≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
where the medium changes regularly DIN 16086
areas of application are, for example, Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
the oil and gas industry, in mines, or in Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
locations with high levels of dust, Environmental conditions
- mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 50303
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
II 3G Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
II 3G Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
II 1D Ex ia lIIC T85°C Da Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
II 1D Ex ta lllC T80/90/100°C Da Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
T500T90/T100/T110°C Da Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db ≤1W
II 3D Ex tc lllC T80/T90/T100°C Dc Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
II 3D Ex ic lllC T80/T90/T100°C Dc Insulation voltage 3) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
Other data
Special features: Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
 Pressure connection has a flush Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
membrane Weight ~ 180 g
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
provided.
 Certificates: FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
KEMA 05ATEX1016 X B.F.S.L. = Best Fit Straight Line

KEMA 05ATEX1021 1)
2)
500 V AC on request
283
Code
1 9 A C
Model code
T500T90°C Da
safe ia
with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
(see model
code)

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
HDA 4 3 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – A N X – XXX
Z = Flush membrane
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Pin HDA 43Z5-A Signal
1 Signal +
2 Signal - 0001(-1..1); 0009(-1..9); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0;
12 3 n.c. 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
┴ Housing Mechanical connection
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
M12x1, 4 pole G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
Approval
A = ATEX
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
1 = I M1 Ex ia I Ma
Pin HDA 43Z6-A
9 = II 3G Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
1 Signal +
2 n.c.
II 2D Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
3 Signal -
4 n.c. ll 3D Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
Modification number
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
284
Dimensions: Note:
~ 35 applications described.
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) male electr. conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
61.4
Ø 27
hex-SW27
3
13.8
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
12
hex-SW27 hex-SW27
3
seal ring DIN3869

seal ring DIN3869 11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5
18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
19.5
20.5
8
10
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 10.9
Ø 18.1
G1/4 A
G1/2 A
Ø 18.9
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-SW27
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
285
12
286
E 18.376.3.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has been Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
especially developed for use in potentially Overload ranges 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 900 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based on Burst pressure1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
the HDA 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/2 A DIN 3852
As with the industrial version of the G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
HDA 4700, devices with IECEx Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
Intrinsically Safe approval have a Torque value 45 Nm
field-proven, all-welded stainless steel Parts in contact with medium 2) Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
measurement cell with thin-film strain Seal: FPM
gauge without internal seal. O-ring: FPM
The pressure connection is achieved Output data
with an all-welded stainless steel Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
front membrane filled internally with RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
a pressure transfer fluid. The process Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically to max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
the measurement cell via the pressure Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
transfer fluid. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
This device is used for applications in zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
could become blocked, clogged or over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
frozen by the particular medium used. Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
Further applications include processes to DIN 16086
where the medium changes regularly Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
and any residues could cause mixing Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
or contamination of the media, or in
highly viscous media. Intended areas of
application are, for example, the oil and
gas industry, in mines or in locations with
high levels of dust, e.g. in mills.
Operating temperature range 3) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex ia l Ma Fluid temperature range 3) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Ex ia llC T6 Ga EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
Ex ia llC T6 Gb DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650))
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100°C Da Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
T500 90/100/110°C Da Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc ≤1W
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100°C Dc Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
Ex ia lllC T85°C Da Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
membrane Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
0 .. 100 % FS
 Accuracy ≤ 0.25 % FS typ. Weight ~ 180 g
 Certificate: Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override and short circuit protection are
IECEx KEM 08.0014X provided.
E 18.374.3.0/11.13

2)
 Excellent long-term properties 4)
500 V AC on request
287
Code used in
D 9 A C
Model code
Protection types Ex ia IIC T6 Ga Ex ta lllC T80 °C
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90 °C Da
applications Ex ia lIIC T85 °C Da Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
Certificate IECEx KEM 08.0014X
Equipment Equipment protection level Equipment Equipment Equipment protection Equipment protection
protection level Ma Ga, Ga/Gb, Da protection level Gb protection level Gc level Da, Db level Gc, Dc
intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia intrinsically safe ia Non-sparking nA Dustproof enclosure Intrinsically safe ic
with barrier with barrier with barrier with barrier
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) HDA 4 7 Z X – X – XXXX – XXX – I N X – 000
Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male 3 pole+ PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
2 Signal - 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
Housing G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
┴
12
Approval
M12x1, 4 pole I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
9 = Ex nA llC T6 Gc (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“) *
A = Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. conn. “6“) *
Pin HDA 47Z6-A Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
1 Signal +
C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
2 n.c. Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
3 Signal - Modification number
4 n.c. 000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
288
Dimensions: Note:
Protection types and applications (code): D, C the operating conditions and
̴ 35 applications described.
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex-
SW27
3
13.8
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
12
hex-SW27
3
seal ring DIN3869

18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
20.5
10
O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 18.1
G1/2 A
Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
289
12
290
E 18.374.3.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4400
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has been Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
especially developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based on Burst pressure 1) 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
As with the industrial version of the G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
HDA 4400, devices with IECEx G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
Intrinsically Safe approval have a Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
field-proven, all-welded stainless steel Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
measurement cell with thin film strain 20 Nm for G1/4
gauge without internal seal. Parts in contact with medium 2) Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
Seal: FPM
The pressure connection is achieved O-ring: FPM
with an all-welded stainless steel Output data
front membrane filled internally with Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
a pressure transfer fluid. The process RLmax = (UB – 12 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
pressure is transmitted hydrostatically to Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
the measurement cell via the pressure max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max. 12
This device is used for applications in Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C type
which a standard pressure connection Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
could become blocked, clogged or Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
Further applications include processes Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
where the medium changes regularly to DIN 16086
and any residues could cause mixing Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
or contamination of the media, or in Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
highly viscous media. Intended areas of Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
application are, for example, the oil and Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
gas industry, in mines or in locations with Environmental conditions
high levls of dust, e.g. in mills. Compensated temperature range -20 .. +85 °C
Protection types and applications: Operating temperature range -20 .. +60 °C
Ex ia l Ma
Fluid temperature range 3) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Ex ia llC T6 Ga - mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803(DIN 43650))
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc IP 67 (for M12x1 male, when an
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
T500 90/100/110 °C Da Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc ≤1W
Ex ia lllC T85 °C Da Inductance of the sensor Li = 0 mH
EN 61000-6-2
membrane Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. 0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 180 g
 Certificate:
IECEx KEM 08.0014X provided.
E 18.392.4.0/11.13

3)
 Excellent durability 4)
500 V AC on request
291
Code No.
for use in D 9 A C
Model code
Protection Ex ia IIC T6 Ga Ex ta lllC T80°C
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
types and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90°C Da
applications Ex ia lIIC T85°C Da Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
Equipment Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection
protection level Ma level Ga, Ga/Gb, Da level Gb level Gc level Da, Db level Gc, Dc
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
connection
Devices in ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da T500T90/T100/T110 °C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc are available with flying leads on request.
Devices in the ignition protection class "Non-sparking" for the protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are available with flying leads on request.

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) HDA 4 4 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – I N X – 000
Z = Flush membrane
5 = Male 3 pole+ PE,
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
2 Signal - 0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
12 ┴
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Pin HDA 44Z6-A A = Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection "6")*
1 Signal + Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
2 n.c. C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
3 Signal - Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
292
Dimensions: Note:
Protection types and applications (code): D, C the operating conditions and applications
̴ 35 described.
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5
male electr. conn.

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) male electr. conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex. SW27
3
13.8
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
Ø 29 h14
Ø 29.5
12
hex. SW27 hex. SW27
2

11.6 x 16.5 x1.5 18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
19.5
20.5
8
10
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 10.9 Ø 18.1
G1/4 A G1/2 A
Ø 18.9 Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5 Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex. SW27
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
connection; e.g. female connector M12x1, 4 pole, Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
293
12
294
E 18.392.4.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4300
with Flush Membrane
IECEx Non-sparking
IECEx Intrinsically Safe version has been Measuring ranges -1 .. 1;-1 .. 9;1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25 bar
especially developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 3; 32; 3; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80 bar
explosive atmospheres and is based on Burst pressure 5; 48; 5; 12;18; 30; 48; 75; 120 bar
As with the industrial version HDA 4300, G1/2 with additional front O-ring seal
the devices with IECEx Intrinsically Safe G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
approval have the field-proven ceramic Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
measuring cell with thick-film strain Torque value 45 Nm for G1/2, G1/2 A
20 Nm for G1/4
gauge.
max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
which a standard pressure connection Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ. 12
could become blocked, clogged or zero point ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
frozen by the particular medium used. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
Further applications include processes over range ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max.
where the medium changes regularly Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
areas of application are, for example,
the oil and gas industry, in mines, or in
locations with high levels of dust,
Ex ia l Ma Fluid temperature range 2) -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Ex ia llC T6 Ga EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26 / 36
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb Vibration resistance acc. to ≤ 20 g
Ex ia llC T6 Gb DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Ex nA llC T6,T5,T4 Gc Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (for male EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650))
Ex ic llC T6,T5,T4 Gc IP 67 female connector is used)
Relevant data for Ex applications Ex ia, ic Ex nA, ta, tb, tc
Ex ta lllC T80/90/100 °C Da Supply voltage Ui = 12 .. 28 V 12 .. 28 V
T500 90/100/110 °C Da Max. input current Ii = 100 mA
Ex tb lllC T80/90/100 °C Db Max. input power Pi = 1 W max. power consuption
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc ≤1W
Ex ic lllC T80/90/100 °C Dc Connection capacitance of the sensor Ci = ≤ 22 nF
Ex ia lllC T85 °C Da Insulation voltage 3) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage protection
EN 61000-6-2
 Pressure connection has a flush Life expectancy > 10 million cycles
membrane 0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 180 g
 Accuracy: ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
 Certificate: provided.
IECEx KEM 08.0014X FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
E 18.376.2.0/11.13

3)
500 V AC on request
 Excellent long-term properties
295
Code for use in
D 9 A C
Model code
Protection Ex ia IIC T6 Ga Ex ta lllC T80°C
Ex ic llC T6 Gc
types and Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ex nA llC T6 Gc T500T90°C Da
applications Ex ia lIIC T85°C Da Ex tb lllC T80°C Db
Equipment protec- Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection Equipment protection
tion level Ma level Ga, Ga/Gb, Da level Gb level Gc level Da, Db level Gc, Dc
Electrical 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 4, 5, 6 6 6 4,5,6
Connection
Devices in the ignition protection class "Dustproof enclosure" for the protection types Ex ta lllC T80/90/100° C Da T500T90/T100/T110°C Da, Ex tb lllC T80/90/100°C Db and
Ex tc lllC T80/90/100°C Dc are available with flying leads on request. Devices in the ignition protection class "non-sparking" for protection type Ex nA llC T6, T5, T4 Gc are
available with flying leads on request.

EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) HDA 4 3 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – I N X – 000
Z = Flush membrane
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)
Signal
2 Signal - 0001 (-1..1); 01.0; 02.5; 04.0; 06.0; 0010; 0016; 0025; 0040
┴
12 G04 = G1/4 with additional front O-ring seal
I = IECEx
Insulation voltage
N = 50 V AC
D = Ex ia l Ma
Ex ia llC T6 Ga
Ex ia llC T6 Ga/Gb
Ex ia llC T6 Gb
Pin HDA 43Z6-A A = Ex ta lllC T80 °C T500T90 °C Da (only in conjunction with electr. connection “6“)*
1 Signal + Ex tb lllC T80 °C Db
2 n.c. C = Ex ic llC T6 Gc
3 Signal - Ex ic lllC T80 °C Dc
000 = Standard
Notes:
Accessories:
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
296
Dimensions: Note:
Protection types and applications (code): D, C the operating conditions and
̴ 35 applications described.
̴ 35.5
Profile seal ring
M3
27.5

3p +PE EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650) conn. 4p
□ 18 M12x1
12.3
12
Ø 35
59.4
Ø 27
hex-
SW27
3
13.8
Elastomer profile
seal ring DIN3869
G1/2 A
Ø 29 h14
Ø 29.5
hex- 12
hex-SW27 SW27
2

11.6 x 16.5 x 1.5 18.5 x 23.9 x 1.5
19.5
20.5
8
10
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78

O-ring 15 x 2
Ø 10.9 Ø 18.1
G1/4 A G1/2 A
Ø 18.9 Ø 26 h14
Ø 29.5 Ø 29.5
Impact
protected metal
safety sleeve
SW25
hex-
SW27
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
The Impact protected metal safety sleeve is included. HYDAC electronic GmbH
Part No. 6098243 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
297
12
298
E 18.376.2.0/11.13
Electronic
HDA 4700
with Flush Membrane
ATEX, IECEx, CSA

The electronic pressure transmitter Input data
HDA 4700 with flush membrane is certified Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
in the ignition protection class Flameproof Overload ranges 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Enclosure to ATEX, IECIx and CSA. Burst pressure 300; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
The devices have triple approval, ensuring
Mechanical connection1) G1/2 A DIN 3852
that they are universally suitable for use in G1/2 with add. front O-ring seal
potentially explosive environments around Pressure transfer fluid Silicon-free oil
the world. Therefore it is no longer necessary
Torque value 45 Nm
to stock multiple devices with separate
Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4435; 1.4301
individual approvals. Seal: FPM
The pressure connection is achieved with an O-ring: FPM
all-welded stainless steel front membrane Conduit, housing material 1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
filled internally with a pressure transfer Output data
fluid. The process pressure is transmitted Output signal, permitted load resistance2) 4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor
hydrostatically to the measurement cell via RLmax = (UB – 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
the pressure transfer fluid. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
This device is used for applications in which max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
a standard pressure connection could Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ. 12
become blocked, clogged or frozen by the (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
particular medium used. Further applications Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
include processes where the medium Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
changes regularly and any residues could Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
cause mixing or contamination of the media, Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
or in highly viscous media. Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
Its main applications are in mining and the to DIN 16086
oil and gas industry, e.g. in underground Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
vehicles, hydraulic power units (HPU), Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill drives or in Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
lubrication systems. Long term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
Protection types and applications: Environmental conditions
CCSAUS Explosion Proof – Seal Not Required
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5 T6, T110 °C: -25 .. +60 °C
Class II Group E, F, G Operating temperature range 3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
Class III T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Type 4 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
ATEX Flame Proof Fluid temperature range 3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
I M2 Ex d I Mb T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
IECEx Flame Proof DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 ..500 Hz
Ex d I Mb Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Vented Gauge)
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb to ISO 20653 IP 69K (Sealed Gauge)
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Other data
Special features: Residual ripple of supply voltage
Life expectancy
≤5%
> 10 million load cycles, 0 .. 100 % FS
 Accuracy ≤ 0.25 % FS typ.
Weight ~ 300 g
 Certificates:
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX0100 X Note.: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override
CSA MC 224264 and short circuit protection are provided.
IECEx KEM 10.0053X FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
-20 °C with FPM seal , -40 °C on request
299
Approvals CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required
Conduit (single cores) ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Class III
Type 4
Core HDA 47Z9-A ATEX:

I M2 Ex d I Mb
red Signal +
black Signal - II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db
green- Housing
yellow IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Conduit (flying leads) Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db
Model code:
HDA 4 7 Z X – A – XXXX – XXX – D X – 000 (2m)
Z = Flush membrane
9 = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit
(male thread), single cores
Core HDA 47ZG-A G = 1/2-14 NPT Conduit
white Signal - (male thread),
flying leads
brown Signal +
green n.c. Signal
yellow n.c.
0040; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600
12 Mechanical connection
G01 = G1/2 A, DIN 3852
Approval
D = CSA Explosion Proof – Seal not required
ATEX Flame Proof
IECEx Flame Proof
Modification number
000 = Standard
Cable length in m
Standard = 2 m
Accessories:
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
300
Dimensions: Note:
Venting*
hex-
SW27
hex-
SW27
hex-
SW27
seal ring DIN3869
18.5 x 23.9 x1.5
O-ring 15x2 12
* optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
E 18.374.2.0/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
301
12
302
E 18.374.2.0/11.13
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2100
ATEX Encapsulation

The HYDAC HFS 2100 flow switch Input data
in ATEX version has been specially Switching ranges [l/min] Size 1 Size 2
developed for use in potentially 0.5 .. 1.6 0.5 .. 1.5
explosive atmospheres. Like the
0.8 .. 3.0 1 .. 4
standard version it is based on the
variable area float principle, and can be 2.0 .. 7.0 2 .. 8
mounted in any position. 3 .. 10
5 .. 15
8 .. 24
The test medium moves a spring-loaded
float in the direction of flow, depending 10 .. 30
on the flow rate. A fully encapsulated 15 .. 45
reed contact is fitted to the outside of 20 .. 60
the instrument and is therefore separate 30 .. 90
from the flow circuit. When the magnet 35 .. 110
inside the float reaches the preset
Operating pressure
position, the reed contact switches.
Brass version 300 bar 250 bar
Stainless steel version 350 bar 300 bar
Intended areas of application are, for 12
Pressure drop 0.02 .. 0.2 bar 0.02 .. 0.4 bar
example, the oil and gas industry, on gas
turbines or in locations with high levels
of dust contamination, e.g. in mills. Parts in contact with medium
Brass version St. steel 1.4571; FPM 1); brass nickel-pl.; brass; hard
ferrite
Protection types and applications:
Stainless steel version Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); hard ferrite
Output data
II 2G Ex mb II T6 / T5
Switching outputs 1 or 2 Reed contacts
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP67 T80 °C / T100 °C
Change-over or normally open type 2)
Accuracy 3) ≤ ± 10 % FS
Medium: Repeatability 2 % FS max.
 Oils / viscous fluids Switching capacity
Change-over contact max. 250 V / 1 A / 30 W
Special features: Back-up fuse 1 A (outside the hazardous area)
N/O contact max. 250 V / 2 A / 60 W
 Accuracy ≤ ± 10 % FS Back-up fuse 2 A (outside the hazardous area)
 Viscosity compensation from Environmental conditions
30 .. 600 cSt Operating temperature range T6 / T80 °C: -20 .. +75 °C
 Any mounting position T5 / T100 °C: -20 .. +90 °C
 High level of functional reliability Fluid temperature range T6 / T80 °C: -20 .. +75 °C
T5 / T100 °C: -20 .. +90 °C
 High level of switching accuracy
Max. surface temperature T6 / T80 °C: +75 °C
 Stepless switch point setting T5 / T100 °C: +90 °C
by user
 High pressure resistance Directive 2006 / 95 / EC
- mark
 Threaded connection Directive 2004 / 108 / EC
Directive 94 / 9 / EC
 Certificate:
EN 60079-0:2006 / EN 60079-18:2004
PTB 03 ATEX 2159 X EN 61241-0:2006 / EN 61241-1:2004
PTB 03 ATEX N056-3 Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
E 18.393.1/11.13

Electrical connection Flying leads (2 m cable length)
Note.: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
1)
2)
3)
3% possible with calibration to a certain viscosity 303
Pin assignment:
Flying leads Model code:
HFS 2 1 X 1 – XX – XXXX–XXXX – 7 – X – X – A00
Core HFS 21X1-XS HFS 21X1-XW
1 Centre
N/O contact Measuring principle
2 N/C contact
3 N/O contact Test medium
Mechanical connection 4) 6)
Notes on installation: 1 = 1/4 "
2 = 3/8 "
 The medium must not contain solid 3 = 1/2 "
particles! We recommend using 4 = 3/4 "
contamination strainers. 5 = 1 "
 External magnetic fields can affect

the switching contact. Ensure sufficient 1 = Flying leads
distance from magnetic fields (2m in length)
(e.g. from electric motors)!
1S = 1 N/O contact
Safety instructions: 2S = 2 N/O contacts
 The circuits must not incorporate any 1W = 1 Change-over contact
effective inductance or capacitance. 2W = 2 Change-over contacts
 The maximum ratings stipulated in Switching ranges in l/min 6)
the technical data must never be Oil 10 % -Size 1-
exceeded, not even for a short time. 00.5-01.6; 00.8-03.0; 02.0-07.0
 To protect the switching contact, a Oil 10 % - Size 2-
fuse for the circuit must be provided 00.5-01.5; 0001-0004; 0002-0008; 0003-0010;
outside the hazardous area, unless 0005-0015; 0008-0024; 0010-0030; 0015-0045;
the switching unit is connected to an 0020-0060; 0030-0090; 0035-0110
intrinsically safe circuit.
Accuracy
 Unless the device is connected to an 7 = ≤ 10.0 % FS
intrinsic safe circuit, special safety
precautions have to be implemented. Housing material
 The device may be used in hazardous B = Brass (nickel-plated)
areas designated as category 2. S = Stainless steel
12
 The device must not be used in areas Mechanical indicator
where there is a possibility that an 0 = Without indicator
electrostatic charge can be caused in 1 = With indicator
the plastic housing.
Modification number
 The device must not be used in A00 = ATEX version for potentially explosive areas
machinery, systems or medical
apparatus where, in the event of
a malfunction, persons, animals
4)
Mechanical connection options depend on housing type
or equipment could be harmed or (see Dimensions).
5)
When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second contact is mounted
damaged. on the side of the instrument, at 90° to the first contact.
6)
Other models available on request.
Note:
Accessories:
E 18.393.1/11.13
304
OIL -Size 1- without indicator G

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
15
DN SW G L
0.5 .. 1.6 8 24 1/4“ 98 450
10 24 3/8“ 119 500
15 27 1/2“ *) 90 400
L
0.8 .. 3.0
15 27 1/2“ 90 400
2.0 .. 7.0
*) Standard
15
G 31.2
ca.: 39.2
SW
ca.: 50.2
12
OIL -Size 2- without indicator G

T
(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L T
0.5 .. 1.5 8 34 1/4" 152 10 1500
1 .. 4 15 34 1/2" 152 14 1425
20 34 3/4" 152 15 1340
25 40 1" *) 130 17 1160
L
2 .. 8
3 .. 10 15 34 1/2" 152 14 1425
20 34 3/4" 152 15 1340
5 .. 15 25 40 1" *) 130 17 1160
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
20 34 3/4" 152 15 1340
15 .. 45
T
25 40 1" *) 130 17 1160

20 .. 60 G
40
30 .. 90
25 40 1" 130 17 1160
35 .. 110
*) Standard
40
ca.: 63.1
E 18.393.1/11.13
305
OIL -Size 1- with indicator G 1/2"
15
(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
90
DN SW G L
0.5 .. 1.6
0.8 .. 3.0 15 30 1/2" 90 570
15
33.5 G 1/2"
2.0 .. 7.0 65.5
69
ca.: 53.1
30
30
47
OIL -Size 2- with indicator G

T
(approx.)
12 [l/min] [mm] [g]
DN SW G L T
0.5 .. 1.5 8 34 1/4" 152 10 1590
L
1 .. 4 15 34 1/2" 152 14 1515

20 34 3/4" 152 15 1430
25 40 1" *) 130 17 1250
2 .. 8
T
3 .. 10 15 34 1/2" 152 14 1515 70.5 G
20 34 3/4" 152 15 1430
5 .. 15 25 40 1" *) 130 17 1250
8 .. 24
10 .. 30
20 34 3/4" 152 15 1430 ca.: 63.1
15 .. 45
25 40 1" *) 130 17 1250 40
20 .. 60
30 .. 90
25 40 1" 130 17 1250
40
35 .. 110
57
*) Standard
Note: HYDAC Electronic GmbH

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and Hauptstraße 27
D-66128 Saarbrücken
E 18.393.1/11.13
For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the relevant Tel.: 0 68 97 / 509-01
technical department. Fax: 0 68 97 / 509-1726
306
Electro-Mechanical
Flow Switch
HFS 2500
ATEX Encapsulation
for Water or Water-based Media

The HYDAC HFS 2500 flow switch Input data
in ATEX version has been specially
developed for use in potentially Switching ranges [l/min] 5 % accuracy 10 % accuracy
explosive atmospheres. Like the Size 2 Size 3
standard version it is based on the 0.2 .. 4.0 8 .. 90 0.02 .. 0.2 10 .. 30
variable area float principle, and can be
0.6 .. 5.0 5 .. 110 0.2 .. 0.6 15 .. 45
mounted in any position.
The test medium deflects a spring- 0.5 .. 8.0 10 .. 150 0.4 .. 1.8 20 .. 60
loaded float in the direction of flow, 1 .. 14 35 .. 220 0.8 .. 3.2 30 .. 90
depending on the flow rate. A fully 1 .. 28 35 .. 250 2 .. 7 60 .. 150
encapsulated reed contact is fitted
to the outside of the device and is 2 .. 40 3 .. 13
therefore separate from the flow circuit. 4 .. 55 4 .. 20
When the magnet inside the float 1 .. 70 8 .. 30
reaches the preset position, the reed
Operating pressure
contact switches.
Intended areas of application are, for Brass version 200 bar 300 bar 250 bar
12
example, the oil and gas industry, on Stainless steel version 300 bar 350 bar 300 bar
gas turbines or in locations with high Pressure drop [bar] 0.02 .. 0.8 0.02 .. 0.3 0.02 .. 0.4
levels of dust, e.g. in mills.
Protection types and applications: Parts in contact with medium

Brass version Stainless steel 1.4571; NBR 1); Brass; nickel-plated; Brass; Hard ferrite
II 2G Ex mb II T6 / T5 Stainless steel version Stainless steel 1.4571; FPM 1); Hard ferrite
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP67 T80 °C / T100 °C Output data
Switching outputs 1 or 2 reed contacts
Medium: Change-over or normally open type 2)
 Water / water-based media Accuracy ≤ ± 5 % or ≤ ± 10 % FS
Special features: Repeatability 2 % FS max.

 Accuracy ≤ ± 5 % or ≤ ± 10 % FS Switching capacity
 Any mounting position Change-over contact max. 250 V / 1 A / 30 W
 High level of functional reliability Back-up fuse 1 A (outside the hazardous area)
 High level of switching accuracy N/O contact max. 250 V / 2 A / 60 W

Back-up fuse 2 A (outside the hazardous area)
 Stepless switch point setting by user
 High pressure resistance
Operating temperature range T6 / T80 °C: -20 .. +75 °C
 Threaded connection T5 / T100 °C: -20 .. +90 °C
 Certificate: Fluid temperature range T6 / T80 °C: -20 .. +75 °C
T5 / T100 °C: -20 .. +90 °C
PTB 03 ATEX 2159 X Max. surface temperature T6 / T80 °C: +75 °C
PTB 03 ATEX N056-3 T5 / T100 °C: +90 °C
EN 60079-0:2006 / EN 60079-18:2004
EN 61241-0:2006 / EN 61241-1:2004
Other data
E 18.394.1/11.13

Electrical connection Flying leads (2 m cable length)
Note.: FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range

1)
2)
307
HFS 2 5 X 1 – XX – XXXX–XXXX – X – X – X – A00 Flying leads
Measuring Pin HFS 25X1-XS HFS 25X1-XW
principle
2 = Variable area float 1 Centre
N/O contact
Test medium 2 N/C contact
5 = Water or 3 N/O contact
water-based
Mechanical
connection 3)5)
1 = 1/4 " Notes on installation:
2 = 3/8 "  The medium must not contain solid
3 = 1/2 " particles! We recommend using
4 = 3/4 " contamination strainers.
5 = 1 "
6 = 1 1/4 "
switching contact.
7 = 1 1/2 "
Ensure sufficient distance from
Electrical connection magnetic fields (e.g. from electric
1 = Flying leads (2m in length) motors)!
1S = 1 N/O contact Safety instructions:
2S = 2 N/O contacts  The circuits must not incorporate any
1W = 1 Change-over contact effective inductance or capacities.
 The maximum ratings stipulated in the
Switching ranges in l/min 5) technical data must never be exceeded,
Water 5 % even for a short time.
00.2-04.0; 00.6-05.0; 00.5-08.0;
01.0-0014; 01.0-0028; 02.0-0040; 04.0-0055;  To protect the switching contact, a
01.0-0070; 08.0-0090; 0005-0110; 0010-0150; fuse for the circuit must be provided
0035-0220; 0035-0250; outside the hazardous area, unless
the switching unit is connected to an
==================================== intrinsically safe circuit.
Water 10 % -Size 2-
 Unless the device is connected to an
0.02-00.2; 00.2-00.6; 00.4-01.8; 00.8-03.2; intrinsic safe circuit, special safety
02.0-07.0; 03.0-0013; 04.0-0020; 08.0-0030 precautions have to be implemented.
Water 10 % - Size 3 -  The device may be used in hazardous
0010-0030; 0015-0045; 0020-0060; areas designated as category 2.
12 0030-0090; 0060-0150  The device must not be used in areas
Accuracy where an electrical charge in the plastic
6 = ≤ 5.0 % FS housing is likely.
7 = ≤ 10.0 % FS  The device must not be used in
Housing material machinery, systems or medical
B = Brass, nickel-plated apparatus where, in the event of
S = Stainless steel a malfunction, persons, animals
Mechanical indicator or equipment could be harmed or
0 = Without indicator damaged.
1 = With indicator
Modification number
A00 = ATEX version for potentially explosive areas

(see Dimensions)
4) When the model with 2 switching contacts is selected, the second switching contact is mounted on the
side of the instrument, at 90° to the first contact.
Note:
Accessories:
E 18.394.1/11.13
308

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
SW D B G DN T L
Water 5 % accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0
1/4" 8
0.5 .. 8.0 27 30 53 3/8" 10 14 131 850
1/2" 15
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40 27 30 1/2" 15 14 146
53 900
4 .. 55 32 35 3/4" 20 16 174
1 .. 70
34 40 63 3/4" 20 18 152 1400
8 .. 90
40 40 63 1" 25 19 156 1100
5 .. 110
10 .. 150 50 50 73 1 1/4" 32 21 200 2750
35 .. 220 50 50 73 1 1/4" 32 21 200 3000
35 .. 250 60 60 78 1 1/2" 40 24 200 3800

0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
12
0.8 .. 3.2
27 31 67 1/2 ’’ 15 15 90 400
2.0 .. 7.0
3.0 .. 13.0
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0

10 .. 30
15 .. 45 3/4 „ 20 21 152 1200
34 47 93
20 .. 60 1" *) 25 17 130 1050
30 .. 90
60 .. 150 41 47 93 1" 25 17 130 1050
*)
Standard
E 18.394.1/11.13
309

(approx.)
[l/min] [mm] [g]
SW D B G DN T L
Water 5 % accuracy
0.2 .. 4.0
0.6 .. 5.0 1/4" 8
3/8" 10
0.5 .. 8.0 27 30 53 14 131 940
1/2" 15
1 .. 14
1 .. 28
2 .. 40 27 30 1/2" 15 14 146
53 990
4 .. 55 32 35 3/4" 20 16 174
1 .. 70
34 40 63 3/4" 20 18 152 1490
8 .. 90
40 40 63 1" 25 19 156 1190
5 .. 110
10 .. 150 50 50 73 1 1/4" 32 21 200 2840
35 .. 220 50 50 73 1 1/4" 32 21 200 3090
35 .. 250 60 60 78 1 1/2" 40 24 200 3890

0.02 .. 0.2
0.2 .. 0.6
0.4 .. 1.8
0.8 .. 3.2
30 30 70 1/2 ’’ 15 15 90 570
2.0 .. 7.0
3.0 .. 13.0
12
4.0 .. 20.0
8.0 .. 30.0

10 .. 30
15 .. 45 34 3/4 „ 20 15 152 1430
40 93
20 .. 60 40 1" *) 25 17 130 1250
30 .. 90
60 .. 150 40 40 93 1" 25 17 130 1250
*)
Standard
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and HYDAC electronic GmbH
E 18.394.1/11.13

For applications and operating conditions not described, please contact the Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
310
E 18.394.1/11.13
311
12
Display and Monitoring Units
13 The universal display unit HDA 5500 provides the means of visualising
and further processing the signals from our sensors.
The unit is designed for front panel mounting with a standard 92 x 45 mm
cut-out.
Universal display unit for general applications:

Page
HDA 5500 313
E 180.000.2 /11.13
312
13
Digital Display Unit

HDA 5500
Description:
The digital display units in the
HDA 5500 series are microprocessor-
controlled display and monitoring
instruments designed for control
panel installation.
Different versions are available with
a maximum of 3 analogue inputs, an
analogue output (4 .. 20 mA or
0 .. 10V) and up to 4 relay outputs.
The analogue input signals are
displayed according to the settings
selected by the user.
Each of the relay outputs can be
allocated to each of the sensor inputs
or to the differential between input
1 and 2.
A PT 100 temperature probe can be
connected directly to the instrument.
There is also an option for frequency
measurement using the HDS 1000
(HYDAC rpm probe), for example
to measure the speed of rotating
components.
Depending on the model, it is also
possible to connect SMART sensors
(condition monitoring sensors).
SMART sensors are a generation
of sensors from HYDAC which can
transmit several different measured
values.
Special features:
 Digital display of analogue signals  Up to 4 relay switching outputs
 Clear 4-digit 7-segment  RS 232 interface
LED display  Voltage supply
 Up to 3 analogue inputs 12 .. 32 V DC or
(4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 10 V or 0 .. 5 V) 85 .. 265 V AC 50 / 60 Hz
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 %  Option for PT100 sensor input or
 Differential measurement possible frequency input
 Analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V)
E 18.062.3/11.13
313
Input models: Technical data:
Display range
13 Display 4-digit 7-segment LED display, red,
Analogue transm.
3 LEDs for active sensor, 4 LEDs for switch points
or HDA 5500-0-... Display range - 999 .. 9999 (user-adjustable)
Analogue seq.
Display units with bar, kg/cm², MPa, psi, °C, °F, mA, V, Hz, kN,
background lighting m, mm, inch, l, l/min, gal, gal/min, 1/min, %, t
Input data
Analogue transm. Analogue signal input(s)
Analogue transm. HDA 5500-1-... Measuring range(s) select: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 0 .. 10 V or
(up to 3 analogue inputs) 4 .. 20 mA sequential (Modification 006)
Analogue transm.
Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % at 25 °C
PT 100 input
Measuring range - 25 .. 100 °C
Analogue transm.
Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % at 25 °C
HDA 5500-2-... Frequency/counter input
Frequency transm.
Signal threshold 0 .. 0.6 V = LOW, 3 .. 24 V = HIGH
Frequency range 15 Hz to 24 kHz
Output data
Analogue transm. Analoge output 4 .. 20 mA, load resistance ≤ 400 Ω or
HDA 5500-3-... 0 .. 10 V load resistance ≥ 2 kΩ
Pt100 temp. transm. Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % at 25 °C
Rise time 70 ms
Switching outputs
Type 2 or 4 relays each with separate common supply
Switching voltage 0.1 .. 250 V AC
Switching current 9 mA .. 2 A
Output models: Switching capacity 400 VA, 50 W
(for inductive load, use varistors)
Life expectancy of switch contacts ≥ 20 million cycles at minimum load
HDA 5500-X-0-... ≥ 1 million cycles at maximum load
Analogue (with switching delay = 0 ms)
Setting range of switch points 1.5 .. 100 % of the pre-set display range
Relay output 1
Setting range of the switching 0.5 .. 99 % of the pre-set display range
hystereses (switch-back points)
Relay output 2
HDA 5500-X-1-... Interface
Serial interface Baud rate 19200 Bauds; 8 data bits;
Analogue
RS 232 2 stop bits; no parity;
no handshake
Relay output 1
Nominal temperature range 0 .. +50 °C
Relay output 2
HDA 5500-X-2-... Operating temperature range 0 .. +50 °C
Relay output 3
Storage temperature range - 40 .. +80 °C
Relay output 4
Analogue
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Other data
Housing control panel housing 96 x 48 x 109 mm;
Connection terminals: control panel cut-out 92 (+0.8) x 45 (+0.6) mm;
Supply voltage: front panel thickness 1.25 .. 15 mm;
plug-in terminal block 2 pole, RM 5.08 maximum installation depth 121 mm
(cross section max. 2.5 mm²) Supply voltage 12 .. 32 V DC or
Inputs / outputs: 85 .. 265 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
plug-in terminal block 11 pole, RM 3.5 Power consumption 15 VA at 85 .. 230 V AC – fuse protection 1 AT
(cross section max. 1.5 mm²)
Supply of the meas. transmitter 12 V DC ± 1 %; max. 20 mA / analogue input
Relay:
Residual ripple of supply ≤ 5%
plug-in terminal block 5 pole, RM 5.08
(cross section max. 2.5 mm²) voltage
E 18.062.3/11.13
314
Model code: Notes:
The information in this brochure relates
HDA 5 5 0 0 – X – X – XX – 00X
to the operating conditions and 13
Inputs For applications and operating
0 = One analogue input conditions not described, please contact
1 = Three analogue inputs the relevant technical department.
2 = One analogue input + frequency Subject to technical modifications.
input / counter function
3 = One analogue input + PT 100 input
Outputs
0 = 1 analogue output
1 = 1 analogue output + 2 relay outputs
2 = 1 analogue output + 4 relay outputs
Supply voltage
AC = 85 .. 265 V AC
DC = 12 .. 32 V DC
Modification
000 = Standard
006 = Model with sequential analogue input for HLB 1300 and CS 1000
(only possible on input model "0" and output model "2")
Dimensions:
thickness of
control panel
panel cut-out
E 18.062.3/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
315
Service Instruments
13 Our service instruments have been specially developed for use in servicing,
maintenance and the laboratory, as well as for commissioning.
All commonly available sensors (e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate,
14 condition monitoring, ...) with a very wide range of output signals can be
connected to these instruments.
Service instruments for general applications:

Page
HMG 500 317
HMG 510 319
HMG 3010 321
HDA 4748-H (Accessories) 325
ETS 4148-H (Accessories) 327
EVS 3100-H (Accessories) 329
E 180.000.2 /11.13
316
13
Portable Data Recorder 14
HMG 500
Description:
The HMG 500 is a portable measuring
instrument for simple measuring tasks
in fluid technology such as hydraulics,
pneumatics, lubrication, process,
refrigeration and air conditioning.
Up to two sensors with the HYDAC
Sensor Interface (HSI) can be
connected to the HMG 500 to measure
pressure, temperature or flow rate
(except for SMART sensors). The HMG
500 automatically recognises these
sensors and takes all of the necessary
basic settings from each sensor.
The measurement values and the
corresponding physical unit are
displayed on an easy-to-read LCD
display.
In addition, the HMG 500 offers a wealth
of other advantages over mechanical
pressure gauges, for example, for
measuring pressure on machines and
systems.
The user benefits from a technologically
high level of measuring accuracy and
dynamics.
The HMG 500 measures values at a
very high sampling rate. It can therefore
record and display pressure peaks in
the maximum value memory or rapid
pressure discharges in the minimum
value memory, for example.
Furthermore, differential measurements
can be carried out using two sensors
of a similar type, to calculate pressure
drops or temperature differentials. Special features:
To further extend the application range,  Portable 2-channel data recorder  Zeroing (taring) of the individual
HMG 500 has a function for setting  Simple and user-friendly key operation measurement channels
mechanical pressure and temperature
 Large LCD display including  Display of the actual measured values
switches precisely and reliably.
battery status indication  Display of the differential (channel A
Compact, simple and versatile - the
 2 sensor inputs, minus channel B)
HMG 500 is an invaluable tool for all
those involved in maintenance, automatic sensor recognition  Minimum or maxmum value indication,
commissioning and service.  Measuring range and unit of with reset function
measurement of the sensors  Setting device for mechanical
connected to it are recognised pressure and temperature switches
automatically
E 18.063.2/11.13
317
Technical data: Ordering details:
Measurement 2 analogue inputs
13 inputs for HYDAC measurement transmitters
with HSI interface HMG 500 - 000
(except for SMART sensors**) Items supplied
14 HMG 500
Accuracy* ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
 Operating manual D/E/F
Functions  Automatic recognition of measuring
range and unit of measurement  9 V battery
 Taring of the measuring channels
 Display of the actual meas. value HMG 500-Set 01
 Min./max. indication Items supplied
 Reset of the min./max. values HMG 500
 Measured values differential  Operating manual D/E/F
channel A - channel B
 9 V battery
 Display of units, selectable
 Setting device for mechanical pressure  HDA 4748-H-0600-000
and temperature switches  ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2 m
Display 4-digit 7 segment LCD display  Connection adapter G1/4 female to Minimess 16X2
with battery status indication;  Case for HMG 500 / 510
2 measurement values incl. unit displayed
simultaneously
Measurement unit Selectable
(depending on the Pressure: bar, psi, MPa HMG 500-Set 02
sensors Temperature: °C, K, °F Items supplied
connected Flow rate: l/min, gallon/min  HMG 500
to HMG) (1 US gallon = 3.7853 l)  Operating manual D/E/F
Sampling rate 0.1 ms  9 V battery
Resolution 12 bit  2 off HDA 4748-H-0600-000
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4  2 off ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2 m
Safety EN 61010
 2 off connection adapter G1/4 female to Minimess 16X2
Protection class IP 54
 Case for HMG 500 / 510
Voltage  9 V battery
supply Oper. time: approx. 10 h (with 2 sensors)
 Euro plug power supply (230 V AC)
(available as an accessory)
Accessories:
Environmental Operating temp.: +5 .. +60 °C
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical and
conditions Storage temp.: -40 .. +70 °C
mechanical connection adapters, power supply, etc. can
Rel. humidity: 0 .. 70 % be found in the Accessories brochure.
Weight 410 g
Examples of main accessories:
Note:
* FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range  Pressure transmitter
** SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are HDA 4000 with HSI interface
a generation of sensors from HYDAC which can provide Pressure ranges: -1 .. 9 bar, 0 .. 16 bar, 0 .. 60 bar,
a variety of different measurement values. 0 .. 100 bar, 0 .. 250 bar, 0 .. 400 bar, 0 .. 600 bar
 Temperature transmitter
Dimensions: ETS 4000 with HSI interface
Measuring range: -25 .. 100 °C
 Flow rate transmitter
EVS 3000 with HSI interface
Measuring ranges: 1.2 .. 20 l/min, 6 .. 60 l/min,
15 .. 300 l/min, 40 .. 600 l/min
 Sensor simulator
SSH 1000, ideal for training purposes
 Electrical connection adapter
UVM 3000, for mechanical pressure and
temperature switches
 Hydraulic adapters
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating
E 18.063.2/11.13
conditions and applications described.

For applications and operating conditions not described, HYDAC electronic GmbH
please contact the relevant technical department. Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Subject to technical modifications. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
E-mail: electronic@hydac.com, Internet: www.hydac.com
318
13
HMG 510
Description:
The HMG 510 is a hand-held instrument
for simple measurement tasks on
hydraulic and pneumatic systems in
mobile and industrial applications.
Compact and simple to use, the
HMG 510 is an ideal tool for all those
involved in maintenance, commissioning
and service.
Up to two sensors with the HYDAC
Sensor Interface (HSI) can be
connected to the HMG 510.
Sensors are available to measure
pressure, temperature and flow rate as
well as sensors for condition monitoring
(also known as SMART sensors).
Some examples of SMART sensors are
the HYDACLAB® Oil Condition Sensor,
the AS 1000 AquaSensor and the
CS 1000 Contamination Sensor.
The HMG 510 automatically recognises
these sensors and takes all the
necessary basic settings from each
sensor.
The measurement values and the
corresponding physical unit are
displayed on an easy-to-read LCD
display.
In addition to this, the HMG 510 enables
measured values which have been
saved in the SMART sensors to be
uploaded to a PC.
With the aid of the HYDAC PC software
"CMWIN", the measurement data stored
in the SMART sensors can be displayed Special features:
on a PC screen in the form of a graph,  Portable 2-channel data recorder  Zeroing (taring) of the individual
then analysed, edited and saved. measurement channels
The HMG has a standard integrated  Simple and user-friendly key operation
USB port to enable this data transfer.  Large LCD display including  Display of the actual measured values
To further extend the application range, battery status indication  Display of the differential
the HMG 510 has a function for setting  2 sensor inputs, automatic sensor (channel A minus channel B)
mechanical pressure and temperature recognition  Min. or max. value indication,
switches precisely and reliably.  Specially designed to display with reset function
measured values from condition  Setting device for mechanical
monitoring sensors (SMART sensors) pressure and temperature switches
 Measuring range and unit of  USB port
E 18.066.2/11.13
measurement of the sensors

connected to it are recognised
automatically
319
Technical data: Ordering details:
Measurement 2 analogue inputs
13 inputs for HYDAC measurement transmitters
with HSI interface and SMART sensors HMG 510 - 000
Accuracy* ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
14
Functions  Automatic recognition of measuring
range and unit of measurement Items supplied
 Taring of the measuring channels  Case for HMG 500 / 510
 Display of the actual measured value  HMG 510
 Min./max. indication  Operating manual D/E/F
 Reset of the min./max. values
 9 V battery
 Measured values differential
channel A - channel B  USB cable
 Display of units, selectable  Y adapter blue (for HLB 1300)
 Setting device for mechanical pressure  Y adapter yellow (for CS 1000)
and temperature switches  ZBE 30-02, sensor cable M12x1, 2m
 Communication bridge to a connected PC
 Software CD with "CMWIN"
Display 4-digit 7 segment LCD display
with battery status indication;
2 measured values incl. unit displayed
simultaneously Accessories:
Measurement unit  Selectable for Appropriate accessories, such as electrical and
(depending on the Pressure: bar, psi, MPa mechanical connection adapters, power supply, etc. can
sensors Temperature: °C, K, °F be found in the Accessories brochure.
connected) Flow rate: l/min, gallon/min Examples of main accessories:
(1 US gallon = 3.7853 l)  Pressure transmitter
 Permanently pre-set on SMART sensors HDA 4000 with HSI interface
Sampling rate 0.1 ms Pressure ranges: -1 .. 9 bar, 0 .. 16 bar, 0 .. 60 bar,
Resolution 12 bit 0 .. 100 bar, 0 .. 250 bar, 0 .. 400 bar, 0 .. 600 bar
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4  Temperature transmitter
ETS 4000 with HSI interface
Safety EN 61010
Measuring range: -25 .. 100 °C
Protection class IP 54
 Flow rate transmitter
Voltage  9 V battery EVS 3000 with HSI interface
supply Operating time: approx. 10 h Measuring ranges: 1.2 .. 20 l/min, 6 .. 60 l/min,
(with 2 sensors)** 15 .. 300 l/min, 40 .. 600 l/min
 Euro plug power supply (230 V AC)
(available as an accessory)  Sensor simulator
SSH 1000, ideal for training purposes
Environmental Operating temperature: +5 .. +60 °C
conditions  Storage temperature: -40 .. +70 °C  Electrical connection adapter
 Rel. humidity: 0 .. 70 % UVM 3000, for mechanical pressure or temperature
switches
Weight 410 g
 Hydraulic adapters
* FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
** Not applicable to SMART sensors, as they require
an external voltage.
Dimensions:
Note:
The information in this brochure relates to the operating
conditions and applications described.
For applications and operating conditions not described,
please contact the relevant technical department.
E 18.066.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
320
13
HMG 3010
Description:
The HMG 3010 is an impressive, top
performance portable measuring and
data recording device.
Automated setting procedures, a simple,
self-explanatory operator guide and
many comprehensive functions ensure
the operator is able to carry out a wide
range of measuring tasks within a very
short time and to work in a way which is
both time-saving and cost-effective.
The HMG 3010 thus quickly becomes a
reliable and helpful tool in the working
environment of service, maintenance,
development, test rig technology, quality
assurance or commissioning of systems
and machines.
The HMG 3010 is designed primarily
to record pressure, temperature and
flow rate values which are the standard
variables in hydraulics and pneumatics.
For this purpose, special sensors are
available, with which the variable,
the measurement range and unit
are automatically detected by the
HMG 3010. The device also offers
measurement inputs for standard
sensors with current and voltage
signals. In addition to the analogue
inputs, the HMG 3010 also has two
digital inputs (e.g. for frequency or rpm
measurements).
The ability to connect the HMG 3010
to a CAN bus and thus to display
messages from the CAN bus completes Special features:
the range of applications.  Simple, user-friendly operation  Very large data memory for
Due to the wide range of functions and  Practical, robust design archiving measurement curves
its simple handling, the HMG 3010 is  Large, full-graphics colour display  Various measurement modes:
just as appropriate for users who take – Normal measuring
measurements only occasionally as it is  Quick and independent basic setting
– Fast curve recording
for professionals for whom measuring of the device through the use of
– Long term measuring
and documentation are routine. automatic sensor recognition
 4 independent triggers,
The update capability of the  Up to 10 sensors can be connected
can be logically linked
HMG 3010 via the integral USB port simultaneously
ensures that the user can benefit from  PC connection
 Up to 32 measurement channels can
future upgrades of the device software. – USB
be displayed at a time
– RS 232
 Measuring rates up to 0.1 ms
 Convenient visualisation, archiving
 Extended voltage measurement
E 18.399.1/11.13
and data processing using the

-10 .. +10 V and 0 .. 50 V HMGWIN 3000 and CMWIN software
 Can be connected to a CAN bus supplied
321
Function:  Measured values, curves or texts are
 Clear and graphical selection menus visualized on a full-graphics colour
guide the operator very simply to all display in different selectable formats
13 and display forms.
the device functions available. A
navigation pad on the keypad ensures
14 rapid operation.
 The HMG 3010 can monitor
signals from up to ten sensors
simultaneously. For this there are
5 robust standard input sockets. By
using Y adapters, the number of inputs
can be doubled individually to make a
total of between 6 and 10.  The data memory for recording
 Up to 8 sensors can be connected to 4 curves or logs can hold up to 500,000
of these input sockets: measured values. At least 100 such
- 8 sensors (e.g. for pressure, full-length data records can be stored
temperature, and flow rate) with in an additional archive memory.
the special digital HSI interface  For specific, event-driven curves
(HYDAC Sensor Interface); or logs, the HMG 3010 has four  Numerous useful and easy-to-use
this means the basic device independent triggers, which can be auxiliary functions are available,
settings (measured variable, range, linked together logically. e.g. zoom, ruler tool, differential value
and unit of measurement) are  It is also possible to determine graph creation and individual scaling,
undertaken automatically differential values between different which are particularly for use when
- 8 standard analogue sensors input signals from sensors. Particularly analysing the recorded measurement
with current and voltage signals when measuring flow rate by means curves.
- 4 Condition Monitoring sensors*) of differential pressure measurement
(SMART sensors); again, the across a measuring orifice, the
basic device settings are carried out accuracy can be significantly improved
automatically by using a stored calibration curve.
To generate such calibration curves,
 Frequency measurements, counter the HMG 3010 has an easy-to-use
functions, or triggers for data logging handheld recording function.
can be implemented via the fifth input
socket with 2 digital inputs.  User-specific device settings can
be stored and re-loaded at any time
 For extended voltage measurement, as required. This means that repeat
the HMG 3010 offers the possibility measurements can be carried out on
of recording signals of a machine again and again using the
0 .. 50 V on two inputs and a signal same device settings.
of -10 .. +10 V on one input (e.g.
proportional valve control).
 The connection to a CAN bus in  The HMG 3010 communicates with a
conjunction with the CAN adapter PC via the built-in USB port or RS 232
ZBE 3010 makes it possible to record port.
CAN messages (e.g. motor speed,
motor oil pressure) in combination
with measured data from the hydraulic
system.
 HYDAC CAN bus sensors connected
directly to the CAN adapter can be
parameterized using the HMG 3010
(node ID and baud rate)
 All input channels can
operate simultaneously at a
measurement rate of 0.5 ms (1.0 ms
for SMART sensors). To record highly
dynamic processes, 2 analogue inputs
are capable of recording measured
values of 0.1 ms.
 The most impressive function of the
HMG 3010 is its ability to record
dynamic processes "online", i.e. in
real-time, as a measurement curve
and to render them as graphs in the
field.
E 18.399.1/11.13
322
HMGWIN 3000: Some examples of the numerous  Overlay of curves, for example to
useful additional functions: document the wear of a machine (new
The PC software HMGWIN 3000 is also
supplied with the device. This software  Transfer and archiving of condition/current condition)
13
is a convenient and simple package measurements recorded using the
for analysing and archiving curves and HMG 3010
logs which have been recorded using  Display of the measurements in graph 14
the HMG 3010, or for exporting the data form or as a table
for integration into other PC programs
if required. It is also possible to operate
the HMG 3010 directly from the
computer, to undertake basic settings,
and to start measurements online and
display them directly on the PC screen
as measurement curve progressions.
CMWIN:  Using mathematical operations
The HYDAC software CMWIN is also (calculation functions, filter functions)
supplied with the device. new curves can be added.
This software enables you to  Zoom function:  Snap-shot function: comparable to the
communicate directly with SMART Using the mouse, a frame is drawn function of a digital camera, a picture
sensors *) connected to the HMG 3010 around an interesting section of a can be taken immediately of any graph
from your PC. measurement curve, which is then and saved as a jpg file.
enlarged and displayed.  A professional measurement
Both programs can be run on report can be produced at the click
PCs with Windows Vista / XP / 2000 of a mouse: HMGWIN 3000 has an
and Windows 7 operating systems. automatic layout function.
Starting with a table of contents, all
recorded data, descriptions, and
graphics and/or tables are combined
into a professional report and saved as
a pdf file.
 Online function:
Starting, recording, and online
display of measurements
Fig.: Zoomed section of measurement curve
(similar to the function of an
oscilloscope)
 Accurate measurement of the curves
using the ruler tool (time values,
amplitude values, and differentials)
 Change of axis assignment of the

recorded measurement parameters in
 Individual comments and graph mode (e.g. to produce
measurement information can be a p-Q graph )
inserted into the graph
*) SMART sensors
E 18.399.1/11.13
(Condition Monitoring Sensors)

are a generation of sensors from
HYDAC which can provide a variety
of different measured values.
323
Technical data: Order details:
Meas. inputs  4 input sockets (channels A-H) for HMG 3010 - 000 - X
13 connecting up to 8 analogue
sensors or up to 4 SMART
sensors.
14  1 input socket with 2 digital Operating manual and documentation
inputs (channels I-J) and one D = German
voltage input of -10 V to E = English
+ 10 V (shown on channel H) F = French
Sensors are connected using
standard M12x1 male connectors
(5 pole)
Channels A, B, E, F, G Items supplied
(Accuracy) HSI (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)  HMG 3010
4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)  Power supply for 90 .. 230 V AC
0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)  Operating manual
0 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)  CD-ROM containing USB drivers, HMGWIN 3000 and
0 .. 10 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) CMWIN software
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)  USB connection cable
0.5 .. 5.5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)
Channels C and D HSI (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) Accessories:
(Accuracy) 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)  CAN adapter, required for CAN bus
0 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) operation ( to be ordered separately)
0 .. 5 V (≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.) ZBE 3010 CAN adapter for HMG 3010
0 .. 10 V (≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.) Material No. 921238
0 .. 50 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 5.5 V (≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V (≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V (≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.)
Channel H HSI (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
(Accuracy) 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
 Additional accessories, such as electrical and
0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) mechanical connection adapters, power adapters, etc.
0 .. 5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.) can be found in the "Accessories - Service
0 .. 10 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) devices" catalogue section
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
0.5 .. 5.5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 5 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.)
1 .. 6 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.) Dimensions:
-10 .. +10 V (≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.)
Channels I and J Frequency range: 1 .. 30 000 Hz
(Accuracy) (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
Switching / switch-back threshold: 2 V / 1 V
Max. input voltage: 50 V
Differential channels A - B
C-D
Difference channel for flow rate-
measurement orifice (shown on channel B)
Measuring rate 0.1 ms, max. 2 analogue input channels
(dependent on 0.2 ms, max. 4 analogue input channels
the number of 0.5 ms, all 10 input channels shown with protective cover open
active channels) 1.0 ms, for SMART sensors
resolution 12 bit
Memory At least. 100 measurement curves,
each with up to 500,000 measured values
Display 3.5" colour display
Interfaces 1 USB, 1 serial port
mark EN 61000-1/2/3/4 Note:
Safety EN 61010 The information in this brochure relates to the operating
Protection class IP 40 conditions and applications described.
Ambient Operating temp.: 0 .. +50 °C For applications or operating conditions not described,
conditions Storage temp.: -20 .. +60 °C please contact the relevant technical department.
Rel. humidity: 0 .. 70 % Subject to technical modifications.
E 18.399.1/11.13
Weight 1100 g
HYDAC ELECTrONIC GMBH
Note: Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01, Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
324
13
Electronic 14
with HSI Sensor Recognition
HDA 4748-H

The pressure transmitter Input data
HDA 4748-H with HSI sensor Measuring ranges1) -1 .. 9; 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600;
recognition has been specially 1000 bar
developed for use in conjunction with Overload pressures 20; 32; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000;
HYDAC measuring instruments 1600 bar
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000, Burst pressures 100; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000;
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000. 3000 bar
For data transmission, the HDA 4748-H Mechanical connection1) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
has an HSI interface (torque value) G1/2 DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
(HYDAC Sensor Interface).
The HSI sensors are automatically Seal: FPM
recognised via the HSI interface
Output data
by the above-mentioned HYDAC
measuring instruments and all Output signal HSI (HYDAC Sensor Interface)
Automatic sensor recognition
necessary basic device settings are
taken from each sensor. Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
Like all pressure transmitters of the Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
HDA 4700 series, the HDA 4748-H (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
also has a very accurate and robust Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.008 % FS / °C typ.
sensor cell with a thin-film strain Zero point ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
gauge on a stainless steel membrane.
It combines excellent technical Over range ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C max.
specifications with a very compact
design.
to DIN 16086
Special features: Repeatability ≤ ± 0.05 % FS
 Fully automatic recognition by, Rise time ≤ 0.5 ms
and voltage supply from, HYDAC Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.1 % FS typ. / year
measuring instruments HMG 500, Environmental conditions
HMG 510, HMG 3000, HMG 3010 Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
or CMU 1000 Operating temperature range 2) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
 Automatic transfer of measuring Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
range, measured value and Fluid temperature range 2) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
measurement unit mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
 Highly robust sensor cell DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Very small temperature error Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector
is used)
 Excellent long term stability Voltage supply via HYDAC measuring instruments
 Very compact design HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 or CMU 1000
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
E 18.332.2/11.13
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range,
1)
2)
325
Model code: Note:
13
HDA 4 7 4 8 – H – XXXX – 000 the operating conditions and applications
described.
Mechanical connection For applications or operating conditions
2 = G1/2 DIN 3852 (male) not described, please contact the relevant
14 (only for "1000 bar" press. range) technical department.
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male) Subject to technical modifications.
Signal
H = HSI (automatic sensor recognition)
0009; 0016; 0060; 0100; 0250; 0400; 0600 (only in conjunction with mech. conn. "4")
1000 (only in conjunction with mech. connection "2")
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
hex. SW27 hex. SW27
elastomer
elastomer
profile gasket
profile gasket
DIN 3869
DIN 3869
optional
O-ring
20.35 x 1.78
E 18.332.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
326
13
Electronic 14
with HSI Sensor Recognition
ETS 4148-H

The electronic temperature Input data
transmitter ETS 4148-H with HSI Measuring principle PT 1000
sensor recognition has been specially Measuring range -25 .. +100°C
developed for use in conjunction with
Probe length 6 mm
HYDAC measuring instruments
Probe diameter 4.5 mm
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000. Pressure resistance 600 bar
Overload pressure 900 bar
For data transmission, the
Mechanical connection G¼ A DIN 3852
ETS 4148-H has an HSI interface
(HYDAC Sensor Interface). Torque value 20 Nm
The HSI sensors are automatically Parts in contact with medium1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
recognised by the above-mentioned Seal: FPM
HYDAC measuring instruments and Output data
all necessary basic settings are taken Output signal HSI (HYDAC Sensor Interface)
from each sensor. Automatic sensor recognition through
HMG
Like all temperature transmitters of
the ETS 4000 series,
≤ ± 0.8 % FS max.
the ETS 4148-H features a robust
design and excellent EMC properties. Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C
Based on corresponding evaluation Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: ~4 s
electronics, the temperature sensor is t90: ~8 s
designed to measure temperatures in Environmental conditions
the range -25 °C to +100 °C. Operating temperature range2) -40 .. +85°C / -25 .. + 85 °C
Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. 125°C / -25 .. + 125 °C
 Fully automatic sensor recognition Vibration resistance to ≤ 25 g
by, and voltage supply from, DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
HYDAC measuring instruments Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000, is used)
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000 Other data
 Automatic transfer of Electrical connection M12x1, 5 pole
measuring range, measured value Voltage supply via HYDAC measuring instruments
and measurement unit HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.8 % FS HMG 3010 or CMU
 Robust design Weight ~ 200 g
 Excellent EMC characteristics Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage, override
 Excellent long term stability FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
 Standard protection class IP 67 1)
2)
E 18.333.1.1/11.13
327
Model code: Note:
13
ETS 4 1 4 8 – H – 006 – 000 the operating conditions and applications
described.
Mechanical connection For applications or operating conditions
4 = G1/4 A DIN 3852 (male) not described, please contact the relevant
14 technical department.
Electrical connection Subject to technical modifications.
Signal
H = HSI (automatic sensor recognition)
Probe length
006 = 6 mm
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn.

5 pole
hex. SW27
elastomer
profile gasket
DIN 3869
E 18.333.1.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
328
13
Electronic 14

with HSI-Sensor Recognition
EVS 3100-H
EVS 3110-H

The flow rate transmitters in the Input data
series EVS 3100-H and Measuring ranges1) and operating pressure
EVS 3110-H with HSI sensor EVS 3108-H-0020 1.2 .. 20.0 l/min 400 bar
recognition have been specially EVS 3118-H-0020
developed for use in conjunction with EVS 3108-H-0060 6.0 .. 60.0 l/min 400 bar
HYDAC measuring instruments EVS 3118-H-0060
HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
EVS 3108-H-0300 15.0 .. 300.0 l/min 400 bar
HMG 3010 and CMU 1000. EVS 3118-H-0300
For data transmission, the EVS 31x0-H EVS 3108-H-0600 40.0 .. 600.0 l/min 315 bar
has an HSI interface (HYDAC Sensor EVS 3118-H-0600 40.0 .. 600.0 l/min 400 bar
Interface). Additional connection options 2 x G1/4 female threads for pressure
The HSI sensors are recognised and/or temperature sensors
automatically via the HSI interface Output data
by the above-mentioned HYDAC Output signal HSI (HYDAC Sensor Interface)
measuring instruments, and all the Automatic sensor recognition
necessary basic settings are taken Accuracy ≤ 2 % of the actual value
from each instrument. Environmental conditions
As with all flow rate transmitters in the Compensated temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
series EVS 3100 and EVS 3110, Operating temperature range -20 .. +70 °C
the EVS 31x0-H also operates Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
according to the turbine principle.
The speed of an impeller turning
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
in the fluid flow is measured and
converted into an electronic signal. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67 (when an IP 67 connector is used)
Other data
Housing material EVS 3100-H: Aluminium
Special features: EVS 3110-H: Stainless steel
 Fully automatic recognition by, Measuring medium2) EVS 3100-H: Hydraulic oils
and voltage supply from, HYDAC EVS 3110-H: Water-based
measuring instruments HMG 500, media
HMG 510, HMG 3000, HMG 3010 Viscosity range 1 .. 100 cSt
or CMU 1000 Calibration viscosity EVS 3100-H: 30 cSt
 Automatic transfer of measuring EVS 3110-H: 5 cSt
range, measured value and Voltage supply via HYDAC measuring instruments
measurement unit HMG 500, HMG 510, HMG 3000,
HMG 3010 or CMU 1000
 Viscosities of 1 .. 100 cSt
1)
 Additional connection of Note: Other measuring ranges on request
2)
temperature and / or Other fluids on request
pressure transmitters possible
E 18.334.2/11.13
329
Model code: Note:
13
EVS 3 1 X 8 – H – XXXX – 000 the operating conditions and applications
described.
Housing material For applications or operating conditions
0 = Aluminium not described, please contact the relevant
14 1 = Stainless steel technical department.
Signal
H = HSI (Automatic Sensor Recognition)
Measuring range
0020 = 1.2 .. 20 l/min
0060 = 6.0 .. 60 l/min
0300 = 15.0 .. 300 l/min
0600 = 40.0 .. 600 l/min
Modification number
000 = Standard
Note:
Accessories:
Dimensions:
male electr. conn. 5 pole

range value
[l/min] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [Nm] [mm]
EVS 3108-H-0020 1.2 .. 20 117 135 47 / 46 G¼" 60 7
EVS 3108-H-0060 6 .. 60 144 135 48.5 / 46 G½" 130 11
EVS 3108-H-0300 15 .. 300 155 150 63.5 / 60 G1¼" 500 22
EVS 3108-H-0600 40 .. 600 181 150 63.5 / 60 G1½" 600 30
EVS 3118-H-0020 1.2 .. 20 117 135 47 / 46 G¼" 60 7
E 18.334.2/11.13

EVS 3118-H-0060 6 .. 60 144 135 48.5 / 46 G½" 130 11 Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
EVS 3118-H-0300 15 .. 300 155 150 63.5 / 60 G1¼" 500 22 Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
EVS 3118-H-0600 40 .. 600 181 150 63.5 / 60 G1½" 600 30 E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
330
E 18.334.2/11.13
331
14
13
Condition Monitoring Products
Condition monitoring is the process of logging and interpreting condition
information from machines, systems and their components, with the aim
of implementing predictive maintenance programs based on the condition
of the system.
The operating data of the machine or system is recorded continuously
using the HYDAC sensor system. The recorded data is then analysed and
interpreted. Finally this compressed condition information can be trans-
mitted to the operator, enabling him to monitor and control the machine or
system using a variety of communication channels.
15
Condition monitoring products from HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH:
Page
CMU 1000, Condition Monitoring Unit 333
CSI-B-2, Interface Module 337
HLB 1300, Oil condition sensor 339
AS 1000, AquaSensor 341
AS 3000, AquaSensor 343
AS 3000 IO-Link , AquaSensor 345
EY 1356, Contamination switch 347
E 180.000.2 /11.13
332
Condition Monitoring Unit
CMU 1000
15
Description:
The CMU1000 is an electronic
evaluation unit designed for permanent
online condition monitoring of machines
and systems.
In order to achieve this, the device must
be supplied with relevant data which is
recorded by the sensors connected to it.
This recorded data (processed or
unprocessed) can be transferred by the
CMU 1000 via different ports or as an
analogue value to other devices and/or
monitoring levels.
The CMU 1000 processes the
application program stored in it
continuously and cyclically like a PLC.
The user creates this program simply
and conveniently on a PC using the CM
Editor developed for this purpose and
then uploads it to the CMU 1000.
The CM Editor is part of the HYDAC PC
software CMWIN Version V03 or higher
(supplied) and it provides the various
tools and functions in accordance with
IEC 61131 for designing, integrating and
testing the user program using "drag
and drop" operations.
For status indication and for displaying
messages and values on the device
itself, there is a back-lit LCD display and
three different coloured LEDs.
The CMU 1000 is operated and data
is input on site using a built-in keypad
within the menu structure of the device.
The CMU 1000 is designed for use in
machines in both the stationary and
mobile sectors.
It is possible to connect easily to
higher-level control, monitoring and bus
Special features:
systems using the built-in interfaces or in  8 input channels for HSI or SMART  2-line LCD display (2 x 16 characters)
combination with an additional coupling sensors to display measured data and status
module.  8 input channels for analogue sensors and/or error messages
 4 input channels for digital signals  3 user-programmable LEDs in different
colours, for status indication
 2 output channels for analogue signals
(red, yellow, green)
 4 relay switching outputs with
 Simple operation using navigation
change-over contacts
pad
 USB slave port for PC connection
 Creation of customised application
E 18.357.2/11.13
 USB master port for storing measured program using the PC software
data on a standard USB memory stick CMWIN supplied
 Ethernet interface
 RS 232 interface
333
CM Editor:
The CM Editor is part of the HYDAC PC software CMWIN, Version 03 or higher, and provides a wide variety of tools and
functions for designing, integrating and testing the application program.
An application program consists of many individual functions which can be linked together. During subsequent operation, this
user program is processed as for a PLC, cyclically.
The program is created according to the IEC 61131 (the standard for PLC programming).
15
E 18.357.2/11.13
334
Technical data:
Supply Interfaces
Input voltage 18.0 .. 35.0 V DC Keypad - 4 arrow keys (up, down,
Current consumption max. 1.5 A (3.5 A when right, left)
CSI-F-10 connected) - OK key
- ESC key
Reverse pol. protect.: -30 V
Isolation voltage +40 V Display - Two-line LCD display
(back-lit) (2 x 16 characters)
Connection of sensors - Additional indication of status
Up to 8 sensors with HSI functionality or information via
up to 8 SMART sensors1) and in addition up to 8 analogue 3 different coloured LEDs
sensors and is possible 15
up to 4 digital sensors
USB Mass Storage - USB 1.1 / USB 2.0 full speed
4 x digital / 2 x digital + 2 x frequency /
Device2) port for connecting
3 x digital + 1 x frequency
a mass storage device
Analogue inputs (memory stick)
Channel I and J 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) - Female connection type "A".
(Accuracy) 0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) Ethernet, - RJ 45 8/8 Ethernet interface
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) supported protocols - HTTP Server
0 .. 10 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
- TCP/IP
Channel K and L 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
(Accuracy) 0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) Serial Interface 0 - Implementing an RS 232 or
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) (UART 0) an HSI master interface
0 .. 50 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) - Change-over user-programmable
-10 .. +10 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.) L only! - Connection via plug-in terminals
- No handshake lines
Channel M and N 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.)
(Accuracy) 0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) HSI Master Cascading the CMU
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) USB Device - USB 1.1 / USB 2.0 full speed
Channel O and P 4 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) port for connecting
(Accuracy) 0 .. 20 mA (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) a PC / Notebook to
0.5 .. 4.5 V (≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.) configure the CMU
-10 .. +10 V (≤ ± 0.2 % FS max.) P only! - Female connection type "B".
Digital inputs CAN Bus Interface Can be integrated as an option
Quantity 4, of which 2 are for frequency Cycle time
measurement (Channel Q and R)
Independently determined at start of program
Trigger threshold approx. 2 V Display of actual cycle time is possible in the CM Editor
Dynamics 30 kHz
Operating and environmental conditions
Measurement channels
Operating temperature -20 .. +70 °C
Quantity 32 - A measurement channel can be a
value of a connected sensor Storage temperature -30 .. +80 °C
(also a subchannel of a SMART Relative humidity 0 .. 70 %,
sensor) or a value derived non-condensing
(calculated) from sensor data. Dimensions and weight
Analogue outputs Dimensions approx. 212 x 106 x 36 mm
Quantity 2
Type individually selectable,
Technical standards
current (4 .. 20 mA) or
voltage (0 .. 10 V) EMC EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Digital outputs Safety EN 61010
Quantity 4 Protection class IP 40
Type: Relay output, change-over contact
Note:
Switching capacity 30V DC / 1 A 1)
SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are
Calculation unit a generation of sensors from HYDAC, which can
Analogue value 12 bit A/D converter provide a variety of different measured values.
recording
2)
Recorded data from the CMU can be transferred
to a memory stick via this interface.
The USB Host supports mass storage devices
exclusively.
E 18.357.2/11.13
335
Block circuit diagram: Note:
to the operating conditions and
applications described. For applications
SRAM CAN transceiver
and operating conditions not described,
Processor optional please contact the relevant technical
Flash department.
16 Bit Subject to technical modifications.
CF-Card Real-time clock
USB master RS-232 / HSI-Master

15 (Memory Stick) (selectable)
USB slave LCD display

(PC connection) (2 x 16 characters)
Ethernet Keypad
(HTTP server / (4 x arrows / OK / ESC)
TCP/IP)
3 x LED
(user-programmable)
8 x HSI-IN
8 x Analogue-IN 2 x Analogue-OUT
4 x Digital-IN 4 x Digital-OUT
Model code:
CMU 1000 – 000 – X
Modification number
000 = Standard
Operating manual and documentation
D = German
E = English
F = French
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the technical
amendment details supplied with the instrument.
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as sensor lines for the electrical connection can be found in
the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
E 18.357.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01,
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
336
Condition Monitoring
Interface Module
CSI-B-2
15

The condition monitoring interface Input data
module CSI-B-2 is another element HSI interface HYDAC Sensor Interface
in the HYDAC condition monitoring for digital linking of SMART
concept which connects the sensor sensors1)
level with the interpretation level. - Male X2
It is an all-purpose electronic Output data
instrument for converting the HSI Signal output switchable:
signal from HYDAC SMART sensors RS 485 half-duplex or RS 232
into a standardised PC signal. - Male X1 (RS 485)
Using the HYDAC "CMWIN" PC soft- - SUB-D 9 pole female (RS 232)
ware, it is therefore possible to read Environmental Conditions
the data and measured values of the Operating temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
connected SMART sensor directly. Storage temperature range -30 .. +85 °C
Relative humidity 0 .. 70 %, non-condensing
The long-term memory can also be mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
read as well as adjustments made Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 40
and parameters set on the connected
Other data
sensor (the setting options depend on
the particular sensor). Supply voltage of the module 18 .. 35 V DC (male X1)
Current consumption (module + sensor) 30 mA to 300 mA max.
The HSI signal can be converted (depending on the supply voltage and
either into an RS 232 or an RS 485 the connected sensor)
signal. The CSI-B-2 can be connected Sensor supply 15 V DC ± 5 % / 300 mA max.
to any PC via the RS 232 interface at 23 °C (male X2)
(and possibly an additional standard Electrical connection
RS 232/USB adapter1)). Cross-section of connection Max. 1.5 mm²
The RS 485 interface and appropriate X1 : Module supply + RS 232 / RS 485 Male terminal block, 8 pole RM 3.5
additional coupling modules can also X2 : Sensor supply + HSI Male terminal block, 5 pole RM 3.5
be used to connect to higher-level SUB-D: RS 232 9 pole female with thumbscrews
control and/or bus systems. Conversion mode options Option HSI - RS 232 or HSI - RS 485
via jumper (bridge):
X1.3 - X1.4 open: HSI - RS 232
Special features: X1.3 - X1.4 closed: HSI - RS 485
 1 input channel for HYDAC Indication of active conversion mode Green LED: HSI - RS 232
SMART sensors Yellow LED: HSI - RS 485
 Direct connection of the sensor via Dimensions and weight
screw-type terminals Housing approx. 55 x 106 x 34 mm
 Indication of the active interface via Housing to be mounted on
LED (RS 232 / RS 485) rails (35 mm) to
DIN EN 60715 TH 35
 Very compact design (formerly DIN EN 50022)
 Suitable for mounting on standard Weight ~ 140 g
DIN rails
 Protection class IP 40 and short circuit protection are provided.
1)
SMART sensors (Condition Monitoring Sensors) are a generation of
1)
S 232/USB adapter is not supplied
R sensors from HYDAC, which can provide a variety of different
with the device. measured values.
E 18.359.2/11.13
337
Model code: Terminal assignment:
Terminal strip –X1
CSI – B – 2 – 000
Pin Signal
Modification number 1 RS 485 (-)
000 = Standard
2 RS 485 (+)
3 3 – 4 open: HSI to RS 232
4 3 – 4 closed: HSI to RS 485
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label or the technical 5 RxD RS 232
amendment details supplied with the instrument. (connected to Pin 3 SUB-D 9 pole)
6 TxD RS 232
(connected to Pin 2 SUB-D 9 pole)
15 Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as sensor lines for the electrical connection can be found 7 0V
in the Accessories brochure. (connected to Pin 5 SUB-D 9 pole)
8 +UB (18 .. 35 V DC) Module supply
Terminal strip –X2

Pin Signal
1 +UB (15 V DC) Sensor supply
2 0V
Dimensions: 3 HSI signal
4 0V
5 0V
Note:
to the operating conditions and
For applications and operating
conditions not described, please
contact the relevant technical
department.
Subject to technical modifications
E 18.359.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
338
Oil Condition Sensor
HYDACLAB
HLB 1300
15

The HYDACLab HLB 1300 is a Input data
multifunctional sensor for online Rel. humidity 0 .. 100 % saturation
condition monitoring of standard Temperature -25 .. +100 °C
and bio oils in stationary and mobile Dielectric constant (εR) 1 .. 10
applications. Operating pressure < 50 bar
The user is thus informed in real Pressure resistance < 600 bar
time of changes in the fluids and can Flow velocity < 5 m/s
take immediate action in the case of Output data - Saturation level
deteriorating operating conditions. Output signal 4 .. 20 mA (0 .. 100 %)
Assertions can be made about Calibration accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS max.
the condition of an oil, e.g. ageing Accuracy1) ≤ ± 3 % FS typ.
or mixing with other fluids, on the Output data - Temperature measurement
basis of the measured values for Output signal 4 .. 20 mA (-25 .. +100°C)
the relative change in dielectric Accuracy ≤ ± 3 % FS max.
constant, the saturation level and the Output data - Relative change in dielectric constant (εR)
temperature. Output signal 12 mA ± 8 mA (± 30 % of IV)
These measurements are available Accuracy2) see below
as sequential analogue signals and Switch output
switching signals at the electrical Signal 1 (N/C) PNP switching output 0.5 A max.
output of the HYDACLab (e.g. for switching level ≥ UB - 4 V
activating warning devices or alarms). Default warning level SP1 ≥ 85 %
Humidity
The measured values can be
Default warning level SP1 ≥ 80 °C
displayed on various HYDAC display Temperature
and measurement devices. Default warning level SP1 ± 15 % (temperature compensated)
Dielectric constant
Nominal temperature range +20 .. +80 °C
Special features: Storage temperature -40 .. +90 °C
 Online condition monitoring of oils Fluid compatibility Mineral oils HLP (HLP-D on request)
 Applications in industrial and mobile Esters: HEES, HETG
sectors Seal material: FPM
 Analogue output signal for: mark EN 61000 - 6 - 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
- Saturation level
Other data
- Temperature
Supply voltage UB 10 .. 36 V DC
- Rel. change in dielectric constant
 Switching output Mechanical connection G ¾ DIN 3852 E
 Compact design Torque value 30 Nm
 Simple cartridge mounting Electrical connection M12x1, 5 pole
Housing Stainless steel
Weight ~ 205 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection provided.
FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range IV (Initial Value)
1)
The max. accuracy achievable when measuring relative humidity is heavily
dependent on the type of fluid or fluid additive. More precise information on this is
available on request.
E 18.371.2/11.13
2)
The accuracy achievable when measuring the relative change in dielectric
constant is dependent on the application, the type of oil and the individual
calibration of the sensor. Detailed information on this is available on request.
339
Pin connections:
Model code:
HLB 1 3 0 8 – 1 C – 000 – F 1 M12x1
Variables
3 = 3 variables
- Relative change in dielectric constant (DK) 4 3
- Saturation level 5
- Temperature
Mechanical connection 1 2
0 = G3/4 A DIN 3852
8 = Male M12x1, 5-pole (connector not supplied) Pin
15
Type of signal, output 1 1 +UB
1 = Switching output / N/C
2 Signal 1
Type of signal, output 2 3 ^
4 Signal 2
Modification number
000 = Standard (cannot be adjusted) 5 HSI* Reset (PLC)
Seal material (parts in contact with the fluid) * HSI = HYDAC Sensor Interface
F = FPM seal (HYDAC's own communication
interface)
Connection material (in contact with fluid) Signal 1: PNP switching output
1 = Stainless steel Signal 2: Sequential analogue output
(4 .. 20 mA)
Note:
On instruments with a different modification number, please read the label Display and read-out
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instrument. options:
Accessories:
HDA 5500-0-2-Zc-006
Digital Display Unit; the HDA 5500
in the Electrical Accessories brochure. displays the sequential analogue output
of the HYDACLAB and provides the
user with 4 programmable switching
outputs.
Dimensions: HDA 5500-0-2-AC-006(CM1k)
Order no.: 909925
HDA 5500-0-2-DC-006(CM1k)
Order no.: 909926
HMG 510
Portable 2-channel data recorder,
male electr. conn.
specially designed for use with HSI and

M12x1, 5 pole
SMART sensors
Order no.: 909889
HMG 3010
Portable data recorder with full graphics
colour display for indicating, displaying
and editing measured values
Order no.: 920930
hex-SW27
Information on other read-out options can

be found on our website at
www.hydac.com or please contact your
HYDAC representative.
Note:
E 18.371.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
340
AquaSensor
AS 1000
15

The AquaSensor AS 1000 is the Input data
culmination of continued development Saturation level 0 ... 100 %
of the successful AS 2000 series for Temperature -25 .. 100 °C
online detection of water in oils, in
Operating pressure -0.5 .. 50 bar
particular as an OEM sensor for fluid
Burst pressure ≤ 630 bar
conditioning monitoring. It measures
the degree of saturation and the Mechanical connection G3/8 A DIN 3852
temperature of the fluid. Torque value 25 Nm
Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection:
In the analogue output version, the
Stainless steel / Vacuum-metallized
AS 1000 transmits the values for
ceramic
the degree of saturation and the Seal: FPM or EPDM
temperature as a 4 .. 20 mA signal.
Output data
In the version with 2 switch outputs, Pin 2: Saturation level
the AS 1000 can be configured Output signal 4 .. 20 mA (corresponds to 0 .. 100 %)
individually using the HYDAC service RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
instrument HMG 3010, the Condition or switch output (configurable)
Monitoring Unit CMU 1000 and the Calibration accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS max.
interface module CSI-B-2.
Accuracy in media measurements ≤ ± 3 % FS typ.
The following parameters can be
Pressure dependency ± 0.2 % FS / bar
adjusted:
Pin 4: Temperature
- Saturation level / temperature
Output signal 4 .. 20 mA (corresponds to -25 .. 100 %)
- Switch points RLmax.= (UB - 10 V) / 20 mA [kW]
- Switch mode of the switch outputs or switch output (configurable)
- Switching direction
Accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS max.
- Switch delay times
Pin 5: HSI (HYDAC Sensor Interface)
The AS 1000 therefore enables Automatic sensor recognition
hydraulic and lubrication oils to be Switch outputs
monitored accurately, continuously Type PNP transistor outputs
and online. (configurable as N/O or N/C)
Switching current max. 1 A per switch output
 Reliable due to its compact Compensated temperature range 0 .. +90 °C
and robust design Operating temperature range 1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Cost-effective sensor, also for Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
use in OEM applications Fluid temperature range 1) -40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
 Not necessary to calibrate to Viscosity range 1 .. 5000 cSt
different types of oil Flow velocity < 5 m/s
Fluid compatibility mineral oil based fluids,
 Pressure-resistant also during
synthetic and natural esters
pulsations
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Wide fluid temperature range Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
 Individual configuration Other data
 Early detection of Supply voltage 12 .. 32 V DC
water problems thereby Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
preventing breakdowns Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.321.2/11.13
and unnecessary interruption

Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection are provided.
to operations. FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range
1)
341
AS 1 X 0 8 – X – 000 M12x1
Medium
0 = Mineral oils 4 3
1 = Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol 5
0 = G3/8 A DIN 3852
Pin AS 1X08-C AS 1X08-2
15 Signal technology
1 +UB +UB
C = Output 1 Pin 2 saturation level (4 .. 20 mA)
Output 2 Pin 4 temperature (4 .. 20 mA) 2 Saturation level SP 1
2 = 2 switching outputs 4 .. 20 mA
3 0V 0V
Modification number
4 Temperature SP 2
000 = Standard
4 .. 20 mA
Notice:
5 HSI* HSI*
* HSI = HYDAC Sensor Interface (HYDAC's
or the technical amendment details supplied with the instruments. own communication interface)
Accessories: Display, read-out and

Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, can be found in the configuration options:
Accessories brochure. HDA 5500-1-1-xC-000
Digital Display Unit with 2 programmable
switch outputs, which have been
specifically designed for use with the
AS 1000
Dimensions: HDA 5500-1-1-AC-000
Order no.: 908869
HDA 5500-1-1-DC-000
Order no.: 908870
HMG 510
Portable 2-channel data recorder,
specially designed for displaying
measured values with HSI and
SMART sensors
Order no.: 909889
HMG 3010
Portable data recorder with full graphics
colour display for indicating, displaying
and editing measured values as well
as for configuration of HSI and SMART
sensors
Order no.: 920930
CMU 1000
Electronic evaluation unit for online
hex.-SW27
measured value monitoring as well as
elastomer
profile seal ring
for the configuration of HSI and SMART
DIN3869 sensors
Order no. 920716
CSI-B-2
Interface module, enables configuration
of HSI and SMART sensors using
HYDAC PC software CMWIN
Order no. 920134
Information on other read-out options
can be found on our website at
www.hydac.com or please contact your
HYDAC representative.
Note:
E 18.321.2/11.13

The information in this brochure relates to the operating conditions and applications Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
described. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
342
AquaSensor
AS 3000
15

The AquaSensor AS 3000 with an Input data
integrated digital display is based Saturation level 0 ... 100 %
on the proven AS 1000 series for Temperature -25 .. 100 °C
the online detection of water in oils,
Operating pressure -0.5 .. 50 bar
particularly as a sensor for Condition
Burst pressure ≤ 630 bar
Monitoring. The device has 2 switch
outputs and one switchable analogue Mechanical connection G3/8 A DIN 3852
output signal (4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Torque value 25 Nm
The AS 3000 detects the water Parts in contact with medium Connector:
saturation level and temperature of Stainless steel / Vacuum-metallized
the fluid and transmits the values in ceramic
the form of an analogue or switching Seal: FPM or EPDM
signal. The display shows the actual Output data
measured values. Calibration accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS max.
All settings offered by the AS 3000 Accuracy in media measurements ≤ ± 3 % FS typ.
are grouped in 2 clearly-arranged Pressure dependency ± 0.2 % FS / bar
menus. Analogue output
The following parameters can be Signal selectable:
adjusted: 4 .. 20 mA ohmic resist. max. 500 Ω
- Saturation level / temperature 0 .. 10 V ohmic resist. min. 1 kΩ
- Switch points corresponds to measuring range selected
- Switch mode of the switch outputs Switch outputs
- Switching direction Type PNP transistor outputs
- Switch delay times (programmable as N/O / N/C)
The AS 3000 thus enables hydraulic Assignment Selectable:
and lubricating oils to be monitored Saturation level or temperature
accurately, continuously and online. Switching current max. 1.2 A per switch output
Special features: Compensated temperature range 0 .. +80 °C
 4-digit digital display Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Optimum alignment - can be Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
rotated in two axes Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Reliable due to its robust design Viscosity range 1 .. 5000 cSt
 Not necessary to calibrate to Flow velocity < 5 m/s
different types of oil Fluid compatibility mineral oil based fluids,
 Pressure-resistant, also during synthetic and natural esters
pulsations mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Wide fluid temperature range
Other data
 Individual configuration Supply voltage 18 .. 35 V DC
 User-friendly due to key Residual ripple of supply voltage ≤5%
programming Weight ~ 145 g
 Early detection of water problems Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection are provided.
thus preventing faults and FS (Full Scale) = relative to the complete measuring range
unnecessary interruptions to 1)
E 18.605.0/11.13
operations.
343
AS 3 X 0 8 – 5 – 000 M12x1
Medium
0 = Mineral oils 4 3
1 = Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol 5
0 = G3/8 A DIN 3852
Pin AS 3X08-5
15 Signal technology
1 +UB
5 = 2 switch outputs and 1 analogue output
2 Analogue
Modification number 3 0V
000 = Standard
4 SP 1
Note: 5 SP 2
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical connection
adaptors, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
Dimensions:
hex-SW27
Note:
E 18.605.0/11.13
HYDAC ELECTRONIC GMBH

male electr. conn. M12x1 -5 pole
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
344
AquaSensor
AS 3000
15

The AS 3000 with its IO Link Input data
communication interface and Saturation level 0 ... 100 %
integrated digital display is used for Temperature -25 .. 100 °C
the online detection of water in oils, Operating pressure -0.5 .. 50 bar
particularly as a sensor for condition Burst pressure ≤ 630 bar
monitoring. In addition, the AS 3000 Mechanical connection G3/8 A DIN 3852
measures the temperature of the Torque value 25 Nm
operating fluid. Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection:
The instrument has a switching output Stainless steel / Vacuum-metallized
ceramic
and additional output that can be Seal: FPM or EPDM
configured as switching or analogue Output data
(4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V). Output signals Output 1: PNP transistor switching output
Compared with the standard Output 2: can be configured as PNP
version, the IO-Link interface transistor switching output or
enables bidirectional communication analogue output
between the device and the control. Calibration accuracy ≤ ± 2 % FS max.
Parameterisation and cyclical Accuracy in media measurements ≤ ± 3 % FS typ.
transmission of process and service Pressure dependence ± 0.2 % FS / bar
data is therefore possible. Analogue output
Signal selectable:
The AquaSensor AS 3000 with 4 .. 20 mA load resistance max. 500 Ω
communication interface IO-Link 0 .. 10 V load resist. min. 1 kΩ
according to specification V1.1 has corresponds to measuring range selected
been specially designed to connect Switch outputs
sensors in automation systems. Type PNP transistor switching outputs
Typical fields of application are Assignment Selectable:
Saturation level or temperature
machine tools, handling and Switching current max. 250 A per switching output
assembly automation, intralogistics or Switching cycles > 100 million
packaging industry. Parameterisation Via IO-Link interface, with HYDAC
programming device HPG 3000 or
push-buttons on the AS 3000
 IO Link interface Compensated temperature range 0 .. +80 °C
 1 PNP transistor output Operating temperature range -25 .. +80 °C
 Additional signal output, can be Storage temperature range -40 .. +80 °C
configured as PNP transistor Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
switching output or analogue output Viscosity range 1 .. 5000 cSt
Flow velocity < 5 m/s
 Not necessary to calibrate to
Fluid compatibility mineral oil based fluids,
different types of oil synthetic and natural esters
 Wide fluid temperature range mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 4-digit display Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
 Display rotates in two planes for Supply voltage 18 .. 35 V DC
optimal alignment Current consumption ≤ 0.590 A with active switching outputs
≤ 110 mA w ith inactive switching output
and analogue output
E 18.605.1.0/11.13

Weight ~ 145 g
Note: Reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection are provided.
1)
345
AS 3000 as well as the menu structure Cycle time 2.5 ms
VDMA Standard. Frame type 2.2
Specification V1.1
range RP SP
Model code:
0 .. 100 % 1% 100 %
AS 3 X 0 6 – L – 000
15
Measuring Minimum Increment* Medium
range difference betw. 0 = Mineral oils
RP and SP 1 = Phosphate ester, e.g. Skydrol
0 .. 100 1% 0.2 %
-25 .. 100 °C 0.1 °C
0 = G3/8 A DIN 3852
* All ranges given in the table are Electrical connection
adjustable by the increments shown. 6 = Male M12x1, 4-pole
SP = switching point (connector not supplied)
RP = switch-back point Output
L = IO Link interface
Additional functions: Modification number
 Switching direction of the switching 000 = Standard
adjustable from 0.00 .. 99.99 seconds Notes:
 Analogue output signal selectable technical amendment details supplied with the instrument.
4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V
Accessories:
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors, mechanical connection
Pin connections: adaptors, etc. can be found in the Accessories brochure.
M12x1, 4 pole
L+
IO-Link
1 C/Q
2
3
4
Dimensions:
L- Standard IO
I/Q

1 L+ Supply voltage
analogue output
3 L- Gnd
4 C/Q IO-Link communication / hex.-SW27
male electr. conn.

M12x1 - -5 pole
Note:
E 18.605.1.0/11.13

346
Electronic
Contamination Switch
EY-1356
15

The contamination switch series Maximum switching voltage 30 VDC
EY-1356 works as a warning element
in hydraulic systems and gearboxes Maximum switching current 200 mA
and has been developed by HYDAC Maximum oil pressure abs. 6 bar (16 bar)
ELECTRONIC to meet the special
Holding power of the permanent solenoid ~ 1.5 N
requirements of our customers.
The sensor detects and attracts Ambient temperature -25 °C .. +90 °C
metal ferromagnetic particles in Protection class to IEC 60529
oil or in other hydraulic fluids. The
accumulation of particles generates DEUTSCH male connector
DT04 2 pole IP67
a switching signal (change in the
ohmic resistance). The contamination Integrated male connector
sensor thus provides an early warning according to EN175301-803/ ISO4400 IP65
of possible wear. Substantial damage Mating connector supplied
on bearings and gear wheels, for
instance, can therefore be avoided. DEUTSCH male connector
DT04 2 pole no
The sensor is available with different
mechanical and electrical connections Integrated male connector
and can be integrated into almost any according to
application. EN175301-803/ ISO4400 yes
Max. torque value
Special features: M14x1.5 15 Nm
 Simple design M18x1.5 25 Nm
 Robust design M22x1.5 60 Nm
 Standard connection types
M26x1.5 70 Nm
M33x2 140 Nm
Installation position We recommend an "upside-down"
mounting position, i.e. connector or
cable outlet pointing downwards.
The contamination switch is supplied with seal ring DIN 3896 NBR.
Functional principle /
diagram:
The permanent solenoid at the
measuring surface of the contamination Electronics for
display
switch attracts the ferromagnetic particles
from the passing oil. The increased
accumulation of particles forms an
electrical bridge between the permanent
solenoid and the adjacent metal contact.
The resulting switching signal can, for Contamination
instance, activate a warning function or switch
switch off the system.
E 18.602.1/11.13
Ferritic dirt particles

form connecting bridge
347
Order details: Pin connections:
Electrical connection Mechanical connection Part number in accordance with EN 175301-803
Integrated male connector M14x1.5 3252533 Without connector
according to M18x1.5 3305023
EN175301-803/ ISO4400
M22x1.5 3731848
M26x1.5 3731849
M33x2 3252555
Strand DEUTSCH male M14x1.5 3731852
connector M18x1.5 3731853
DT04 2 pole Pin
15 M22x1.5 3731854
M26x1.5 3731855 1 +UB
M33x2 3731856 2 -UB

Reverse polarity permitted
Dimensions: Cable assignment for Deutsch DT04
Deutsch male connector

Housing DT04-2P-EP04 W2P
PIN 0460-202-16141
Pin
Protective sleeve
1 +UB
Female 2 -UB
connector
gasket GDM3-16 Reverse polarity permitted
(NBR)
Hirschmann
Switching example:
Seal ring
DIN 3869 NBR
Seal ring
DIN 3869 NBR
Relay for display
Dim. 14 18 22 26 33
A M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 Other types
B 12 12 12 12 12 of connec-
tion are
C 4 4 4 4 4.5 available on
D 3 3 3 3 4 request
ØE 19 23.9 27 31.4 39.2
Note:
HYDAC ELECTrONIC GMBH
E 18.602.1/11.13
For applications and operating conditions Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
348
E 18.602.1/11.13
349
15
OEM Products for Large Volume Production
Areas of application for our OEM products for large volume production
range from mobile and stationary industrial hydraulics, to pneumatics,
machine building, automotive and mobile technology through to mining, oil
depots, marine and the off-shore industry.
Our sensors are available in a variety of electrical output signals,
connector and fluid port connection options. This versatility, combined with
certification to ATEX, CSA and IECEx or , ensures an almost limitless
range of applications for our products.
OEM Products for Large Volume Production:
Pressure transmitters Page

• HDA 8700 (minimum order 500 pieces) 351
• HDA 8700 for appl. with increased functional safety 355
(minimum order 500 pieces)
16 • HDA 7400 (minimum order 100 pieces) 357
Electronic pressure switches

• EDS 810 (minimum order 500 pieces) 361
• EDS 4400 ATEX, CSA, IECEx Flameproof encl. (min. order 50 pieces) 367
• EDS 4400 ATEX Intrinsically safe (minimum order 50 pieces) 369
Temperature transmitters
• HTT 8000 (minimum order 500 pieces) 375
Electronic temperature switch

• HTS 8000 (minimum order 500 pieces) 377
Electronic position switch

• HLS 100 for appl. with increased functional safety 379
(minimum order 100 pieces)
Special products 381

- Position switches IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020
- Position sensor IWE 40
- Position switch HLS 200 for applications with increased functional safety
E 180.000.2 /11.13
350
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 8700
(Minimum order quantity 500 units)
Description: Technical data: 16

HDA 8700 has been specifically Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for the OEM market, e.g. Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
in mobile applications. Like most of Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
our pressure transmitter series, the (Torque value) 7/16-20 UNF 2A (15 Nm)
HDA 8700 is based on a robust, long- 9/16-18 UNF 2A (20 Nm)
each with orifice 0.5 mm
life thin-film sensor. Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
All parts (sensor and pressure Seal: FPM
Output data
connection) which are in contact with
Output signal e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
the fluid are made of stainless steel ratiometric: 0.5 .. 4.5 V for UB = 5 V DC
and are welded together. This means (10 .. 90 % UB ± 5 %), etc.
that there are no sealing points in Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
the interior of the sensor and the Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
possibility of leakage is excluded. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
The pressure transmitters are Zero point ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C max.
available in various pressure ranges Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.01 % FS / °C typ.
from 0 .. 40 bar to 0 .. 600 bar. Over range ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C max.
For integration into modern controls, Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
standard analogue output signals are Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Ratiometric Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
output signals are also available. Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
For the electrical connection, various Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
integrated connections are available. Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C/ -25 .. +100 °C
A basic accuracy of max. ≤ ± 0.5 % FS, Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
combined with a small temperature mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
drift, ensures a broad range of mark2) Certificate No. E318391
applications for the HDA 8700. Vibration resistance to ≤ 25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to 100 g / 6 ms / half sine
Special features: DIN EN 60068-2-27
Protection class to IEC 60529
500 g / 1 ms / half sine
IP 65, IP 67 (depending on the electrical connection)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. to ISO 20653 IP 69 K (depending on the electrical connection)
 Outstanding performance in terms Other data
of temperature effect and EMC AMP DIN 72585 code 1, 3 pole
 Very compact design Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole
Deutsch DT 04, 3 pole
 ECE type approval AMP Superseal, 3 pole.
AMP Junior Power Timer, 3 pole
(approved for road vehicles) Flying leads, 1 m cable length
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
12 .. 30 V DC for output signal 0 .. 10 V
5 V ± 5 % for ratiometric output signal
for use acc. to UL specification - limited energy - according to
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption max. 22 mA total
0 .. 100 % FS
E 18.347.2/11.13
Weight ~ 55 g
override, short-circuit protection are provided.
1)
2)
351
Dimensions: Note:
Male connection Male connection Male connection described.
DIN 72585 Metri-Pack Deutsch DT04 For applications or operating conditions
3 pole series 150 3 pole not described, please contact the relevant
3 pole technical department.
Male connection Male connection Flying leads

Junior Power Timer Superseal
3 pole series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
16 3 pole
male connection M12x1, 4 pole
hex.-SW27
orifice
hex.-SW27
hex.-SW27
orifice
orifice
Order details:
E 18.347.2/11.13

The electronic pressure switch HDA 8700 has been specially developed for OEM Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 500 units per type. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC ELECTRONIC. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
352
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 8400

HDA 8400 has been specifically Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for the OEM market, e.g. Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
in mobile applications. Like most of Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
our pressure transmitter series, the (Torque value) 7/16-20 UNF 2A (15 Nm)
HDA 8400 is based on a robust and 9/16-18 UNF 2A (20 Nm)
each with orifice 0.5 mm
long-life, thin-film sensor. Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
All parts (sensor and pressure Seal: FPM
Output data
connection) which are in contact with
Output signal e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
the fluid are made of stainless steel ratiometric: 0.5 .. 4.5 V for UB = 5 V DC
and are welded together. This means (10 .. 90 % UB ± 5 %), etc.
that there are no sealing points in the Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
interior of the sensor. The possibility Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
of leakage is excluded. (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
The pressure transmitters are Zero point ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
available in various pressure ranges Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.015 % FS / °C typ.
from 0 .. 40 bar to 0 .. 600 bar. For Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
integration into modern controls, Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
standard analogue output signals are Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.4 % FS max.
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Ratiometric Rise time ≤ 1.5 ms
output signals are also available. Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
For the electrical connection, different Compensated temperature range -25 .. +85 °C
types of integrated connections are Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
available. Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
A basic accuracy of max. ≤ ± 1 % FS, mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
combined with a small temperature mark2) Certificate No. E318391
drift, ensures a broad range of Vibration resistance to ≤ 25 g
applications for the HDA 8400. DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
DIN EN 60068-2-27 500 g / 1 ms / half sine
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529
to ISO 20653
IP 65, IP 67 (depending on the electrical connection)
IP 69 K (depending on the electrical connection)
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Other data
 Outstanding performance in terms Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole
AMP DIN 72585 code 1, 3 pole
of temperature effect and EMC Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole
 Very compact design AMP Superseal, 3 pole.
 ECE type approval AMP Junior Power Timer, 3 pole
Flying leads, 1 m cable length
(approved for road vehicles) EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
12 .. 30 V DC for output signal 0 .. 10 V
5 V ± 5 % for ratiometric output signal
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 55 g
E 18.348.2/11.13

1)
2)
353
Dimensions: Note:
Male connection Male connection Male connection described.
DIN 72585 Metri-Pack Deutsch DT04 For applications or operating conditions

3 pole series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
16 3 pole
male connection M12x1, 4 pole
hex.-SW27
orifice
hex.-SW27
hex.-SW27
orifice
orifice
Order details:
E 18.348.2/11.13

354
Electronic
HDA 8700
for Applications with
Increased Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2

This version of the pressure transmitter Input data
series HDA 8700 has been developed Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
specifically for use in safety circuits / Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
safety functions as part of the functional Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
safety of machinery and equipment up to Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or PL d (ISO 13849). (Torque value) 7/16-20 UNF 2A (15 Nm)
During normal operation, the pressure 9/16-18 UNF 2A (20 Nm)
transmitter HDA 8700 generates a Parts in contact with medium 1) Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
pressure-proportional output signal. In
Output data
the background, the pressure transmitter
Output signal, permitted load resistance 4 .. 20 mA
performs cyclical diagnostic tests to RLmax = (UB – 8 V) / 20 mA [kΩ]
detect internal errors. Output signal with error recognition < 3 mA
If an instrument error is detected, Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
the pressure transmitter HDA 8700 Max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
supplies an output signal < 3 mA Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.15 % FS typ.
which is recognised by the user as an (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max
unacceptable discrepancy. Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.01 % / °C typ.
Zero point ≤ ± 0.02 % / °C max.
This means that the pressure transducer Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.01 % / °C typ.
HDA 8700 achieves Performance Level d Over range ≤ ± 0.02 % / °C max.
in the Safety category (based on a Non-linearity at max. setting to ≤ ± 0.03 % FS max.
Category 2 of the architecture) and SIL 2. DIN 16086
As a result, the pressure transducer can Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
be recommended for use in applications Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS.
where safety is critical. Rise time ≤ 10 ms
The main areas of application are in Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
mobile and stationary safety-oriented Environmental conditions
systems such as load torque displays or Compensated temperature range -25 .. 85 °C
load torque limitation in loading cranes or Operating temperature range 2) -40 .. 100 °C / -25 .. 100 °C
working platforms. Storage temperature range -40 .. 100 °C
Fluid temperature range2) - 40 .. 125 °C / -25 .. 125 °C
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Special features: Vibration resistance according to ≤ 25 g
 SIL 2 / PL d certification DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 0 .. 500 Hz
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ. Shock resistance according to 100 g / 6 ms / half-sine
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (11 ms) 500 g / 1 ms / half-sine
 Outstanding performance in terms Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
of temperature effect and EMC Other data
 Very compact design Electrical connection AMP Junior Power Timer, 2 pole
Service life > 10 million cycles (0 .. 100 %)
Weight ~ 75 g
Safety-related data
Performance level
PL d
Safety Integrity Level
Based on DIN EN 61508:2001
E 18.347.1.0/11.13
SIL 2
Note.: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, excess voltage,
1)
2)
-25°C with FPM seal, -40°C on request
355
Dimensions: Note:
Ø 25.9 ±0.30 For applications or operating conditions
Male connection not described, please contact the relevant
Junior Timer 2 pole technical department.
max. 48+0.3
29.5
2.5
4.1
12
hex.-SW27
G1/4 A
16 orifice Ø 0.5
Ø 18.9 -0.2
Ø 23.5 -0.1
Ø 29.4 -0.1
2.5
5.1
10 ±0.13
O-ring 11.89 x 1.98-FPM-90Sh
hex.-SW27 9/16-18UNF2A
orifice Ø 0.5 Ø 19 ±0.30
Ø 23.5 -0.1
2.5
5.1
9.14 ±0.13
O-ring 8.92 x 1.8-FPM-90Sh

hex.-SW27
7/16-20UNF2A
orifice Ø 0.5
Ø 14.3 ±0.13
Ø 23.5 -0.1
Order details:
E 18.347.1.0/11.13

This version of the electronic pressure transducer HDA 8700 has been Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
specially developed for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
500 pieces per type. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC ELECTRONIC. Internet: www.hydac.com
356
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 7400

HDA 7400 combines excellent Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
technical specifications with a highly Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
compact design. Burst pressures 200; 300; 500; 800; 1250; 2000; 2000 bar
The HDA 7400 was specifically Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
developed for OEM applications e.g. Torque value 20 Nm
in mobile applications. A stainless Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
steel sensor cell with thin-film strain Seal: FPM
gauge is the basis for a robust, long- Output data
life pressure transmitter. Output signal1) e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V,
0.5 .. 4.5 V, 1 .. 6 V,
Various pressure ranges between 0 .. 10 V etc.
0 .. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar provide Accuracy to DIN 16086 ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
versatility when adapting to particular Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
applications. Accuracy at min. setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
(B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
For integration into modern controls
(e.g. with PLC), standard analogue Zero point / Over range ≤ ± 0.025 % FS / °C max.
output signals are available. Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.3 % FS max.
to DIN 16086
Rise time ≤ 2 ms
Special features: Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Environmental conditions
 Highly robust sensor cell Compensated temperature range1) -25 .. +85 °C
Operating temperature range2) -40 ..+85 °C / -25 ..+85 °C
 Highly compact design
Storage temperature range -40 ..+100 °C
 Very small temperature error Fluid temperature range2) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 ..+100 °C
 Excellent EMC characteristics mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Excellent durability mark3) Certificate No. E318391
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
IP 67 ( for M12x1, when an
Other data
Electrical connection 1) e.g. M12x1 (4 pole)
Flying leads
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption max. 34 mA total
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 60 g
E 18.349.2/11.13

1)
Other models on request
2)
3)
357
Dimensions (examples): Note:
described.
cable screen and core ends For applications or operating conditions
are twisted & tinned not described, please contact the relevant
hex.-SW27
16
hex.-SW27
elastomer elastomer
profile seal ring profile seal ring
DIN3869 DIN3869
E 18.349.2/11.13
Order details: HYDAC electronic GmbH

358
Electronic Pressure
Transmitter
HDA 9300

HDA 9000 has been specially Measuring ranges 1; 1.6; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40; 60; 100 bar
developed for low pressure applications -1 .. 1; -1 .. 4 bar
in the industrial and mobile sectors. Overload pressures 2; 5; 8; 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120; 200; 200 bar
3.2; 12 bar
The transmitters are available in various Burst pressures 3; 7.5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180; 300; 300 bar
pressure ranges from 4.8; 18 bar
0 .. 1 bar to 0 .. 100 bar. Mechanical connection 1) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
(Torque value) 1/4-18 NPT, external thread (40 Nm)
For integration into modern controls, 7/16-20 UNF 2A (15 Nm)
standard analogue output signals are 9/16-18 UNF 2A (20 Nm)
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, Parts in contact with medium Connector: Stainless steel
0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Measuring cell: Ceramics
Seal: FPM, EPDM
Ratiometric output signals are also Output data
available. Output signal e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
For the electrical connection, different ratiometric: 0.5 .. 4.5 V for UB = 5 V DC
types of integrated connections are Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
available.
Accuracy at minimum setting ≤ ± 0.25 % FS typ.
A basic accuracy of ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ., (B.F.S.L.) ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
combined with a small temperature drift, Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C typ.
zero point ≤ ± 0.04 % FS / °C max.
ensures a broad range of applications
Temperature compensation ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C type
for the HDA 9300, e.g. in pump and over range ≤ ± 0.04 % FS / °C max.
compressor controls, refrigerating Non-linearity at max. setting ≤ ± 0.5 % FS max.
plants and air conditioning, or for pilot to DIN 16086
controls in the mobile sector. Hysteresis ≤ ± 0.25 % FS max.
Rise time ≤ 4 ms
Special features: Long term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS / year typ.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ. Environmental conditions
Compensated temperature range - 25 .. 85 °C
 Outstanding performance in terms
of temperature effect and EMC Operating temperature range 2) - 40 .. 100 °C / -25 .. 100 °C
 Very compact design Fluid temperature range 2) - 40 .. 125 °C / -25 .. 125 °C
- mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
- mark3) Certificate No.: E318391
Vibration resistance according to ≤ 25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
Shock resistance to 100 g / 6 ms / half-sine
DIN EN 60068-2-27 500 g / 1 ms / half-sinus
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 (depending on electrical connection)
to ISO 20653 IP 69K (depending on electrical connection)
Other data
Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pol.
Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole.
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
12 .. 36 V DC for 0 .. 10 V,
5 V DC ± 5 % (ratiometric)
Service life > 10 million cycles, 0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 100 g
E 18.349.1.0/11.13

1)
2)
3)
359
Dimensions: Note:
Electr. conn. male the operating conditions and applications
Deutsch DT 04 described.
3 pole For applications or operating conditions
Ø 26.6 +0.1
3.5
16
Electr. conn. male

Metri-Pack series 150
Electr. conn. male 3 pole
EN175301-803
(DIN 43650) 3 pole + PE Ø 26.6 +0.1
Electr. conn. male
Ø 35.5 Ø 26.6 +0.1 M12x1 - 4 pole
16
18.5
10
36 Max.
2
12
hex.-SW27 G1/4 A
Ø 18.9 -0.2
Ø 29.5 -0.05
10 ±0.13
2.3
17 +0.2
9/16-18UNF2A
hex.-SW27
hex.-SW27 1/4-18NPT Ø 19 ±0.3
O-ring
Ø 29.5 -0.05 11.89 x 1.98 Ø 29.5 -0.05
9.14 ±0.13
2.3
7/16-20UNF2A
hex.-SW27
Ø 14.3 ±0.13
O-ring 8.92 x 1.83
Ø 29.5 -0.05
Order details:
E 18.349.1.0/11.13

The electronic temperature switch HDA 9300 has been specially developed for OEM Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 1000 units per type. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
360
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 810

EDS 810 has been specially Measuring ranges 40; 60; 100; 160; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for use in volume Overload pressures 80; 120; 200; 320; 500; 800; 1000 bar
production machines. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
The highly compact instrument is (Torque value) 7/16-20 UNF 2A (15 Nm)
9/16-18 UNF 2A (20 Nm)
equipped with a very robust pressure each with orifice 0.5 mm
sensor with thin-film strain gauge on a Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
stainless steel membrane. Output data
The transistor switching output is Switch output Either:
available with either N/C or N/O - 1 PNP or 1 NPN transistor switching output
- 2 PNP transistor switching outputs
function. (only in conjunction with electrical
The switching and switch-back connection M12x1, 4 pole)
Switching direction N/C / N/O function
point of the EDS 810 is factory-set (according to customer specification)
according to customer specification Output load ≤ 500 mA per switching output
(not field-adjustable). Switching points according to customer specification
Switch-back points according to customer specification
Various pressure ranges between Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.. 40 bar and 0 .. 600 bar are Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
available. Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms (standard 32 ms);
factory-set according to customer spec.
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS Operating temperature range 1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 Outstanding performance in terms Fluid temperature range 1)
-40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
of temperature effect and EMC mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
 Very compact design mark 2) Certificate No. E318391
 ECE type approval DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 5 .. 2000 Hz
(approved for road vehicles) Shock resistance to 100 g / 6 ms / half sine
Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 (depending on the electrical connection)
to ISO 20653 IP 69 K (depending on the electrical connection)
Other data
Packard Metri Pack series 150, 3 pole
AMP Superseal, 3 pole
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Current consumption 1 PNP max. 0.52 A total/max. 20 mA
with inactive switch output
2 PNP max. 1.02 A total/max. 20 mA
with inactive switch outputs
NPN max. 20 mA total
E 18.350.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 55 g
1)
2)
Dimensions: Note:
Male connection Male connection Male connection applications described.
DIN 72585 Metri-Pack Deutsch DT 04 For applications or operating conditions

3 pole series 1.5
3 pole
Male connection
DIN EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
16 3 pole
male M12x1, 4 pole
hex-SW27
orifice
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
orifice
orifice
Order details:
E 18.350.2/11.13

The electronic pressure switch EDS 810 has been specially developed for OEM Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
For precise specifications, please contact our the Sales Department of HYDAC E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
ELECTRONIC. Internet: www.hydac.com
362
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 710

EDS 710 has been specially Measuring ranges 16; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for use in large volume Overload pressures 32; 200; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
production machines. Burst pressures 200; 500; 500;1000; 2000; 2000 bar
The highly compact unit has a very Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
robust pressure sensor with thin-film Torque value 20 Nm
strain gauge on a stainless steel Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
membrane. Seal: FPM
The EDS 710 is available with Output data
1 transistor switching output (PNP) Switch output 1 transistor switching output
(N/C or N/O)
which can be defined either as N/C
Output load 400 mA
or N/O.
Switching points according to customer specification
Switching and switch-back points
Switch-back points according to customer specification
of the EDS 710 are factory-set Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
according to customer specification Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
(not field-adjustable). Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
Various pressure ranges between Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
0 .. 16 bar and 0 .. 600 bar are ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
available. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms (standard 32 ms);
factory-set according to customer spec.
 1 transistor switch output Operating temperature range1) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
(PNP), either as N/C or N/O Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
 Factory-set according to mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
customer specification Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
(not field-adjustable) DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
 Highly robust sensor cell
 Highly compact design Other data
 Very small temperature error Electrical connection 2) e.g. M12x1 (4 pole)
Flying leads
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 60 g
1)
2)
Other electrical connection options, e.g. cables with different types
of connector, available on request.
E 18.351.2/11.13
363
cable screen and core ends For applications or operating conditions
are twisted & tinned not described, please contact the relevant
hex-SW27
16
hex-SW27
elastomer elastomer
profile seal ring profile seal ring
DIN3869 DIN3869
Order details:
E 18.351.2/11.13

customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 100 pieces per type. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
For precise specifications, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
364
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 410
(Minimum order quantity 50 pieces)

EDS 410 has been specially Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 6; 10; 16; 40; 60;
developed for use in volume 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
production machines, and is based on Overload pressures 3; 8; 15; 20; 32; 80; 120;
the EDS 4000 pressure switch series. 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
Burst pressures 5; 12; 30; 48; 75; 180; 300;
The EDS 410 is available with 1 or 2 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
transistor switching outputs (PNP), Mechanical connection2) G1/4 A DIN 3852
which can be defined as either N/C Torque value 20 Nm
or N/O. Parts in contact with medium Mech. connection: Stainless steel
The switching and reset points of the Sensor cell: Ceramic or stainless steel
EDS 410 are factory-set according Seal: FPM or EPDM
to customer specification (not field- Output data
adjustable). Switch output 1 or 2 PNP transistor switching outputs
As with the EDS 4000 standard (N/C or N/O)
model, the EDS 410 has a ceramic Output load 1.2 A per switching output
measurement cell with thick-film strain Switching points according to customer specification
gauge for measuring relative pressure Switch-back points according to customer specification
in the low pressure range, and a
stainless steel measurement cell with
Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
thin-film strain gauge for measuring in
the high pressure range. ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
Various pressure ranges between Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 8 ms to 2000 ms (standard 32 ms);
0 .. 1 bar and 0 .. 600 bar as well as factory-set according to customer spec.
different electrical and mechanical Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
connection types are available. Environmental conditions
Special features: Fluid temperature range1) -40 .. +100 °C / -25 .. +100 °C
 1 or 2 transistor switching outputs mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
(PNP), either as N/C or N/O Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
 Factory-set according to Shock resistance to ≤ 100 g
customer specification DIN EN 60068-2-29 (1 ms)
(not field-adjustable) Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1 % FS IP 67 ( M12x1, when an IP 67 connector
is used)
 Highly robust sensor cell Other data
 Very small temperature error Electrical connection 2) e.g. EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
 Excellent EMC characteristics M12x1 (4 pole)
Flying lead
 Excellent durability Supply voltage 8 .. 32 V DC
0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.352.2/11.13

1)
2)
Other connection options available on request.
365
DEUTSCH male connection DT04-4P
heat-shrink tubing (sealed with silicon)

connector contact crimped on
16
cable gland PG 9
male electr. conn.

male connection
4p
3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
elastomer profile seal ring DIN3869
hex-SW27
Order details:
E 18.352.2/11.13

customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 50 pieces per type. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
366
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400
ATEX, CSA, IECEx

EDS 4400 with flameproof enclosure and Measuring ranges 6; 16; 40; 60; 100; 250; 400; 600; 1000 bar
triple approval according to ATEX, CSA Overload pressures 15; 32; 80; 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000; 1600 bar
and IECEx ensures the instrument is Burst pressure 100; 200; 200; 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000; 3000 bar
universally suitable for use in potentially Mechanical connection 1) G1/2 A DIN 3852 (40 Nm)
explosive environments around the (Torque value) G1/4 A DIN 3852 (20 Nm)
world. Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
Each device is certified by the three 1.4404; 1.4301
approval organizations and is labelled Seal: FPM
accordingly. Therefore it is no longer Conduit and housing material 1.4404; 1.4435 (316L)
necessary to stock multiple devices with Output data
separate individual approvals. Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
The switching point and switch-back Max. setting ≤ ± 1.0 % FS max.
point, the function of the switching output Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS max.
as N/C or N/O and the switching delay
are permanently set in accordance with ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
the customer's requirements.
Switch output 2) 1 or 2 PNP transistor switch outputs
As with the industrial version of the
Output load max. 1.2 A on 1 switch output version
EDS 4400, those with triple approval max. 1 A each on 2 switch output version
have a field-proven, all-welded stainless
Switch points / hysteresis / N/C or permanently pre-set acc. to customer spec.
steel measurement cell with thin film N/O function
strain gauge without internal seals.
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard
Its main applications are in mining (8 .. 2000 ms pre-set to customer spec.)
and the oil and gas industry, e.g. in
underground vehicles, hydraulic power
units, blow-out preventers (BOPs), drill
drives or valve actuation stations as well Compensated temperature range T5, T130 °C: -25 .. +80 °C
T6, T110 °C: -25 .. +60 °C
as in areas with high dust loads.
Operating temperature range 3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
Protection types and applications: T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
CCSAUS Explosion Proof - Seal Not Required
Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5 Fluid temperature range 3) T5, T130 °C: -40 .. +80 °C / -20 .. +80 °C
Class II Group E, F, G T6, T110 °C: -40 .. +60 °C / -20 .. +60 °C
Class III mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Type 4 EN 60079-0 / 1 / 31
ATEX Flame Proof Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
I M2 Ex d I Mb Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (Vented Gauge)
II 2G Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb to ISO 20653 IP 69K (Sealed Gauge)
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db Other data
IECEx Flame Proof Voltage supply 12 .. 30 V DC
Current consumption ~ 25 mA (plus switching current)
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T110 .. 130 °C Db 0 .. 100 % FS
Special features: Weight ~ 300 g
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.0 % FS typ. Note: Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage, overvoltage, override and and short circuit
 Certificates: protection are provided.
ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100 X 1)
Other mechanical connection options available on request
CSA MC 224264 2)
Other output signals available on request
IECEx KEM 10.0053X 3)
 Robust design
E 18.388.1/11.13

367
Pin connections are configured according Approvals CCSAUS: Explosion Proof - Seal not required
to customer specification. ATEX: Flame Proof
IECEx: Flame Proof
Conduit (single cores) Certificate ATEX KEMA 10ATEX100X
CSA MC 224264
IECEx KEM 10.0053X
Protection types Class I Group A, B, C, D, T6, T5
Class III
Type 4
Conduit (flying leads) ATEX:

I M2 Ex d I Mb
IECEx:
Ex d I Mb
Ex d IIC T6, T5 Gb
16 Order details:
The electronic pressure switch EDS 4400 with triple approval has been specially
developed for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of
50 units per type. For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of
HYDAC ELECTRONIC.
Dimensions:
Venting Venting
hex-
hex-SW27 SW27
hex-SW27
hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
DIN3869
Note:

E 18.388.1/11.13
Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken *) optional, depending on gauge type "Sealed Gauge" / "Vented Gauge"
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
368
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4400

The pressure switch EDS 4400 in Input data
ATEX version, has been specially Measuring ranges 60; 100; 250; 400; 600 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 120; 200; 500; 800; 1000 bar
explosive atmospheres, and is based Burst pressures 300; 500; 1000; 2000; 2000 bar
on the EDS 4000 series. Mechanical connection G1/4 A DIN 3852
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch-back Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel: 1.4542; 1.4571; 1.4435;
point, the function of the switching 1.4404; 1.4301
outputs as N/C or N/O and the Seal: FPM
Output data
switching delay are factory-set Switch output 1 x PNP N/C or N/O
according to customer requirement Output load during operation: Imax ≤ 34 mA
(not field-adjustable). Switching point Factory-set acc. to customer specification
As with the industry model, the Switch-back point Factory-set acc. to customer specification
EDS 4400 in ATEX version has a Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
stainless steel measurement cell with Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
thin-film strain gauge for measuring Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS at 25 °C
relative pressure in the high pressure ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
range. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard
With approval for the following (8 .. 2000 ms factory-set to customer spec.)
Protection types and applications: Environmental conditions
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100°C EN 61241-0 / 11
EN 50303
and temperature class. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
IP 67 (M12x1 male, when an
Versions for other Protection types IP 67 connector is used)
and applications are available upon Relevant data for Ex applications
request. I M1 II 1 D
II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Special features: Compensated temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
 Switching point and switch-back T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
point factory-set according to T100: -20 .. +70 °C
Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
customer specification T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
(not field-adjustable) T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1% FS Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
T5, T4: +70 °C
 Certificates: Max. input current 100 mA 93 mA
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X Max. input power 0.7 W 0.65 W
Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
 Various types of electrical Max. internal inductance 0 mH 0 mH
connection Insulation voltage 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
1)
 Very small temperature error protection EN 61000-6-2

 Excellent EMC characteristics Telematic Ex STOCK: MTL 7087
E 18.353.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
1)
Pin connections are configured Protection I M1 Ex ia I II 1G Ex ia IIC II 2G Ex ia IIC II 1D Ex iaD 20
according to customer specification. Type T4, T5, T6 II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T100 °C
T4, T5, T6
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM DEKRA EXAM
E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
Categories safe ia with For use in Zone 0 For use in Zone For use in Zone
barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
M12x1
Zone 0 Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
Instruments for other Protection types and applications are available upon request.
16 Please contact our technical sales department for more information.
Order details:
The electronic pressure switch EDS 4400 in ATEX version has been specially developed
Safety instructions: for OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 50 pieces per type.
For exact specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC ELECTRONIC.
 The switching output
draws the switching energy
Accessories:
from the power supply to the
Appropriate accessories, such as electrical connectors can be found in the Accessories
pressure switch. No additional brochure.
energy is introduced into
the electrical circuit from the
switching output.
 Dual Zener barriers specified
and approved in the technical
data must be used to connect
the pressure switch. These have
a reverse polarity diode to
decouple the signal.
The signal path may only be Dimensions:
passively loaded.
 Ensure that measured
fluids in contact with the
pressure switch are
compatible with the materials
used.
profile seal ring
male electr. conn.

EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
Note:
For applications or operating conditions hex-SW27
elastomer
profile seal ring
E 18.353.2/11.13
HYDAC electronic GmbH DIN3869

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
370
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4300

ATEX version, has been specially Measuring ranges 1; 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 40 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 3; 8, 12; 20; 32; 50; 80; 120 bar
explosive atmospheres, and is based Burst pressures 5; 12; 18; 30; 48; 75; 120; 180 bar
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch-back Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
point, the function of the switching Mech. connection: 1.4301
outputs as N/C or N/O and the Seal: FPM / EPDM
switching delay are factory-set Output data
according to customer requirement Switch output 1 x PNP N/C or N/O
(not field-adjustable). Switching point factory-set to customer specification
As with the industry model, the Switch-back point factory-set to customer specification
EDS 4300 in ATEX version has a Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
ceramic measurement cell with thick- Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
film strain gauge for measuring relative Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS at 25 °C
pressure in the low pressure range. Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
With approval for the following Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard;
Protection types and applications: (8 .. 2000 ms factory-set to customer spec.)
I M1 Ex ia I Long-term drift ≤ ± 0.3 % FS typ. / year
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 Environmental conditions
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Fluid temperature range -20 .. +60 °C / +70 °C / +85 °C
II 2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100°C EN 60079-0 / 11 / 26
almost all requirements are covered EN 61241-0 / 11
regarding ignition group, error class EN 50303
and temperature class. Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Versions for other Protection types Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
and applications are available upon IP 67 (M12x1 male, when an
request. IP 67 connector is used)
I M1 II 1 D
II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Special features: Supply voltage 14 .. 28 V DC
 Switching output factory-set Compensated temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
(not field-adjustable) T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1% FS T100: -20 .. +70 °C
Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
 Certificates: T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X T100: -20 .. +70 °C
 Various types of electrical Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
T5, T4: +70 °C
connection Max. input current 100 mA 93 mA
Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
Other data
E 18.354.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range 371
1)
500 V AC on request
T4, T5, T6
E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
M12x1
Zone 0 Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
Order details:
Accessories:
pressure switch. No additional
energy is introduced into the
electrical circuit from the
switching output.
the pressure switch. These
have a reverse polarity diode to
passively loaded.
 Ensure that measured
pressure switch are
used.
profile seal ring
male connection male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
E 18.354.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
372
Electronic
Pressure Switch
EDS 4100

ATEX version, has been specially Measuring ranges 1; 2.5 bar
developed for use in potentially Overload pressures 3; 8 bar
explosive atmospheres, and is based Burst pressures 5; 12 bar
Torque value 20 Nm
The switching point and switch-back Parts in contact with medium Sensor: Ceramic
point, the function of the switching Mech. connection: 1.4301
outputs as N/C or N/O and the Seal: FPM / EPDM
switching delay are factory-set Output data
according to customer requirement Switch output 1 x PNP N/C or N/O
(not field-adjustable). Switching point factory-set to customer specification
As with the industry model, the Switch-back point factory-set to customer specification
EDS 4100 in ATEX version has Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 0.5 % FS typ.
a ceramic measurement cell with Max. setting ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
thick-film strain gauge for measuring Repeatability ≤ ± 0.1 % FS at 25 °C
absolute pressure in the low pressure Temperature drift ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. zero point
range. ≤ ± 0.03 % FS / °C max. range
Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard
With approval for the following (8 .. 2000 ms factory-set to customer spec.)
I M1 Ex ia I Environmental conditions
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6 Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
Fluid temperature range -20 .. +60 °C / +70 °C / +85 °C
II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4, T5, T6
mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
II 1 D Ex iaD 20 T100 °C EN 61241-0 / 11
almost all requirements are covered EN 50303
regarding ignition group, error class Vibration resistance to ≤ 20 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
and temperature class. Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 65 (male to EN175301-803 (DIN 43650))
Versions for other Protection types IP 67 (M12x1 male, when an
and applications are available on IP 67 connector is used)
request. Relevant data for Ex applications
I M1 II 1 D
II 1G, 1/2G, 2G
Special features: Compensated temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
 Switching output factory-set T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
(not field-adjustable) T100: -25 .. +70 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1% FS Operating temperature range T6: -20 .. +60 °C
T5, T4: -20 .. +70 °C
 Certificates: T100: -20 .. +70 °C
DEKRA EXAM BVS 07 ATEX E 041 X Max. ambient temperature Ta T6: +60 °C T100: +70 °C
T5, T4: +70 °C
 Various types of electrical Max. input current 100 mA 93 mA
connection Max. input power 0.7 W 0.65 W
 Very small temperature error Max. internal capacitance 33 nF 33 nF
 Excellent EMC characteristics Insulation voltage 1) 50 V AC, with integrated overvoltage
Other data
E 18.355.2/11.13

0 .. 100 % FS
Weight ~ 150 g
FS (Full Scale) = relative to the full measuring range 373
1)
500 V AC on request
T4, T5, T6
E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X E 041 X
barrier 1, 2 20, 21, 22
M12x1
Zone 0 Zone 20
T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T4, T5: Ta = 70 °C T100: Ta = 70 °C
T6: Ta = 60 °C T6: Ta = 60 °C
Instruments for other protection types and applications are available on request.
Order details:
Accessories:
pressure switch. No additional in the Accessories brochure.
energy is introduced into the
electrical circuit through the
switching output.
the pressure switch. These
have a reverse polarity diode to
passively loaded.
 Ensure that the measured
pressure switch are
used.
profile
seal ring
male connection male electr. conn.

3p+PE EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) 4 pole
Note:
elastomer
profile seal ring
E 18.355.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
374
Electronic
HTT 8000

The HTT 8000 series of temperature Input data
transmitters was specifically Measuring principle Silicon semiconductor device
developed for OEM applications e.g. Measuring range 1) -25 .. +125 °C
in mobile applications. It is based on Probe length 16 mm
a silicon semiconductor device with Pressure resistance 600 bar
corresponding evaluation electronics. Mechanical connection 2) G1/4 A DIN 3852
All parts in contact with the medium (Torque value) (20 Nm)
are in stainless steel, and are welded Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
Seal: FPM
together.
Output data
For integration into modern controls, Output signal e.g.: 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, 1 .. 6 V, 0 .. 10 V,
standard analogue output signals are ratiometric: 0.5 .. 4.5 V for UB = 5 V DC
available, e.g. 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 5 V, (10 .. 90 % UB ± 5 %), etc.
1 .. 6 V or 0 .. 10 V. Accuracy (at room temperature) ≤ ± 1.0 % FS typ.
Ratiometric output signals are also ≤ ± 2.0 % FS max.
available. Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C
Rise time to DIN EN 60751 t50: ~ 4 s
For the electrical connection, various t90: ~ 8 s
built-in connections are available. Environmental conditions
The pressure resistance up to Ambient temperature range 3) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
600 bar and excellent EMC Storage temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
characteristics make the HTT 8000 Fluid temperature range 3) -40 .. +125 °C / -25 .. +125 °C
ideal for use in harsh conditions. mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
-mark 4) Certificate No. E318391
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Special features: Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.5 % FS typ. Other data
 Small, compact design Electrical connection M12x1, 4 pole
Excellent EMC characteristics AMP DIN 72585 code 1, 3 pole
Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole
Long-term stability Deutsch DT 04, 3 pole
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole. + PE
12 .. 30 V DC for 0 .. 10 V,
5 V DC ± 5 % (ratiometric)
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
Weight ~ 145 g
override, short circuit protection are provided.
1)
E 18.389.1/11.13
2)
3)
4)
375
Dimensions: Note:
Male connection Male connection Male connection For applications and operating conditions
DIN 72585 Metri-Pack series 150 DT04 3 pole not described, please contact the relevant
3 pole 3 pole

Junior Power Timer Superseal series 1.5
3 pole 3 pole
Male connection
16 EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE
Male connection
M12x1 - 4 pole
hex-SW27
Order details:
E 18.389.1/11.13

The electronic temperature transmitter HTT 8000 has been specially developed for Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
OEM customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 500 units per type. Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
376
Electronic
Temperature Switch
HTS 8000

The temperature switch series Input data
HTS 8000 has been specifically Measuring principle Silicon semiconductor device
developed for the OEM market, e.g. Measuring range1) -25 .. +125 °C
in mobile applications. It is based on Probe length 16 mm
a silicon semiconductor device with Pressure resistance 600 bar
Mechanical connection2) G1/4 A DIN 3852
corresponding evaluation electronics. (Torque value) (20 Nm)
All parts in contact with the medium Parts in contact with medium Mech. conn.: Stainless steel
are in stainless steel, and are welded Seal: FPM
together. Output data
Output signal Either
The transistor switching output is - 1 PNP transistor switching output
available with either a N/C or a N/O - 2 PNP transistor switching outputs
(only in conjunction with electr. conn.
function. M12x1, 4 pole)
The switching and switch-back Switching direction N/C / N/O function
point of the HTS 8000 is factory-set (according to customer specification)
according to customer specification. Output load ≤ 500 mA per switching output
Switching points / switch-back points according to customer specification
For the electrical connection, various Accuracy (at room temperature) ≤ ± 1.0 % FS typ.
built-in connections are available. ≤ ± 2.0 % FS max.
With a pressure resistance of Temperature drift (environment) ≤ ± 0.02 % FS / °C
600 bar and excellent EMC Accuracy to DIN 16086, ≤ ± 3.0 % FS max.
Max. setting ≤ ± 1.5 % FS typ.
characteristics, the HTS 8000 is ideal Repeatability (at 25 °C) ≤ ± 1 % FS max.
for use in harsh conditions. Rising switch point and falling switch point delay 32 ms standard
(8 .. 2000 ms pre-set to customer spec.)
Ambient temperature range3) -40 .. +85 °C / -25 .. +85 °C
 Accuracy ≤ ± 1.5 % FS typ. mark4) Certificate No. E318391
 Small, compact design DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Excellent EMC characteristics Shock resistance to 100 g / 6 ms / half sine
Long-term stability Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
Other data
Packard Metri Pack Series 150, 3 pole
Flying lead, 1 m cable length
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650), 3 pole + PE
9.3 UL 61010; Class 2;
UL 1310/1585; LPS UL 60950
≤ 0.52 A with 1 switching output
≤ 1.02 A with 2 switching outputs
Weight ~ 145 g
E 18.390.1/11.13

1)
2)
3)
4)
377
Dimensions: Note:
Male connection Male connection Male connection For applications and operating conditions
DIN 72585 Metri-Pack series 150 DT04 3 pole not described, please contact the relevant
3 pole 3 pole technical department.

Junior Power Timer Superseal series 1.5
3 pole 3 pole
Male connection
16 EN175301-803 (DIN 43650)
3 pole + PE
Male connection
M12x1 - 4 pole
hex-SW27
Ø 6.7
Order details:
E 18.390.1/11.13

The electronic temperature switch HTS 8000 has been specially developed for OEM Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
customers and is available for minimum order quantities of 500 units per type. Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
For a precise specification, please contact the Sales Department of HYDAC Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
ELECTRONIC. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
378
Electronic
Position Switch
HLS 100
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
PL d
SIL 2

The position switch series HLS 100 Input data
has been specifically developed to Switching range 1) ± 3 .. ± 9 mm
detect the end position of safety- Switching distance magnet – sensor 1) 0 .. 11 mm
related devices on mobile machinery. Lateral offset magnet – sensor 1) ± 6 mm
Steel plate thickness Magnet: min. 5 mm
The position switches are designed Sensor: 6 .. 8 mm
for continuous use in safety circuits/ Output data
safety functions as part of the Type PWM 50 Hz ± 3 % (Push-Pull)
functional safety of machines up Duty cycle of the output signal OFF 26 ± 1 %
to SIL 2 (IEC 61508) or PL d (ISO (magnet outside the switching range)
13849). Duty cycle of the output signal ON 74 ± 1 %
(magnet within the switching range)
The HLS 100 consists of two parts, Output current consumption
the encoder magnet and the sensor High level 60 mA min. / 150 mA max.
unit. Low level 30 mA min. / 110 mA max.
Output voltage
Using two Hall sensors integrated High level > +UB – 1.2 V at I = 10 mA
into the sensor unit, the sensor Low level < GND + 0.2 V at I = 10 mA
detects the defined position (end Response times after activation 0.5 .. 1.5 s
position) of the magnet and transmits Output signal response time < 100 ms
the switching condition "ON" if this Internal diagnostic interval ≤ 500 ms typ. (hardware)
≤ 1 s (memory modules)
position is detected, or otherwise the Environmental conditions
switching condition "OFF". Nominal temperature range -30 .. +85 °C
Switching conditions are output as (function)
permanent PWM signals. Operating temperature range -40 .. +100 °C
(failsafe)
During stable normal operation, the Storage temperature range -60 .. +110°C
position switch cyclically performs mark EN 61000-6-1 / 2 / 3 / 4
internal diagnostic steps, which Functional safety SIL 2 to EN 61508
identify systematic and random PL d to ISO 13849
errors. Vibration resistance to 25 g
DIN EN 60068-2-6 at 10 .. 500 Hz
Errors which occur are therefore Shock resistance to 50 g (half sine)
detected immediately. The output DIN EN 60068-2-29 (6 ms)
signal is then deactivated completely Protection class to IEC 60529 IP 67
and the sensor is restarted. Other data
Electrical connection 2) Male ITT Canon Sure Seal,
3 pole
Current consumption < 10 mA (inactive output)
Special features: Life expectancy 10 years
 Compact design Weight Sensor ~ 75 g
Magnet ~ 25 g
 Robust housing suitable for mobile Safety-related data
applications Performance level
 High operating temperature range Based on DIN EN ISO 13849-1: 2008
PL d
 PWM output Architecture Category 2
 IP 67 male connector Safety Integrity Level
Based on DIN EN 61508: 2001 1oo1 - B
 SIL 2 / PL d certification
SIL 2
E 18.391.1/11.13
override, short circuit protection are provided.

1)
All values apply to installation in magnetic steel plate of the required material thickness.
If installed in thicker steel plate or other materials, the entire system must be tested
thoroughly.
2)
Other connectors available on request
379
Dimensions: Order details:
The electronic positioning switch
HLS 100 has been especially developed
for OEM customers and is available for
minimum order quantities of 100 units per
type.
For a precise specification, please
contact the Sales Department of HYDAC
ELECTRONIC.
Identification:
white point to
IO-test
16
Switching ranges:
Switching range:
n.d.* = condition not

defined
Switching distance:
Note:
Lateral offset: For applications and operating conditions
E 18.391.1/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
380
Special Products
Position Sensors
and Position Switches
The position sensors and switches have been developed for short distance monitoring
and can be used on the one hand for monitoring valve settings and
on the other as part of a control. Based on different measuring techniques, HYDAC
provides different variants for a diverse range of applications.
Position switch IES 2010 / 2015 / 2020

The position switch for monitoring valve settings (end or centre position)
is primarily used in stationary applications such as:
 Hydraulic presses 16
 Plastics machines
 Machine tools
Special features:
 Inductive measurement (LVDT)
 Various stroke sizes
 Output: 2 switching outputs with change-over function
 Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole)
Position sensor IWE 40

The IWE 40 position sensors for short distance detection are primarily used
in stationary applications such as:
 Hydraulic presses
 Plastics machines
 Machine tools
Special features:
 Inductive measurement (LVDT)
 Different measuring ranges (up to max. ±7 mm)
 Output: Analogue 4 .. 20 mA
 Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole)
Functional Safety
Position switch HLS 200 PL d
with increased functional safety
The position switch HLS 200 is used for reliable detection of valve centre positions.
They are used both in mobile and in stationary applications.
Special features:
 PL d certification
 Measuring technique: IR light barriers
 Output: 2 switching outputs with change-over function
 Electrical connection: M12x1 (4 pole); Deutsch DT 04 (4 pole)
Order details: Note:

The position sensors and position The information in this brochure relates to
switches are OEM products which have the operating conditions and
E 18.611.0/11.13
been especially developed for volume applications described. HYDAC ELECTrONIC GMBH
production customers. For applications and operating conditions Hauptstraße 27, D-66128 Saarbrücken
Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
For a precise specification, please not described, please contact the relevant Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
contact the Sales Department of HYDAC technical department. E-mail: electronic@hydac.com
ELECTRONIC. Subject to technical modifications. Internet: www.hydac.com
381
Accessories
Accessories to suit every sensor!

Whether it's electrical connectors, mechanical adapters or
the instrument mounting clamps, the wide range of products from HYDAC
offers solutions for all applications.
Saving time on installation and commissioning.

Electrical Accessories Page
- for electrical connection type "4" (Binder, Series 714 M18) 383
- for electrical connection type "5" (EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / 383
ISO 4400)
- for electrical connection type "6" (M12x1, 4 pole) 384
- for electrical connection type "7" (DIN 43561) 385
- for electrical connection type "8" (M12x1, 5 pole) 385
- for electrical connection type "P" (M12x1, 8 pole) 387
Mechanical Accessories 389

- Connection adapters for pressure sensors 389
- Mounting accessories for EDS 8000, HDA 8000, EDS 810 390
- Mounting accessories for EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000, 391
ENS 3000, HNS 3000
- Mounting accessories for EDS 300, ETS 300 392
- Mounting accessories for EDS 1700, ETS 1700 393
- Mounting accessories for EDS 601 393
- Tank mounting sleeve for ETS 3000 394
- Connection blocks for ENS 3000 394
- Connection blocks for HLB 1300 395
- Connection blocks for AS 1000, AS 3000 395
17
Accessories for distance and position sensors 397
- Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000 397
- Electrical accessories HLT 2000 399
Accessories for Service Instruments 401

- Accessories for HMG 30X0 401
- Accessories for HMG 500/510 403
E 180.000.2 /11.13
382
Electrical
Accessories
Female Connectors for Sensors
With electrical connection type "4":

(Male Binder series 714 M18)
ZBE 02
Female connector
Binder Series 714 M18
4 pole, straight
Cable diameter: 6.5 .. 8 mm
Part No.: 609479
ZBE 03
Female connector
Binder Series 714 M18
17
4 pole, right-angle
Part No.: 609480

(Male EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400)
ZBE 01
Female connector
EN175301-803 (DIN 43650) / ISO 4400
3 pole + PE, right-angle
Part No.: 905701
E 18.362.2/11.13
profile seal ring
383
(Male M12x1, 4 pole)
ZBE 06
Female connector M12x1
4 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 2.5 .. 6.5 mm
Part No.: 6006788
ZBE 06-02
4 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
Part No.: 6006790
ZBE 06-05
4 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
Part No.: 6006789
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
ZBE 06S-03
17 4-pole, straight
with 3 m cable, shielded
Part No.: 6098243
ZBE 06S-05
4-pole, straight
Part No.: 6143284
ZBE 06S-05
4 pole, right-angle
Part No.: 6044891
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
E 18.362.2/11.13
384
(Male DIN 43651)
ZBE 10
Female connector DIN 43651
6 pole + PE, right-angle
Cable diameter: 7 .. 9 mm
Part No.: 654527

ZBE 08
5 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 2.5 .. 6.5 mm
Part No.: 6006786
ZBE 08-02 17
5 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
Part No.: 6006792
ZBE 08-05
5 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
Part No.: 6006791
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
Pin 5: grey
E 18.362.2/11.13
385
ZBE 08S-02
5 pole, right-angle
Part No.: 6019455
ZBE 08S-05
5 pole, right-angle
Part No.: 6019456
ZBE 08S-10
5 pole, right-angle
Part No.: 6023102
Colour code:
Pin 1: brown
Pin 2: white
Pin 3: blue
Pin 4: black
Pin 5: grey
ZBE 30-02
Connection cable M12x1
plug/socket
5 pole, 2 m
Part No.: 6040851 or
ZBE 30-05
Connection cable M12x1
plug/socket male
type label
female
5 pole, 5 m M12x1 5 pole M12x1 5 pole
Part No.: 6040852
17
E 18.362.2/11.13
386
With electrical connection type "P":
ZBE 0P
8 pole, right-angle
Cable diameter: 4 .. 8 mm
Part No.: 6055444
ZBE 0P-02
8 pole, right-angle
with 2 m cable
Part No.: 6052697
ZBE 0P-05
8 pole, right-angle
with 5 m cable
Part No.: 6052698
Colour code:
Pin 1: white
Pin 2: brown
Pin 3: green
Pin 4: yellow
Pin 5: grey
Pin 6: pink
Pin 7: blue
Pin 8: red
17
E 18.362.2/11.13
387
17
Note:
E 18.362.2/11.13

388
Mechanical
Accessories
Connection accessories for pressure sensors

ZBM 01
Adapter female thread G1/4 –
male thread G1/2 B,
DIN EN 837-1 hex. SW27
Part No.: 257276
flat seal ring

6.2x17.5x2.0
ZBM 02
Adapter female thread G1/4 –
male thread G1/2 A,
DIN 3852
Part No.: 257277 hex. SW27
O-ring
20.35x1.78
-NBR
17
ZBM 13
Adapter female thread G1/4 -
male thread G1/4 A,
with orifice 0.5 mm
elastomer
seal ring
DIN3869
orifice
ZBM 14
Adapter female thread G1/4 -
male thread G1/4 (rotating)
elastomer
seal ring
DIN3869
E 18.363.2/11.13
389
Mounting accessories, device-specific
EDS 8000, HDA 8000; EDS 810
ZBM 8000
Clamp for wall-mounting
- screw-type fitting -
hex. socket cap
(Material of lower section: screw. ISO4762
TPE Santoprene 10187;

Material of top section:
Steel strip DIN 95381-1.4571)
Part No.: 3546755
ZBM 8100
- weld-type fitting -
(Material of welding bridge: hex. socket cap
screw. ISO4762
QSTE340TM, zinc coating
EN 12329 FE/ZN8/B;
Material of lower section:
Part No.: 3546757
17
E 18.363.2/11.13
390
EDS 3000, ETS 3000, AS 3000, ENS 3000 and HNS 3000
ZBM 3000
(Material of lower section:
hex. socket cap
screw. ISO4762
Part No.: 3184630
ZBM 3100
(Material of welding bridge:
QSTE340TM, zinc coating
EN 12329 FE/ZN8/B;
Material of lower section: hex. socket cap
TPE Santoprene 10187; screw. ISO4762

Part No.: 3184632
17
ZBM 3200
Splash guard
(Material:
Elastollan S60 A15 SPF 000)
Part No.: 3201919
E 18.363.2/11.13
391
EDS 300, ETS 300
ZBM 300
(Material polypropylene)
Part No.: 906385
ZBM 310
(Material polypropylene,
aluminium AlSi12, steel)
Part No.: 6011511
17
hex. socket cap screw

ISO4762
E 18.363.2/11.13
392
EDS 1700, ETS 1700
Vibration mounts
Part No.: 257492

EDS 601
Mounting kit EDS 601
- for front panel mounting-
(St4K32 DIN 1544)
Part No.: 905404
17
E 18.363.2/11.13
393
Tank mounting sleeve , device-specific
ETS 3000 (100 mm)
Protective sleeve for
tank-mounting
(Material CuZn39Pb3 - DIN 1763, hex-SW27
electro-nickel-plated)
Part No.: 909640
Connection accessories, device-specific

ENS 3000
ZBM 19 compression nut (SW36)
Straight bulkhead union ISO 8434 ISO8434-1-N-L22-St
Part No.: 908738

Note: Not suitable for
ENS with 250 mm probe length lock nut SW41
approx.
17 seal ring Cu
DIN7603-A 30x36
SW36
ZBM 20
Straight male stud coupling to
ISO 8434 compression nut (SW36)
ISO8434-1-N-L22-St
Part No.: 908739
SW32
E 18.363.2/11.13
394
Mounting block, device-specific
HLB 1300
ZBM 21 (Flow)
Mounting block for HLB 1300
for flow rates > 2 l/min
Part No.: 3244260
ZBM 23 (Low Flow)

Mounting block for HLB 1300
for flow rates from 0.5 .. 10 l/min
Part No.: 3299331
17
Connection accessories, device-specific
AS 1000, AS 3000
ZBM 22
Mounting block for AquaSensor
AS 1000 and AS 3000
Part No.: 3248511
E 18.363.2/11.13
395
17
Note:
E 18.363.2/11.13

396
Accessories
Sensors for Distance
and Position
Magnets for HLT 1000, HLT 2000, HNT 1000

ZBL Mr17
Position magnet for HLT 1000 and
HLT 2100
Part No.: 6119372
ZBL Mr22
HLT 2100
Part No.: 6084453
17
ZBL Mr33
HLT 2100
Part No.: 6084207 E 18.603.0/11.13
397
ZBL MV63
Position magnet for
HLT 1000, HLT 2100 and
HLT 2500-L2
Part No.: 6084454
ZBL MS35-39
Measuring slide for
HLT 2500-L2
Part No.: 6105654
17
ZBL MU38-20
Position magnet for
HLT 1000, HLT 2100 and
HLT 2500-L2
Part No.: 6084455
E 18.603.0/11.13
398
ZBL MF38-18
Position magnet for
HLT 2500-F1
Part No.: 6084456
ZBL MF55-20
Position magnet for
HLT 2500-F1
Part No.: 6084457
ZBL Mounting set

Mounting set for HLT 2500 17
Part No.: 6105653
Electrical accessories HLT 2000

Electrical Signal HYDAC description Part
connection output number
M06 Analogue Cable connector C091, 6 pole, straight 654653
M08 Analogue Cable connector C091, 8 pole, straight 6123255
C61 CAN / ZBE 08 cable connector M12x1, 5 pole, 6006786
DVN right-angle
S01 SSI Cable connector M23, 12 pole, straight 6120462
E 18.603.0/11.13
S01 SSI Cable connector M23, 12 pole, right- 6120463

angle
399
17
Note:
the operating conditions and HYDAC electronic GmbH
E 18.603.0/11.13

400
Accessories for Service
Instruments
Aluminium case
for HMG 30X0 and accessories
Part No.: 6042959
Bag with carrying strap

for HMG 30X0
Part No.: 909795
Power supply unit

for HMG 30X0, Spare Part
Part No.: 6054296
17
ZBE 31
Car charger for HMG 30X0
Part No.: 909739
ZBE 34
Adapter for HMG 30X0 for connecting
HYDAC transmitters
(4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor)
Male M12x1 to
(electrical connection type "4")
Part No.: 3236597
ZBE 35
HYDAC transmitters
(4 .. 20 mA, 2 conductor)
Male M12x1 to
E 18.364.2/11.13
Male EN175301-803
(DIN 43650)
(electrical connection type "5")
Part No.: 3236601
401
ZBE 36
an AquaSensor AS 1000
Part No.: 909737
ZBE 38
Y adapter (black) for HMG 30X0 to
double the number of input sockets
Part No.: 3224436
ZBE 41
Y adapter (yellow) for HMG 30X0
for connecting a
ContaminationSensor CS 1000
Part No.: 910000
ZBE 3010
CAN adapter for HMG 3010
for connecting a CAN-Bus
Part No.: 921238
17 Connection cable
for HMG 30X0 - PC (USB),
Spare Part
Part No.: 6040585
Hydraulic adapter kit

for HMG
2 pieces each
- Adapter hose DN 2 -1620 / 1620
(400 mm and 1000 mm)
- Pressure gauge conn. 1620 / G1/4
- Adapter 1650 / 1620
- Bulkhead union 1620 / 1620
Part No.: 903083
HDS 1000 RPM probe

for HMG 30X0
including reflective foil set
Part No.: 909436
HDS 1000 reflective foil set
E 18.364.2/11.13
Spare Part, Quantity: 25

Part No.: 904812
402
UVM 30X0
Module for HMG 30X0 for connecting
different input signals
Part No.: 909752
Plastic case
for HMG 500/510 and accessories
Part No.: 6043006
Power supply (230 V AC)

for HMG 500/510
Part No.: 6043562
Connection cable
for HMG 510 - PC (USB),
Spare Part
Part No.: 6049553
17
ZBE 30-02 (5 pole)

Connection cable M12x1, 2 m
male/female
Part No.: 6040851
ZBE 30-05 (5 pole)
Connection cable M12x1, 5 m
male/female
Part No.: 6040852
Note:
SSH 1000 The information in this brochure relates to
Sensor simulator to simulate described.
2 HSI sensors, ideal for training For applications or operating conditions
purposes not described, please contact the relevant
Part No.: 909414 technical department.
E 18.364.2/11.13

Telephone +49 (0)6897 509-01
Fax +49 (0)6897 509-1726
403
404
E 180.000.2/11.13
Notes:
Notes:
E 180.000.2/11.13
405
406
E 180.000.2/11.13
Notes:
ÖSTERREICH HYDAC-Büro München MEXICO KOREA
rOK
MEX
(Slovenia, Croatia, Bosnia- Herzegovina, Danziger Str. 21 HYDAC International SA de CV HYDAC Duwon Co. 08
A
Serbia and Montenegro, Macedonia) D-82194 Gröbenzell Pirul, 212 4th floor Wonwook Bldg.
HYDAC Hydraulik Ges. m.b.H. Tel.: 0 81 42 / 6 52 77-0 54090 Los Reyes Ixtacala 768-12 Bangbae, Seocho
Industriestr. 3 Fax: 0 81 42 / 6 52 77-22 Tlalnepantla (Edo. de Mexico) rOK-Seoul 137-069
A-4066 Pasching HYDAC-Büro Nürnberg MEXICO Tel.: (0082) 2/591 09 31
Tel.: (0043) 72 29 / 6 18 11-0 Bauhofstraße 4 Tel.: (0052) 555 / 565 85 11 Fax: (0082) 2/591 09 32
Fax: (0043) 72 29 / 6 18 11-35 D-90571 Schwaig Fax: (0052) 555 / 390 23 34 E-mail: johnkim@hydackorea.co.kr
E-mail: info@hydac.at Tel.: 09 11 / 24 46 43-0 NORGE ROMANIA
rOM
AUSTRALIA Fax: 09 11 / 24 46 43-4260 HYDAC AS HYDAC SRL
N
AUS
HYDAC Pty. Ltd. DENMARK Postboks 657 Str. Vanatori Nr. 5 B

111 Dohertys Road, N-1401 SKI rO-100576 Ploiesti
DK
HYDAC A/S
Altona North. Havretoften 5 Tel.: (0047) 64 85 86 00 Tel.: (0040) 244 57 57 78
AUS-Vic. 3025 DK-5550 Langeskov Fax: (0047) 64 85 86 01 Fax: (0040) 244 57 57 79
postal address: Tel.: (0045) 702 702 99 E-mail: firmapost@hydac.no E-Mail: hydac@hydac.ro
P.O. Box 224, Altona North. Fax: (0045) 63 13 25 40 NETHERLANDS SVERIGE
AUS-Vic. 3025
NL
E-Mail: hydac@hydac.dk HYDAC B.V. HYDAC Fluidteknik AB
S
Tel.: (0061) 3 / 92 72 89 00 Vossenbeemd 109 Domnarvsgatan 29
Fax: (0061) 3 / 98 360 80 70 ESPAÑA
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY SL NL-5705 CL Helmond S-16308 Spånga
E
E-mail: info@hydac.com.au Tel.: (0031) 492 / 597470 Tel.: (0046) 8 / 4452970
Capcir 5, P.O. Box 162
BELGIQUE E-08211 Castellar del Valles Fax: (0031) 492 / 597480 Fax: (0046) 8 / 4452990
HYDAC sprl E-mail: info@hydac.nl Internet: www.hydac.se
B
Tel.: (0034) 93 / 747 36 09

Overhaemlaan 33 Fax: (0034) 93 / 715 95 42 NEW ZEALAND E-mail: hydac@hydac.se
B-3700 Tongeren
NZ
HYDAC Ltd. SINGAPORE
SGP
Tel.: (0032) 12 260 400 EGYPT
Unit 14, 13 Highbrook Drive Hydac Technology Pte Ltd.
ET
Fax: (0032) 12 260 409 Yasser Fahmy Hydraulic Eng.
65-66-68 Saudi Building, Kobba East Tamaki 2A Second Chin Bee Road
BULGARIA P.O. Box 6550 Sawah 11813 NZ-Auckland Singapore 618781
BG
HYDAC EOOD ET-Cairo Tel.: (0064) 9271 4120 Tel.: (0065) 6741 7458
Business Center Iskar Yug Tel.: (0020) 2 / 45 20 192, 45 30 922 Fax: (0064) 9271 4124 Fax: (0065) 6741 0434
München-Str. 14 45 30 923, 45 01 970 PORTUGAL SLOVAKIA
BG-1528 Sofia
SK
Fax: (0020) 2 /45 30 638 Gustavo Cudell Lda. HYDAC, s.r.o.
P
Tel.: (00359) 2 970 6000, E-Mail: yasserf@yf-hydraulic.eg Rua Eng. Ferreira Dias, 954 Schmidtova 14
(00359) 2 970 6060 P-4149-008 Porto SK-03601 Martin
Fax: (00359) 2 970 6075 FRANCE
HYDAC S.à.r.l. Tel.: (00351) 22 / 6158000 Tel.: (00421)- 43-4135893, 4237394
F
E-mail: office@hydac.bg Fax: (00351) 22 / 6158011 4220875

Internet: www.hydac.bg Technopôle Forbach Sud
BP 30260 Internet: www.cudell.pt Fax: (00421)-43-4220874
BELARUS E-Mail: info-es@cudell.pt E-mail: hydac@hydac.sk
BLr
F-57604 Forbach Cedex

HYDAC Belarus Tel.: (0033) 3 87 29 26 00 MOVICONTROL S.A. SLOVENIA
Timirjazeva 65a, biura 504-505
SL
Fax: (0033) 3 87 85 90 81 Rua Prof. Henrique de Barros 5 B HYDAC d.o.o. Slovenia
BY 220035 Minsk Belarus E-Mail (siège): 2685-339 Prior Velho Zagrebska c. 20
Tel.: (00375) 17 209 01 32-33 hydac_france@hydac.com P-1801 Lisboa Codex SL-2000 Maribor
Fax: (00375) 17 209 01 35 E-Mail (agence Nord-Est): Tel.: (00351) 219 429 900 Tel.: (00386) 2 /460 15 20
E-Mail: info@hydac.com.by ag_nest@hydac.com Fax: (00351) 219 413 500 Fax: (00386) 2 /460 15 22
Internet: www.hydac.com.by Internet: www.movicontrol.pt E-mail: info@hydac.si
AGENCE DE PARIS:
BRASIL Tel.: (0033) 1 60 13 97 26 E-Mail: geral@movicontrol.pt THAILAND
Br
HYDAC Limitada E-mail: ag_paris@hydac.com POLSKA Aerofluid Co. Ltd.
T
Rua Fukutaro Yida, 225
PL
AGENCE DE LYON: (Lithuania, Latvia) 169/4, 169/5 Moo 1
CEP 09852-060 HYDAC Sp. z o.o. Rangsit-Nakhonnayok Rd.
Br-Sao Bernardo do Campo-SP Tel.: (0033) 4 78 87 83 02
E-mail: ag_lyon@hydac.com ul. Reymonta 17 Lampakkud, Thanyaburi
Tel. (0055) 11/43 93 66 00 PL-43-190 Mikoł ˙ ow Patumthanee 12130
Fax: (0055) 11/43 93 66 17 AGENCE DE BORDEAUX: Tel.: (0048) 32 226 26 55, 32 326 29 00 Tel.: (0066) 2577 2999 (30 lines)
E-mail: hydac@hydac.com.br Tel.: (0033) 5 57 54 25 20 Fax: (0048) 32 226 40 42, 32 326 29 01 Fax: (0066) 2577 2700
CANADA E-Mail: info@hydac.com.pl Email: info@aerofluid.com
CDN
AGENCE DE CHATEAUNEUF
HYDAC Corporation LES MARTIGUES: CHINA TURKEY
PrC
14 Federal Road
Tr
Tel.: (0033) 4 42 49 61 35 HYDAC Technology (Shanghai) Ltd. HYDAC Ltd. Sti.
Welland, Ontario 28 Zhongpin Lu Namık Kemal Mahallesi
L3B 3P2 FINLAND
Shanghai Minhang Economic & Adile Nasit Bulvarı
FI
Tel.: (001) 905 / 7149322 (Estonia)

HYDAC OY Technological Development Zone 174 Sok. No.9
Fax: (001) 905 / 7144664 P.r.C.-Shanghai 200245 Tr-Esenyurt - Istanbul
Internet: www.hydac.ca Kisällintie 5
FI-01730 Vantaa Tel.: (0086) 21 / 64633510 Tel.: (0090) 212 / 428 25 25
E-mail: sales@hydac.ca Fax: (0086) 21 / 64300257 Fax: (0090) 212 / 428 70 37
Tel.: (00358) 10 773 7100
SCHWEIZ Fax: (00358) 10 773 7120 E-mail: hydacsh@hydac.com.cn E-mail: info@hydac.com.tr
CH
HYDAC Engineering AG E-Mail: hydac@hydac.fi RUSSIA TAIWAN

rUS
TW
Allmendstr. 11 HYDAC International HYDAC Technology Ltd.
CH-6312 Steinhausen/Zug GREAT BRITAIN
GB
HYDAC TECHNOLOGY Limited ul. 4-ya Magistralnaya, 5, office 31 No. 18 Shude 1st Lane, South District
Tel.: (0041) 41 / 747 03 20 rUS 123007 Moscow TW-Taichung City/Taiwan 40242
Fax: (0041) 41 / 747 03 29 De Havilland Way, Windrush Park
GB-Withney, Oxfordshire Tel.: (007) 495 980 80 01-03 Tel.: (00886) 4 / 2260 22 78
E-mail: hydac-engineering-AG@hydac.com Fax: (007) 495 980 70 20 Fax: (00886) 4 / 2260 23 52
Internet: www.hydac.ch OX29 0YG
Tel.: (0044) 1993 866366 E-Mail: info@hydac.com.ru E-Mail: sales@hydac.com.tw
HYDAC S.A. Fax: (0044) 1993 866365 Internet: www.hydac.com.ru UKRAINE
UKr
Zona Industriale 3, Via Sceresa Internet: www.hydac.co.uk Technical Office St. Petersburg HYDAC Ukraine
CH-6805 Mezzovico E-Mail: info@hydac.co.uk Obvodnyi chanel emb., 138, Büro Kiev
Tel.: (0041) 91 / 935 57 00 blok 101, of 401 ul. Novokonstantinovskaya, 9,
Fax: (0041) 91 / 935 57 01 GREECE
Gr
Delta-P Technologies Ltd. rUS 190020 St. Petersburg Korpus 13, 2 Etage
E-mail: info.coolingsystems@hydac.ch Tel.: (007) 812 495 94 62 UA 04080 Kiev
Internet: www.hydac.ch 2, Grevenon Str.
Gr-11855 Athens Fax: (007) 812 495 94 63 Tel.: (0038) 044 495 33 96
ČESKÁ REPUBLIKA Tel.: (0030) 210 3410181 E-Mail: petersb@hydac.com.ru (0038) 044 495 33 97
CZ
HYDAC S.R.O. Fax: (0030) 210 3410183 Technical Office Novokuznetsk Fax: (0038) 044 495 33 98
Kanadska 794 E-Mail: delta_pi@otenet.gr ul. Nevskogo, 1, office 300 E-mail: info@hydac.com.ua
CZ-39111 Planá nad Luznici rUS 654079 Novokuznetsk USA
USA
Tel.: (00420) 381/20 17 11 MAGYARORSZÁG

HYDAC Hidraulika Kemerovskaya Obl. HYDAC TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION
H
Fax: (00420) 381/29 12 70 Tel.: (007) 3843 99 13 46 HYCON Division

E-mail: hydac@hydac.cz és Szüréstechnika Kft.
Jász u.152/A Tel./Fax: (007) 3843 99 13 45 2260 City Line Road
DEUTSCHLAND H-1131 Budapest E-Mail: novokuz@hydac.com.ru USA-Bethlehem, PA 18017
HYDAC-Büro Berlin Tel.: (001) 610 266-0100
D
Tel.: (0036) 1 359 93 59 Technical Office Ulyanovsk

IBH Ingenieurbüro und Fax: (0036) 1 239 73 02 ul. Efremova, 29, office 418 Fax: (001) 610 266-3540
Handelsvertretung Hammer GmbH E-mail: hydac@axelero.hu rUS 432042 Ulyanovsk Internet: www.hydacusa.com
Kaiser-Wilhelm-Str. 17 Tel.: (007) 8422 61 34 53 E-mail: sales@hydacusa.com
D-12247 Berlin HONG KONG
HK
Hydac Technology (Hongkong) Ltd. Fax: (007) 8422 61 34 52 VIETNAM

Tel.: 0 30 / 7 72 80 50
VN
Room 602, 6/F, Silvercord Tower 1, E-Mail: uljan@hydac.com.ru HYDAC International

Fax: 0 30 / 7 73 80 80 E-Town Building, Mezzanine Floor
30 Canton Road, ARGENTINA
rA
HYDAC-Büro Südost Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong HYDAC TECHNOLOGY Executive office, Room 7,
Wiesestr. 189 Tel: (00852) - 23 - 69 35 68 ARGENTINA S.R.L. 364, Cong Hoa Street,
D-07551 Gera Fax: (00852) - 23 - 69 35 67 Av. Belgrano 2729 Tan Binh District
Tel.: 03 65 / 73 97-320 (B1611DVG) Don Torcuato VN-Ho Chi Minh City
Fax: 03 65 / 73 97-600 ITALIA Tel.: (00848) 812 0545 Etx: 215 & 214
HYDAC S.p.A. rA-Tigre / Buenos Aires
I
HYDAC-Büro Nordost Tel.: (0054) 11 4727-1155/0770/2323 Fax: (00848) 812 0546

Via Archimede, 76
Pankstraße 8-10 (Gebäude H) I-20041 Agrate Brianza Celular 15 32 96 9797 SOUTH-AFRICA
ZA
D-13127 Berlin Tel.: (0039) 039 / 642211 E-Mail: argentina@hydac.com (Namibia, Zimbabwe)
Tel.: 0 30 / 475 98 40 Fax: (0039) 039 / 6899682 CHILE HYDAC Technology Pty Ltd.
rCH
Fax: 0 30 / 475 98 4-29 Internet: www.hydac.it HYDAC Chile 165 Van der Bijl Street
HYDAC-Büro Bremen E-mail: hydac@hydac.it Las Araucarias # 9080 - 9110 Edenvale 1614
Riedemannstraße 1 Parque Industrial Las Araucarias ZA-Johannesburg
INDIA Tel.: (0027) 11 723 90 80
IND
D-27572 Bremerhaven HYDAC (India) Pvt. Ltd. Quilicura

Tel.: 0471 / 70 0572 - 4200 rCH-8720041 Santiago de Chile Fax: (0027) 11 453 72 37
A-58 TTC Industrial Area hydacza@hydac.com
Fax: 0471 / 70 0572 - 4242 MIDC, Mahape Tel.: (0056) 2 /5 84 67 54
HYDAC-Büro Hamburg IND-Navi Mumbai-400 701 Fax: (0056) 2 /5 84 67 55 Hytec S.A.
Mühlenweg 131-139 Tel. (0091) 22-41 11 88 88/12/79 guillermo.viertel@hydac.com P.O. Box 538
D-22844 Norderstedt Fax: (0091) 22-27 78 11 80 INDONESIA 113 Koornhof Str. Meadowdale
E-mail: k.venkat@hydacindia.com ZA-Edenvale 1610
rI
Tel.: 040 / 52 60 07-0 Hydac Technology Pte Ltd

Fax: 040 / 52 60 07-15 Rep Office Indonesia Tel.: (0027) 11 / 573 5400
JAPAN Fax: (0027) 11 / 573 5401
HYDAC-Büro Nord HYDAC Co. Ltd. Perwate Tower - CBD Pluit
J
6th Floor, Suite A E-mail: olivern@hytec.co.za

Kirchhorster Str. 39 KSK Bldg. Main-2F
D-30659 Hannover 3-25-7 Hatchobori, Chuo-ku Jl. Pluit Selatan Raya
Tel.: 05 11 / 56 35 35-0 Tokyo, 104-0032 Japan rI-14440 Jakarta
Fax: 05 11 / 56 35 35-56 Tel.: (0081) 3 / 3537-3620 Tel.: (006221) 300 27505
Fax: (0081) 3 / 3537-3622 Fax: (006221) 300 27506
HYDAC-Büro West E-mail: info@hydac.co.id
Riedinger Str. 6 LUXEMBURG Internet: www.hydac.co.id
FRIEDERICH-HYDROPART S.A.R.L.
L
D-45141 Essen
Tel.: 02 01 / 3 20 89-0 Route d’Esch, C.P. 38
Fax: 02 01 / 32 84 41 L-3801 Schifflange
Tel.: (00352) 54 52 44
HYDAC-Büro Mitte Fax: (00352) 54 52 48
Dieselstr. 9
MALAYSIA
MAL
D-64293 Darmstadt
Tel.: 0 61 51 / 81 45-0 HYDAC Technology Sdn. Bhd.
Fax: 0 61 51 / 81 45-22 No. 16 Jalan Pengacara U1/48
Temasya Industrial Park
HYDAC-Büro Südwest MAL-40150 Shah Alalm
Rehgrabenstr. 3 Tel.: (0060) 3 -55670250
D-66125 Dudweiler Fax: (0060) 3 -55670252
Tel.: 0 68 97 / 509-01 E-mail: common@hydac.com.my
Fax: 0 68 97 / 509-1422
HYDAC-Büro Süd
Dieselstraße 30
D-71546 Aspach
Tel.: 0 71 91 / 34 51-0
Fax: 0 71 91 / 34 51-4033
Accumulator Technology 30.000
Global Presence.
Local Expertise.
www.hydac.com
Filter Technology 70.000
Electronic
Product Catalogue
Process Technology 77.000
Filter Systems 79.000
Electronic Product Catalogue

Compact Hydraulics 53.000
HYDAC Headquarters
HYDAC Companies
HYDAC Distributors and Service Partners
Accessories 61.000
HYDAC ELECTRONIC Hauptstraße 27

GMBH 66128 Saarbrücken
Deutschland
Tel.:
+49 6897 509-01
Electronics 180.000
Fax:
+49 6897 509-1726
E-Mail: electronic@hydac.com
E 180.000.2/11.13
E 180.000.2/11.13
Cooling Systems 5.700

E 180 000 2 11 13

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

E 180 000 2 11 13

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Accumulator Technology 30.

Electronic Product Catalogue

HYDAC ELECTRONIC Hauptstraße 27

+49 6897 509-01

The range of sensors includes products

Almost all these products are

Development and manufacturing plant in Saarbrücken-Gersweiler.

HYDAC Servicenter, a complete Technical advice

4. Pressure sensors with flush membrane 80 - 95 4

5. Electronic temperature transmitters 96 - 103 5

6. Electronic temperature switches 104 - 129 6

7 7. Sensors for distance and position 130 - 145

9 9. Flow transmitters / flow switches 164 - 181

10 10. Speed sensors 184 - 193

11 11. Sensors 196 - 201

12 12. Sensors 202 - 311

13. Display and monitoring units 312 - 315 13

14. Service instruments 316 - 331 14

15. Condition monitoring products 332 - 349 15

16. OEM products for large volume production 350 - 381 16

- Safety cut-off devices

Iron - Steel - Metal Wind Turbines

Machine Tools Power Plant Technology

Pulp and Paper Industry Transformers

Automotive Production Oil and Gas Industry

Shipping Condition Monitoring

Pressure transmitters for general applications:

Further pressure transmitters for special applications can be found in the

Pin HDA HDA HDA

HYDAC electronic GmbH

profile seal ring

male electr. conn.

Pin HDA 47X6-A HDA 47X6-B

Other approvals on request

Pin HDA 4746-A

5 profile seal ring

male electr. conn.

HYDAC electronic GmbH

Protocol data for CANopen:

short circuit protection are provided.

profile seal ring

male electr. conn.

Pin HDA 44X6-A HDA 44X6-B

B.F.S.L.= Best Fit Straight Line

Other approvals on request

Pin HDA 4446-A

5 profile seal ring

male electr. conn.

HYDAC electronic GmbH

5 profile seal ring

Pin HDA 43X6-A HDA 43X6-B

HYDAC electronic GmbH

Pressure ranges in bar 1 Signal+

Accessories: Pin HDA 4346-A

5 profile seal ring

male electr. conn.

HYDAC electronic GmbH

5 profile seal ring

Pin HDA 41X6-A HDA 41X6-B

HYDAC electronic GmbH

FS (Full Scale) = relative to complete measuring range

Other approvals on request

Pressure ranges in bar 1 Signal+

 Pressure can be displayed in

 Pressure can be displayed in bar, psi, G1/4 DIN 3852